preliminary service manual - epanorama av...adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the...

263
No. 51907 Oct. 2001 AV-36F802 AV-36F702 COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. AV-36F802 /Y AV-36F702 /Y CONTENTS ! SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ! SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (APPENDED) STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (APPENDED) SERVICE MANUAL COLOUR TELEVISION RM-C303G [AV-36F702] RM-C301G [AV-36F802] ® PRELIMINARY BASIC CHASSIS AC

Upload: others

Post on 02-Nov-2020

1 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

No. 51907Oct. 2001

AV-36F802AV-36F702

COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.

AV-36F802 /YAV-36F702 /Y

CONTENTS! SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

! SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (APPENDED)

STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (APPENDED)

SERVICE MANUALCOLOUR TELEVISION

RM-C303G[AV-36F702]

RM-C301G[AV-36F802]

®

PRELIMINARY

BASIC CHASSIS

AC

Page 2: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS1. The design of this product contains special hardware, many circuits

and components specially for safety purposes. For continued pro-tection, no changes should be made to the original design unlessauthorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts mustbe identical to those used in the original circuits. Service should beperformed by qualified personnel only.

2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the products should not bemade. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufactur-er's warranty and will further relieve the manufacturer of responsi-bility for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom.

3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have specialsafety-related characteristics. These characteristics are often notevident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded bythem necessarily be obtained by using replacement componentsrated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which havethese special safety characteristics are identified in the parts list ofService manual. Electrical components having such features areidentified by shading on the schematics and by ( ) on theparts list in Service manual. The use of a substitute replacementwhich does not have the same safety characteristics as the recom-mended replacement part shown in the parts list of Service manualmay cause shock, fire, or other hazards.

4. Use isolation transformer when hot chassis.The chassis and any sub-chassis contained in some products areconnected to one side of the AC power line. An isolation transformerof adequate capacity should be inserted between the product andthe AC power supply point while performing any service on someproducts when the HOT chassis is exposed.

5. Don't short between the LIVE side ground and ISOLATED (NEU-TRAL) side ground or EARTH side ground when repairing.Some model's power circuit is partly different in the GND. The dif-ference of the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND, theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND and EARTH : ( ) sideGND. Don't short between the LIVE side GND andISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND or EARTH side GND and nevermeasure with a measuring apparatus (oscilloscope etc.) the LIVEside GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND or EARTH sideGND at the same time.If above note will not be kept, a fuse or any parts will be broken.

6. If any repair has been made to the chassis, it is recommended thatthe B1 setting should be checked or adjusted (See ADJUSTMENTOF B1 POWER SUPPLY).

7. The high voltage applied to the picture tube must conform with thatspecified in Service manual. Excessive high voltage can cause anincrease in X-Ray emission, arcing and possible component dam-age, therefore operation under excessive high voltage conditionsshould be kept to a minimum, or should be prevented. If severearcing occurs, remove the AC power immediately and determinethe cause by visual inspection (incorrect installation, cracked ormelted high voltage harness, poor soldering, etc.). To maintain theproper minimum level of soft X-Ray emission, components in thehigh voltage circuitry including the picture tube must be the exactreplacements or alternatives approved by the manufacturer of thecomplete product.

8. Do not check high voltage by drawing an arc. Use a high voltagemeter or a high voltage probe with a VTVM. Discharge the picturetube before attempting meter connection, by connecting a clip leadto the ground frame and connecting the other end of the lead througha 10kØ 2W resistor to the anode button.

9. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extraprecaution should be given to assure correct lead dress in the highvoltage circuit area. Where a short circuit has occurred, those com-ponents that indicate evidence of overheating should be replaced.Always use the manufacturer's replacement components.

10. Isolation Check(Safety for Electrical Shock Hazard)After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation checkon the exposed metal parts of the cabinet (antenna terminals, video/audio input and output terminals, Control knobs, metal cabinet,screwheads, earphone jack, control shafts, etc.) to be sure the prod-uct is safe to operate without danger of electrical shock.

(1) Dielectric Strength TestThe isolation between the AC primary circuit and all metal partsexposed to the user, particularly any exposed metal part having areturn path to the chassis should withstand a voltage of 1100V AC(r.m.s.) for a period of one second.(. . . . Withstand a voltage of 1100V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance ratedup to 120V, and 3000V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance rated 200V ormore, for a period of one second.)This method of test requires a test equipment not generally found inthe service trade.

(2) Leakage Current CheckPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Using a “Leakage CurrentTester”, measure the leakage current from each exposed metal partof the cabinet, particularly any exposed metal part having a returnpath to the chassis, to a known good earth ground (water pipe, etc.).Any leakage current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).

• Alternate Check MethodPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Use an AC voltmeter hav-ing 1000 ohms per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner.Connect a 1500Ø 10W resistor paralleled by a 0.15µF AC-type ca-pacitor between an exposed metal part and a known good earthground (water pipe, etc.). Measure the AC voltage across the resis-tor with the AC voltmeter. Move the resistor connection to each ex-posed metal part, particularly any exposed metal part having a re-turn path to the chassis, and measure the AC voltage across theresistor. Now, reverse the plug in the AC outlet and repeat eachmeasurement. Any voltage measured must not exceed 0.75V AC(r.m.s.). This corresponds to 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.3V AC (r.m.s.).This corresponds to 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).

11. High voltage hold down circuit check.After repair of the high voltage hold down circuit, this circuit shall bechecked to operate correctly.See item “How to check the high voltage hold down circuit”.

GOODEARTHGROUND 0.15 µF AC-TYPE

AC VOLTMETER(HAVING 1000Ø/V,OR MORE SENSITIVITY)

PLACE THIS PROBEON EACH EXPOSEDMETAL PART1500Ø 10W

A V

This mark shows a fast POWER CORDREPLACEMENT WARNINGConnecting thr white line side ofpower cord to “WHT” character side.

operating fuse, theletters indicated belowshow the rating.

PWB

WHT

PW

White line side

Page 3: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 3

SERVICE ADJUSTMENTSADJUSTMENT PREPARATION1. You can make the necessary adjustments for this unit with either the remote control unit or with the adjustment equipment and parts

as given below.2. Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values which set the

screen to its optimum condition may differ from the initial settings.3. Make sure that AC power is turned on correctly.4. Turn on the power for the set and test equipment before use, and start the adjustment procedures after waiting at least 30 minutes.5. Unless otherwise specified, prepare the most suitable reception or input signal for adjustment.6. Never touch any adjustment parts, which are not specified in the list for this adjustment-variable resistors, transformers, capacitors, etc.7. Presetting before adjustment.

Unless otherwise specified in the adjustment instructions, preset the following functions with the remote control unit.

VIDEO STATUS STANDARD

HYPER SURROUND OFF

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE CENTER

TINT, COLOR, PICTURE,CENTER

BRIGHT, DETAIL

MEASURING INSTRUMENT1. DC voltmeter(or digital voltmeter)2. Oscilloscope3. Signal generator ( Pattern generator ) [NTSC]4. Remote control unit5. TV audio multiplex signal generator6. Frequency counter7. Resistor (1MØ)

ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

• Check of B1 POWER SUPPLY

• RF AGC adjustment

• FOCUS adjustment

• WHITE BALANCE adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (Low Light) adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (High Light) adjustmentPIP HIGH LIGHT WHITE BALANCE Adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]

• BRIGHT adjustmentSUB BRIGHT adjustment

• CONTRAST adjustmentSUB CONTRAST adjustment

• DEFLECTION adjustmentV CENTER and TRAPEZIUM adjustmentV SIZE and V LINEARITY adjustmentH SIZE and H POSITION adjustmentSIDE PIN and CORNER PIN adjustmentPIP DISPLAY POSITION adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]

• User mode setting position

• CHROMA adjustmentSUB COLOR adjustmentSUB TINT adjustment

• MTS circuit adjustmentINPUT LEVEL checkSTEREO VCO adjustmentSAP VCO adjustmentFILTER checkSEPARATION adjustment

• PURITY and CONVERGENCE adjustmentsPURITY adjustmentSTATIC CONVERGENCE adjustmentDYNAIC CONVERGENCE adjustment

Page 4: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

4 No. 51907

ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

FRONT

S702 : MENUS703 : CHANNEL–S704 : CHANNEL+S705 : VOLUME–S706 : VOLUME+

LINE FILTER PWB

FRONT

3D Y/C MODULE PWB

FRONT

FRONTTOP

FRONT

TOP

TOP

DAF PWB

CRT SOCKET PWB

(SOLDER SIDE)

PIP PWB

AV SELECTOR PWB

MAIN PWB

POWER SW PWB FRONT CONTROL PWB

CN006B

P

B CN007

DAFCP

TP-E1

TP-G

S702S704S705 S703

S706IC101

D101

S701

E3

F901125V 5A

CN005

CN002

CN001

PW

CN005CN004

CN004

S1 DAF

UPPER : HMIDDLE : FOCUSLOWER : SCREEN

MPX

C

Q

E1HV

CP

E2

E1

K

P

CN

003

CN

002

CN

001

J501

SS

CN006 CN007

IC702

IC701 CPU

DEG

TU001

(Only for AV-36F802)

(Only for AV-36F802)

TU001

J601

R027

J602

K

Q

R507

Q511Heatsink

J502J504 J503

CN003

TU001

CN008CN009

FRONT

Page 5: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 5

BASIC OPERATION OF SERVICE MENU1. TOOL OF SERVICE MENU OPERATION

Operate the SERVICE MENU with the REMOTE CONTROL UNIT.

2. SERVICE MENU ITEMS

In general, basic setting (adjustments) items or verifications are performed in the SERVICE MENU.

• PICTURE ............................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the VIDEO/CHROMA and DEFLECTION circuits.

• SOUND .................................. This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the AUDIO circuit.

• THEATER .............................. This is used when the THEATER MODE is adjusted.

• OTHERS ................................ This is used when the OTHERS MODE is adjustment.

• PIP ......................................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the PIP circuit. [Only for AV-36F802]

• LOW LIGHT ........................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.

• HIGH LIGHT .......................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.

• RF AFC .................................. This is used when the RF AFC MODE is verfifed. [Do not adjust/Only for AV-36F702]

• RF AFC1 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC1 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust/Only for AV-36F802]

• RF AFC2 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC2 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust/Only for AV-36F802]

• VCO (CW) .............................. This is not used for service.

• I2C BUS CTRL ...................... This is used when ON/OFF of the I2C BUS CTRL is set. [Fixed ON]

3. Basic Operations of the SERVICE MENU

(1) How to enter the SERVICE MENU.Press SLEEP TIMER key and, while the indication of “SLEEP TIMER 0 MIN.” is being displayed, press DISPLAY key and VIDEO STATUSkey on the remote control unit simultaneously to enter the SERVICE MENU screen 1 shown in the next figure page.

(2) SERVICE MENU screen selectionPress the UP / DOWN key of the MENU to select any of the following items.(The letters of the selected items are displayed in yellow.)

[AV-36F702]

• PICTURE • SOUND

• THEATER •OTHERS

• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT

• RF AFC

• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL

(3) Enter the any setting ( adjustment ) mode[AV-36F702]

• PICTURE, SOUND and OTHERS mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the

screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 is

displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS setting can be performed.[AV-36F802]

• PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS and 3-D Y/C mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN

MENU ), the screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 or

the 3-D Y/C mode screen 6 is displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C setting can be performed.

• PIP mode [Only for AV-36F802]1) If select the PIP item, and the LEFT/RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU), the screen 6 will be displayed as shown

in figure page later.2) Then the UP/DOWN key is pressed, the PIP mode screen 7 is displayed, and the PIP setting can be performed.[AV-36F702]

• THEATER, LOW LIGHT, HIGH LIGHT, RF AFC, VCO(CW) and I2C BUS CTRL mode1) If select any of THEATER / LOW LIGHT / HIGH LIGHT / RF AFC / VCO (CW) / I2C BUS CTRL items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed

from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the screens 9 10 11 12 15 16 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the settings or verifications can be performed.[AV-36F802]

• THEATER, LOW LIGHT, HIGH LIGHT, RF AFC1, RF AFC2, VCO(CW) and I2C BUS CTRL mode1) If select any of THEATER / LOW LIGHT / HIGH LIGHT / RF AFC1 / RF AFC2 / VCO (CW) / I2C BUS CTRL items, and the LEFT / RIGHT

key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the screens 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 will be displayed as shown in figure pagelater.

2) Then the settings or verifications can be performed.

[AV-36F802]

• PICTURE • SOUND

• THEATER • OTHERS

• PIP • 3-D Y/C

• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT

• RF AFC1 • RF AFC2

• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL

Page 6: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

6 No. 51907

SERVICE MENU

PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERSPIP 3D Y/CLOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

IT

SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU) SCREEN PICTURE MODE

EXIT BY

SELECT BYEXITEXIT BY

1. BRIGHTSTATUS

99999999999

1. NOISE DET.STATUS

99999999999

1. OSD POS. 999

SOUND MODE OTHERS MODE

1. PIP BRSTATUS

99999999999

HIGH LIGHT MODE

SCREEN PIP MODE (Only for AV-36F802)

EXITEXIT BY

SELECT BY

TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW

RF AFC1 ONFINE 999

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

IT

RF AFC1 MODE (Only for AV-36F802)[DO NOT ADJUST]

RF AFC2 MODE (Only for AV-36F802)[DO NOT ADJUST]

I2C BUS CTRL MODE[FIXED ON]

EXIT BY

TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW

RF AFC2 ONFINE 999

HIGH LEVELREFERENCE LEVELLOW LEVEL

SYNC : YES

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

I2C BUS ON

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

THEATER MODE (1/2) THEATER MODE (2/2)

TINT 999 B CUT. 999COLOR 999 R DRIVE 999PICTURE 999 B DRIVE 999BRIGHT 999 DC REST. 999DETAIL 999 BLK ST. 999R CUT. 999 GMM PNT 999G CUT. 999

PAGE 1/2

EXITEXIT BY

SELECT BYOPERATE BY

CD MAT. 99 CMP CD M 99RY GAIN 99 CMP RY G 99GY PHASE 99 CMP GY P 99CORING 99 CMP COR 99

PAGE 2/2

EXITEXIT BY

SELECT BYOPERATE BY

BRIGHT

LOW LIGHT MODE

999 999

999

999

HIGH LIGHT999 999

2 31

11

13

4 5

7 8

9

14

VCO (CW) MODE[DO NOT USE]

15

16

10

SERVICE MENU

PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERS

LOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFCVCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

[AV-36F702]

[AV-36F802]

TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW

RF AFC ONFINE 999

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

RF AFC MODE (Only for AV-36F702)[DO NOT ADJUST]

12

1. YC 001STATUS

99999999999

3-D Y/C MODE(Only for AV-36F802)

6

Page 7: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 7

(4) Setting method1) UP / DOWN key of the MENU

Select the SETTING ITEM.

2) LEFT / RIGHT key of the MENUSetting (adjust) the SETTING VALUE of the SETTING ITEM.When the key is released the SETTING VALUE will be stored (memorized).

3) EXIT keyReturns to the previous screen.

(5) Releasing SERVICE MENU1) After returning to the SERVICE MENU upon completion of the setting (ad-

justment) work, press the EXIT key again.

¤ The settings for LOW LIGHT and HIGH LIGHT are described in the WHITE BAL-ANCE page of ADJUSTMENT.

1. BRIGHTSTATUS

99999999999

SETTING ITEM

INITIALSETTING VALUE (Adjust)SETTING VALUE

PICTURE MODE

Page 8: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

8 No. 51907

INITIAL SETTING VALUE OF SERVICE MENU1. Adjustment of the SERVICE MENU is made on the basis of the initial setting values; however, the new setting values which set the

screen in its optimum condition may differ from the initial setting.2. Do not change the initial setting values of the setting (Adjustment) items not listed in “ADJUSTMENT”.

• PICTURE MODEThe four setting items in the video mode No.6 EXT BRI., No.7 EXT PIC., No.8 EXT COL. and No.9 EXT TINT are linked to the items in the TVMODE No.1 BRIGHT, No.2 PICTURE, No.3 COLOR and No.4 TINT, respectively. When the setting items in the TV mode are adjusted, thevalues in the setting items in the video mode are revised automatically to the same values in the TV mode.(The initial setting values given in ( )are off-set values.)When the four items (No.6, 7, 8 and 9) are adjusted in the video mode, the setting values in each item are revised independently.

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 BRIGHT 000 — 127 063

2 PICTURE 000 — 127 070

3 COLOR 000 — 127 072

4 TINT 000 — 127 063

5 TV DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702

TV DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802

6 EXT BRIGHT ±025 ±000

7 EXT PICT. ±025 +002

8 EXT COLOR ±025 ±000

9 EXT TINT ±025 ±000

10 EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702

EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802

11 CMP BRIGHT ±025 ±000

12 CMP PICT. ±025 ±000

13 CMP COLOR 000 — 127 068

14 CMP TINT 000 — 127 068

15 CMP DETAIL 000 — 063 050

16 CMP R CUT ±025 –011

17 CMP G CUT ±025 ±000

18 CMP B CUT ±025 –001

19 CMP R DRV ±025 ±000

20 CMP B DRV ±025 ±000

21 WPL 000 / 001 001

22 B. B. SW 000 / 001 000

23 C TRAP 000 / 001 000

24 CORING 000 / 001 000 AV-36F702

CORING 000 / 001 001 AV-36F802

25 CMP CORING 000 / 001 001

26 TV SHARPF 000 / 001 001

27 EXT SHARPF 000 / 001 001

28 CMP SHARPF 000 / 001 001

29 RGB CONT 000 — 063 031

30 TV ID SENS 000 / 001 000

31 EXT ID SEN 000 / 001 001

32 F ID 000 / 001 000

33 Y MUTE 000 / 001 000

34 AUDIO ATT 000 — 127 127

35 SUB CONT 000 — 015 008

Page 9: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 9

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

36 R Y GAIN 000 / 001 001

37 CMP R Y GA 000 / 001 001

38 G Y PHASE 000 / 001 000

39 CMP G Y PH 000 / 001 000

40 CD MATRIX 000 — 003 003

41 CMP CD MAT 000 — 003 002

42 BLACK ST 000 — 003 001

43 DC REST 000 — 003 001

44 COLOR GMM 000 / 001 000

45 UV/CBCR 000 / 001 001

46 AT FLESH 000 / 001 000

47 ABL GAIN 000 — 003 000

48 ABL ST PNT 000 — 003 003

49 RGB ABCL 000 / 001 001

50 TV BPF TOF 000 / 001 000

51 EXT BPF TOF 000 / 001 000

52 GMM PNT 000 — 003 003

53 SVM GAIN 000 — 003 002

54 CMP SVM GA 000 — 003 002

55 SVM PHASE 000 / 001 000

56 AUDIO SW 000 / 001 000

57 BUZZ 000 / 001 000

58 IF FREQ 000 / 001 000

59 RF AGC 000 — 063 045

60 AFT MUTE 000 / 001 000

61 AFT SENS 000 / 001 001

62 R/G DRV SW 000 / 001 001

63 BLK SW 000 / 001 000

64 V S COR 000 — 015 010

65 V LIN 000 — 015 005

66 V SIZE 000 — 127 063

67 V AGC 000 / 001 000

68 V CENTER 000 — 063 052

69 TV AFC 000 — 003 000

70 EXT AFC 000 — 003 002

71 V POSI 000 — 007 000

72 H POSI 000 — 031 020

73 H SIZE 000 — 063 028

74 TV V FREQ 000 — 003 000

75 EXT V FREQ 000 — 003 003

76 SIDE PIN 000 — 063 025

77 STAND BY 000 / 001 000

78 TRAPEZ 000 — 063 035

79 V RAMP REF 000 / 001 001

80 V 48HZ 000 / 001 000

81 V EHT 000 — 007 000

82 TOP PIN 000 — 031 012

Page 10: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

10 No. 51907

83 H EHT 000 — 007 000

84 BTM PIN 000 — 031 011

85 V BLK LOW 000 — 003 000

86 V BLK UP 000 — 003 000

87 CAPTION IN 000 / 001 000

88 H BLK 000 / 001 000

89 SCREEN 000 / 001 000

90 ACB SW 000 / 001 000

91 ACB PULSE 000 — 015 007

92 OVER MODU 000 / 001 001

93 CB/CR_FIL 000 / 001 001

94 TEST 000 — 255 128

95 RF S/N TY 000 — 00 1 002 (36F702) / 001 (36F802)

96 EXT S/N TY 000 — 002 002 (36F702) / 001 (36F802)

97 RF SN YC E 000 — 255 005

98 RF SN YC F 000 — 255 016

99 RF SN YC G 000 — 063 032

100 RF SN YC H 000 — 255 025

101 EX SN YC E 000 — 255 005

102 EX SN YC F 000 — 255 016

103 EX SN YC G 000 — 063 032

104 EX SN YC H 000 — 255 025

105 RF SN VC 1 000 — 063 000

106 RF SN VC 2 000 — 063 007

107 RF SN VC 3 000 — 063 014

108 RF SN VC 4 000 — 063 021

109 EX SN VC 1 000 — 063 000

110 EX SN VC 2 000 — 063 007

111 EX SN VC 3 000 — 063 014

112 EX SN VC 4 000 — 063 021

113 COR LEVEL 000 — 003 003

114 VNR CHK 000 — 255 003

115 YC SN TIME 000 — 255 005

116 VC SN TIME 000 — 255 005

117 VM DATA A ±127 +008

118 VM DATA B ±127 –004

119 VM DATA C ±127 –016

120 VM DATA D 000 / 001 001

121 VC SN STOP 000 — 255 010

122 CH MUTE 000 / 001 000

123 VM OFF TY 000 / 001 000

124 VC VM OFF 000/001 001

125 YC VM OFF 000 — 255 255

126 F LOCK 000 — 002 002

127 VF LOCK EX 000/001 000

128 PURI RGB 000 — 063 031

129 PURI BCK 000/001 000

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

Page 11: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 11

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 NOISE DET. 000 / 001 001

2 IN LEVEL 000 — 063 025

3 FH MONITOR 000 / 001 000

4 STEREO VCO 000 — 063 030

5 PILOT CAN. 000 / 001 000

6 FILTER 000 — 063 030

7 LOW SEP. 000 — 063 028

8 HI SEP. 000 — 063 025

9 5FH MON. 000 / 001 000

10 SAP VCO 000 — 063 003

11 IN GAIN 000 / 001 000

12 FIL. OFFSET 000 — 010 000

13 BBE BASS ±015 +001

14 BBE TRE ±015 –001

• SOUND MODE

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

TINT ±20 –06

COLOR ±20 –03

PICTURE ±50 –15

BRIGHT ±20 ±00

DETAIL ±20 +03

R CUTOFF ±20 ±00

G CUTOFF ±20 ±00

B CUTOFF ±20 ±00

R DRIVE ±99 +07

B DRIVE ±99 –25

DC REST. 00 — 03 01

BLK ST. 00 — 03 00

GMM PNT 00 — 03 01

CD MATRIX 00 — 03 01

RY GAIN 00 / 01 01

GY PHASE 00 / 01 00

CORING 00 / 01 01

CMP CD M 00 — 03 01

CMP RY G 00 / 01 01

CMP GY P 00 / 01 00

CMP COR 00 / 01 01

• THEATER MODE

Page 12: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

12 No. 51907

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 OSD POS. 000 — 007 002

2 CCD POS. 000 — 015 003

3 EOSEL 000 / 001 000

4 MENU COLOR 000 — –030 –010

5 MENU PICT. 000 — –030 –010

6 MENU BRI. 000 — –030 –010

• OTHERS MODE

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 PIP BR 000 — 015 005

2 PIP PICT 000 — 075 045

3 PIP TINT 000 — 063 036

4 PIP COL 000 — 015 010

5 P R CUT 000 — 015 003

6 P G CUT 000 — 015 000

7 P B CUT 000 — 015 002

8 P R DR 000 — 255 052

9 P G DR 000 — 255 055

10 P B DR 000 — 255 060

11 LEFT POS. 000 — 255 012

12 RIGHT POS. 000 — 255 026

13 UPPER POS. 000 — 127 012

14 LOWER POS. 000 — 127 011

15 PICT LOCK 000 / 001 001

16 SELDEL 000 — 007 000

17 AGCFIX 000 / 001 001

18 AGCADST 000 / 001 000

19 AGC 000 — 015 007

20 VSPDEL 000 — 031 000

21 VSPISQ 000 / 001 001

22 YCOR 000 / 001 001

23 XFREQF 000 / 001 001

24 WTCHDG 000 / 001 001

25 COLON 000 / 001 000

26 ACQNEW 000 / 001 000

27 DSTDET 000 / 001 001

28 CRIBEOK 000 / 001 000

29 FCBEOK 000 / 001 000

30 NOCRID 000 / 001 000

31 NONSED 000 / 001 000

• PIP MODE [Only for AV-36F802]

Page 13: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 13

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 YC 001 000 ~ 003 001

2 YC 002 000 ~ 003 001

3 YC 003 000 ~ 003 001

4 YC 004 000 ~ 003 000

5 YC 005 000 ~ 003 000

6 YC 006 000 ~ 003 000

7 YC 007 000 ~ 003 003

8 YC 008 000 ~ 003 000

9 YC 009 000 ~ 003 001

10 YC 010 000 ~ 003 000

11 YC 011 000 ~ 007 004

12 YC 012 000 ~ 007 002

13 YC 013 000 ~ 015 002

14 YC 014 000 ~ 015 010

15 YC 015 000 ~ 015 002

16 YC 016 000 ~ 015 004

17 YC 017 000 / 001 000

18 YC 018 000 / 001 000

19 YC 019 000 ~ 003 002

20 YC 020 000 / 001 000

21 YC 021 000 / 001 000

22 YC 022 000 ~ 003 002

23 YC 023 000 / 001 000

24 YC 024 000 / 001 000

25 YC 025 000 / 001 000

26 YC 026 000 ~ 003 000

27 YC 027 000 ~ 003 001

28 YC 028 000 ~ 003 001

29 YC 029 000 ~ 003 001

30 YC 030 000 ~ 003 001

31 YC 031 000 ~ 003 002

32 YC 032 000 / 001 000

33 YC 033 000 ~ 007 000

34 YC 034 000 ~ 015 000

35 YC 035 000 ~ 007 002

36 YC 036 000 ~ 031 015

37 YC 037 000 ~ 003 000

38 YC 038 000 ~ 015 009

39 YC 039 000 ~ 003 001

40 YC 040 000 ~ 003 001

41 YC 041 000 / 001 000

42 YC 042 000 / 001 000

43 YC 043 000 / 001 000

44 YC 044 000 / 001 001

45 YC 045 000 ~ 015 003

46 YC 046 000 ~ 015 012

47 YC 047 000 ~ 015 008

• 3-D Y/C MODE [Only for AV-36F802]

Page 14: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

14 No. 51907

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

48 YC 048 000 ~ 015 004

49 YC 049 000 ~ 015 010

50 YC 050 000 / 001 001

51 YC 051 000 / 001 001

52 YC 052 000 ~ 003 000

53 YC 053 000 / 001 000

54 YC 054 000 / 001 001

55 YC 055 000 / 001 001

56 YC 056 000 / 001 001

57 YC 057 000 ~ 015 000

58 YC 058 000 / 001 000

59 YC 059 000 / 001 001

60 YC 060 000 ~ 003 000

61 YC 061 000 ~ 015 000

62 YC 062 DBL 000 ~ 007 002

63 YC 063 N/A 000 ~ 015 002

64 YC 064 N/A 000 ~ 015 004

65 YC 065 N/A 000 ~ 015 002

66 YC 066 N/A 000 ~ 015 004

67 YC 067 000 / 001 000

68 YC 068 000 / 001 000

69 YC 069 000 / 001 000

70 YC 070 FIX 000 ~ 003 000

71 YC 071 000 / 001 000

72 YC 072 000 / 001 000

73 YC 073 000 / 001 001

74 YC 074 FIX 000 / 001 000

75 YC 075 FIX 000 / 001 000

76 YC 076 000 / 001 001

77 YC 077 FIX 000 / 001 000

78 YC 078 FIX 000 / 001 000

79 YC 079 FIX 000 ~ 007 005

80 YC 080 FIX 000 ~ 015 000

81 YC 081 FIX 000 ~ 015 008

82 YC 082 FIX 000 ~ 015 004

83 YC 083 FIX 000 ~ 015 004

84 YC 084 DBL 000 ~ 255 112

85 YC 085 DBL 000 ~ 255 008

86 YC 086 000 / 001 001

87 YC 087 000 ~ 003 003

88 YC 088 000 / 001 001

89 YC 089 000 / 001 000

90 YC 090 000 / 001 000

91 YC 091 000 / 001 000

92 YC 092 N/A 000 / 001 000

93 YC 093 N/A 000 / 001 000

94 YC 094 DBL 000 ~ 003 001

Page 15: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 15

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

95 YC 095 DBL 000 / 001 001

96 YC 096 DBL 000 / 001 001

97 YC 097 DBL 000 / 001 000

98 YC 098 DBL 000 / 001 000

99 YC 099 DBL 000 ~ 003 000

100 YC 100 DBL 000 ~ 003 000

101 YC 101 DBL 000 / 001 000

102 YC 102 DBL 000 / 001 000

103 YC 103 DBL 000 / 001 001

104 YC 104 DBL 000 / 001 000

105 YC 105 DBL 000 / 011 000

106 YC 106 DBL 000 / 001 000

107 YC 107 DBL 000 ~ 007 002

108 3-D Y/C 000 / 001 001

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

R CUTOFF 0 — 255 085

G CUTOFF 0 — 255 085

B CUTOFF 0 — 255 085

• LOW LIGHT MODE

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

R DRIVE 0 — 127 060

B DRIVE 0 — 127 060

• HIGH LIGHT MODE

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

RF AFC1 ON / OFF ON

FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×

• RF AFC1 MODE [Only for AV-36F802]

DO NOTADJUST

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

RF AFC2 ON / OFF ON

FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×

• RF AFC2 MODE [Only for AV-36F802]

DO NOTADJUST

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

I2C BUS ON/OFF [FIXED ON]

• I2C BUS CTRL MODE

DO NOTADJUST

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

RF AFC ON / OFF ON

FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×

• RF AFC MODE [Only for AV-36F702]

DO NOTADJUST

Page 16: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

16 No. 51907

ADJUSTMENTS

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

Check ofB1 POWERSUPPLY

DC Voltmeter R507 C504side (B1)

Q511heatsink ( )

1. Receive a black-and-white signal.2. Connect the DC Voltmeter to R507 C504 side (B1) and Q511 heatsink

( ).3. Confirm that the voltage is DC134V .+2V

-2V

RF AGCadjustment

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.59 RF AGC of the PICTURE MODE.3. Press the MUTING key of the remote control unit and turn off color.4. With the LEFT key of the remote control unit, get noise in the screen

picture. (0 side of setting value)5. Press the RIGHT key of the remote control unit and stop when noise

disappears from the screen.6. Change to other channels and make sure that there Is no irregular-

ity.7. Press the MUTING key and get color out.

No.59 RF AGC

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF RF AGC

FOCUSadjustment

Signalgenerator

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of B1 POWER SUPPLY, SUB BRIGHT and PICTURE.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.• The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUS ad-justment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should be reconfirmingPURITY adjustment.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. While looking at the screen center, adjust the FOCUS VR so that

the horizontal lines will be clear and in fine detail.3. Adjust the H VR so that the vertical lines will be clear and in fine

detail.4. Make sure that the picture is in focus even when the screen gets

darkened.

FOCUS VR[In HVT]

H VR[In HVT]

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF FOCUS

B1 POWER SUPPLY

Page 17: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 17

Description

Note :Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a black-and-white signal.(Color off)2. Select the [LOW LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of BRIGHT is 063 with the LEFT / RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. Set the initial setting value of R CUTOFF, G CUTOFF and B CUT-

OFF is 085 with the 4 to 9 key of the remote control unit.5. Display a single horizontal line by pressing the 1 key of the remote

control unit.6. Turn the screen VR all the way to the left.7. Turn the screen VR gradually to the right from the left until either

one of the red, blue or green colors appears faintly.8. Adjust the two colors which did not appear until the single horizontal

line that is displayed becomes white using the 4 to 9 keys of theremote control unit.

9. Turn the screen VR to where the single horizontal line glows faintly.10.Press the 2 key to return to the regular screen.

9 The 3 EXIT key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of WHITE BALANCE LOW LIGHT.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the [HIGH LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of R DRIVE and B DRIVE is 060 with the

4 , 6 , 7 and 9 keys of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the screen until it becomes white using the 4 , 6 , 7 and 9

keys of the remote control unit.

9 The 3 (EXIT) key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part

WHITEBALANCE(LOW LIGHT)adjustment

Signalgenerator

No.1 BRIGHT

R CUTOFFG CUTOFFB CUTOFF

SCREEN VR[In HVT]

WHITEBALANCE(HIGH LIGHT)adjustment

Signalgenerator

R DRIVEB DRIVE

ADJUSTMENT OF WHITE BALANCE

BRIGHT999

999

999 999

R CUTOFF

B CUTOFFBRIGHT

G CUTOFF

H.LINE ON

[LOW LIGHT] MODE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

H.LINE OFF EXIT

R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF

R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

999 999

R DRIVE

B DRIVE

H.LINE ON

[HIGH LIGHT] MODE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

H.LINE OFF EXIT

R DRIVE B DRIVE

R DRIVE B DRIVE

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

HIGHT LIGHT

Page 18: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

18 No. 51907

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

PIPWHITEBALANCEHIGH LIGHTadjustment

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of WHITE BALANCE LOW LIGHT andWHITE BALANCE HIGH LIGHT for the main picture.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the white color of the PIP screen using the No. 8 P R

DR and the No. 10 P B DR of the PIP MODE so that it is the samebrightness as the main screen.

No.8 P R DRNo.10 P B DR

Signalgenerator

PIP screen

Main screen

SUB BRIGHTadjustment

No.1 BRIGHT Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of WHITE BALANCE LOW LIGHT andWHITE BALANCE HIGH LIGHT.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.1 BRIGHT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.1 BRIGHT with the LEFT /

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the brightness is not best with the initial setting value, make fine

adjustment of the No.1 BRIGHT until you get the optimum bright-ness.

SUBCONTRASTadjustment

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB BRIGHT.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.2 PICTURE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.2 PICTURE with the LEFT /

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the contrast is not best with the initial setting value, make fine

adjustment of the No.2 PICTURE until you get the optimum con-trast.

No.2 PICTURE

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRAST

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF BRIGHT

[AV-36F802]

Page 19: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 19

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

V CENTER andTRAPEZIUMadjustment

Signalgenerator

No.68 V CENTERNo.78 TRAPEZ

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust the No.68 V CENTER of the PICTURE MODE to be the same

between the CRT vertical center and crosshatch vertical center.3. Adjust the No.78 TRAPEZ of the PICTUER MODE to be the vertical

lines straight.4. Confirm the vertical lines to be straight. If it is not straight, adjust to

be straight at the No.78 TRAPEZ.

Signalgenerator

Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZEand V-LINEARITY.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.73 H SIZE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.73 H SIZE with the LEFT /

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the No.73 H SIZE until the horizontal screen size is 90%.5. Adjust the No.72 H POSI until the screen will be horizontally centered.

No.73 H SIZENo.72 H POSI

V SIZE andV LINEARITYadjustment

Signalgenerator

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.66 V SIZE of the PICTURE MODE to squeeze the

laster.3. Adjust the No.65 V LIN of the PICTURE MODE to be symmetrical.4. Adjust the No.66 V SIZE until the vertical screen size is 92%.

No.66 V SIZENo.65 V LIN

Picture size 100%

H SIZE andH POSITIONadjustment

Picture size 100%

ADJUSTMENT OF DEFLECTION

Picturesize 100%

Screensize 92%

Screen size 90%

Picture size 100%

Page 20: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

20 No. 51907

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

SIDE PIN andCORNER PINadjsutment

Signalgenerator

No.76 SIDE PINNo.82 TOP PINNo.84 BTM PIN

Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE and V-LINEARITY.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust such that vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight at

the No.76 SIDE PIN of the PICTURE MODE.3. Adjust the end of vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight

at the No.82 TOP PIN and the No.84 BTM PIN of the PICTUREMODE.

PIP DISPLAYPOSITIONadjustment[AV-36F802]

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE, V-LINEARITY, HSIZE, H POSITION, SIDE PIN and CORNER PIN for the main pic-ture.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the PIP screen size so that it occupies 80% ± 2% of the

main screen area.

No.11 LEFT POS.No.12 RIGHT POS.No.13 UPPER POS.No.14 LOWER POS.

LEFT POS. RIGHT POS.

UPPER POS.

LOWER POS.

Mainscreensize

Main screen size

80%±2%

80% ±2%

Straight Straight

Page 21: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 21

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

SUB COLORadjustment

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3 COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. If the color is not the best with the Initial setting value, make fine

adjustment of the No.3 COLOR until you get the optimum color.

No.3 COLORSignalgeneratorOscilloscopeRemotecontrol unit

TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]

YG

R

W Cy

(–)0V(+)

MgB

(A) Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3. COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust COLOR and bring the value of (A) in the illustration to the

voltage +26V (VW–B).

SUB TINTadjustment

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. If the tint is not the best with the initial setting value, make fine ad-

justment of the No.4 TINT until you get the optimum tint.

No.4 TINTSignalgeneratorOscilloscopeRemotecontrol unit

TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]

YG

R

W Cy

(–)0V(+)

Mg B(B)

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT

key to the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust TINT and bring the value of (B) in the illustration to the

voltvoltage +14V (VW–Mg).

ADJUSTMENT OF CHROMA

Page 22: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

22 No. 51907

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

MTS SAPVCOadjustment

Signalgenerator

Frequencycounter

No.9 5FH MON.

No.10 SAP VCO

1. Receive a RF signal (non modulated sound signal) from the an-tenna terminal.

2. Connect between pin 4 of [MPX] connector and GND (Pin 3 of [MPX]connector) through 1MØ Resistor.

3. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset thesetting value from 0 to 1.

4. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector) .

5. Select the No.10 SAP VCO.6. Set the initial setting value of the No.10 SAP VCO with the LEFT/

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.7. Adjust the No.10 SAP VCO so that the frequency counter will dis-

play 78.67kHz±0.5kHz.8. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset the

setting value from 1 to 0.

MTS FILTERcheck

1. Select the No.6 FILTER of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.6 FILTER is set at its initial setting value.

No.6 FILTER

[MPX]Connector4 pin TP_952.53 pin GND2 pin AUDIO_R

MTSSEPARATIONadjustment

Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”

1. Input a stereo L signal (300Hz) from the TV audio multiplex signalgenerator to the antenna terminal.

2. Connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of [MPX] connector, and displayone cycle portion of the 300Hz signal.

3. Change the connection of the oscilloscope to pin 2 of [MPX] con-nector, and enlarge the voltage axis.

4. Select the No.7 LOW SEP. of the SOUND MODE.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.7 LOW SEP. with the LEFT/

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.7 LOW SEP. so that the 300Hz signal level will be-

come minimum.7. Change the signal to 3kHz, and connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of

[MPX] connector.8. Adjust the No.8 HI SEP. so that the 3kHz signal level will become

minimum.

No.7 LOW SEP.

No.8 HI SEP.

TV audiomultiplexsignalgenerator

Oscilloscope

[MPX]Connector1 pin AUDIO_L2 pin AUDIO_R3 pin GND

L-Channel signal waveform

R-Channel crosstalk portion

Minimum

1 cycle

MTS INPUTLEVELcheck

1. Select the No.2 IN LEVEL of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.2 IN LEVEL is set at its initial setting value.

No.2 IN LEVEL

MTS STEREOVCOadjustment

Signalgenerator

Frequencycounter

Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”

1. Receive a RF signal (nonmodulated sound signal) from the antennaterminal.

2. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of SOUND MODE, and change thesetting value from 0 to 1.

3. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector).

4. Select the No.4 STEREO VCO.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 STEREO VCO with the LEFT/

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.4 STEREO VCO so that the frequency counter will

display 15.73kHz±0.1kHz.7. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of the SOUND MODE, and reset the

setting value from 1 to 0.

No.3 FH MONITOR

No.4 STEREO VCO

[MPX]Connector2 pin AUDIO R3 pin GND

ADJUSTMENT OF MTS CIRCUIT

Page 23: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 23

ADJUSTMENTS OF PURITY AND CONVERGENCE

Note: The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUSadjustment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should bereconfirming PURITY adjustment.

PURITY ADJUSTMENT

1. Demagnetize CRT with the demagnetizer.

2. Loosen the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.

3. Remove the wedges.

4. Input a green raster signal from the signal generator, and turn thescreen to green raster.

5. Move the deflection yoke backward.

6. Bring the long lug of the purity magnets on the short lug and positionthem horizontally. (Fig.2)

7. Adjust the gap between two lugs so that the GREEN RASTER willcome into the center of the screen. (Fig.3)

8. Move the deflection yoke forward, and fix the position of the deflec-tion yoke so that the whole screen will become green.

9. Insert the wedge to the top side of the deflection yoke so that it willnot move.

10. Input a crosshatch signal.

11. Verify that the screen is horizontal.

12. Input red and blue raster signals, and make sure that purity is prop-erly adjusted.

Fig. 1

• P/C MAGNETS

P : PURITY MAGNET4 : 4 POLES (convergence magnets)6 : 6 POLES (convergence magnets)

CRT

WEDGE

P

P / CMAGNETS

4 6

DEFLECTION YOKE

Fig. 2

Long lug

Short lug

PURITY MAGNETS

Bring the long lug over the short lugand position them horizontally.

Fig. 3

(FRONT VIEW) GREEN RASTER

CENTER

Page 24: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

24 No. 51907

STATIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Input a crosshatch signal.

2. Using 4-pole convergence magnets, overlap the red and blue linesin the center of the screen (Fig. 4) and turn them to magenta (red/blue).

3. Using 6-pole convergence magnets, overlap the magenta(red/blue)and green lines in the center of the screen and turn them to white.

4. Repeat 2 and 3 above, and make best convergence.

DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Move the deflection yoke up and down and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 5)

2. Move the deflection yoke left to right and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 6)

3. Repeat 1 and 2 above, and make best convergence.

• After adjustment, fix the wedge at the original position.Fasten the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.Fix the 6 magnets with glue.

RED

RED

RED

RED

BLUE

(FRONT VIEW)

(FRONT VIEW)

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE GREEN

GREENGREEN

GREEN

(FRONT VIEW)

GREEN GREEN

GREEN

GREEN

RED REDRED

RED

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Page 25: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907 25

HOW TO CHECK THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT1. HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT

After repairing the high voltage hold down circuit shown in Fig. 1.This circuit shall be checked to operate correctly.

2. CHECKING OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT

(1) Turn the POWER SW ON.(2) As shown in Fig. 1, set the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(3) Make sure that the screen picture disappears.(4) Temporarily unplug the power cord.(5) Remove the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(6) Again plug the power cord, make sure that the normal picture is displayed on the screen.

Fig. 1

2 3 S1 CONNECTOR

HEATER

RESISTOR23.0 kΩ ± 115 Ω 1/4 W

++

POWERON OFF

RY951

R952

D535

R532

R951

Q951

Q532

Q531

R533

R534

R535R538C533

D534 D531

D532BW

C525

R537 FR525

D525

T502

4

Page 26: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

26 No. 51907

SELF CHECK FUNCTIONS1. Outline

This model has self check functions given below. When a malfunction has been detected, the POWER is turned off and the LED flashes to informof the failure . The malfunction is detected by the signal input state of the control line connected to the microcomputer.

2. Self check items

Check item Details of detection Method of detection State of malfunction

3. Self check indicating function

The self-check function begins detection about 5 seconds after poweris supplied.In the event a malfunction is detected, the power is cut off immedi-ately.At this time, the ON-TIMER LED flashes to inform of the malfunc-tion.

[ON-TIMER LED indication]The ON-TIMER LED flashes at 0.5 seconds intervals.

POWERSupplied

After about5 seconds

Start ofdetection

Malfunctionis detected

POWER OFF

FlashingON-TIMER LED

Over-current protector Operation of B1 protector circuit. The microcomputer detects at 1second intervals.If NG is detected for more than200 ms, a malfunction is inter-preted.

When a malfunction has beendetected, the POWER is turnedoff. While the POWER is beingturned off , the power key of theremote controller is not opera-tional until the power code istaken out and put in again.

Page 27: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Printed in JapanVP 0110H.K/Y.S/A.N

JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA

DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.Head office : 1700 Valley Road, Wayne, New Jersey 07470 (973)317-5000

East Coast : 10 New Maple Avenue, Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058 (973)396-1000

Midwest : 705 Enterprise St. Aurora, Illinois 60504 (630)851-7855

West Coast : 5665 Corporate Avenue, Cypress, California 90630 (714)229-8011

Southwest : 10700 Hammerly, Suite 105, Houston,Texas 77043 (713)935-9331

Hawaii : 2969 Mapunapuna Place, Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 (808)833-5828

Southeast : 1500 Lakes Parkway, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30243 (770)339-2582

JVC CANADA INC.Head office : 21 Finchdene Square Scarborough, Ontario M1X 1A7 (416)293-1311

Vancouver : 13040 Worster Court Richmond B.C. V6V 2B3 (604)270-1311

®

Page 28: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

COLOR TELEVISIONUSER'S GUIDE

For models:AV-36F802AV-36F702AV-32F802AV-32F702AV-27F802AV-27F702

Illustration of AV-27F802 and RM-C301G

IMPORTANT NOTE TO THE CUSTOMERIn the spaces below, enter the model and serial number of your television (locat-ed at the rear of the television cabinet). Staple your sales receipt or invoice tothe inside cover of this guide. Keep this user's guide in a convenient place for

future reference. Keep the carton and original packaging for future use.

Model NumberSerial Number

LCT0821-001D-A0901-TN-FAA-JIM

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 1

Page 29: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOTEXPOSE THIS TV SET TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION: TO INSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THEFOLLOWING RULES REGARDING THE USE OFTHIS UNIT.

1.Operate only from the power source specified on the unit.2. Avoid damaging the AC plug and power cord.3. Avoid Improper installation and never position the unit where good venti-

lation is unattainable.4. Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.5.In the event of trouble, unplug the unit and call a service technician.Do

not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.

Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the warranty.

* When you don’t use this TV set for a long period of time, be sure to dis-connect both the power plug from the AC outlet and antenna for yoursafety.

* To prevent electric shock do not use this polarized plug with an extensioncord, receptacle or other outlet unless the blades can be fully inserted toprevent blade exposure.

CAUTION:To reduce the risk of electric shock.Do not remove cover (or back).

No user serviceable parts inside.Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, with-in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert theuser to the presence of uninsulated “dangerousvoltage” within the product’s enclosure that maybe of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk ofelectric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral trian-gle is intended to alert the user to the presenceof important operating and maintenance (servic-ing) instructions in the literature accompanyingthe appliance.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCKDO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 2

Page 30: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

CAUTION:

Please read and retain for your safety.Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This TV set has been engineered andmanufactured to assure your personal safety. But improper use can result in potential electricalshock or fire hazards. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this TVset,observe the following basic rules for its installation, use and servicing.And also follow all warnings and instructions marked on your TV set.

INSTALLATION1 Your TV set is equipped with a polarized AC line plug (one blade of the plug is wider than the

other).

This safety feature allows the plug to fit into the power outlet only one way. Should you beunable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug.Should it still fail to fit, contact your electrician.

2 Operate the TVset only from a power source as indicated on the TV set or refer to the oper-ating instructions for this information. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to yourhome, consult your TV set dealer or local power company.For battery operation, refer to theoperating instructions.

3 Overloaded AC outlets and extension cords are dangerous, and so are frayed power cordsand broken plugs. They may result in a shock or fire hazard. Call your service technician forreplacement.

4 Do not allow anything to rest on or roll over the power cord, and do not place the TV setwhere power cord is subject to traffic or abuse. This may result in a shock or fire hazard.

5 Do not use this TV set near water — for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, orlaundry tub, in a wet basement, or near swimming pool, etc.

6 If an outside antenna is connected to the TV set, be sure the antenna system is grounded soas to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section810 of the National Electrical Code provides information with respect to proper grounding ofthe mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna dischargeunit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection require-ments for the grounding electrode.

(POLARIZED-TYPE)

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 3

Page 31: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

7 An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines orother electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits.When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep fromtouching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.

8 TV sets are provided with ventilation openings in the cabinet to allow heat generated duringoperation to be released.Therefore:— Never block the bottom ventilation slots of a portable TV set by placing it on a bed, sofa,

rug, etc.— Never place a TV set in a “built-in” enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided.— Never cover the openings with a cloth or other material.— Never place the TV set near or over a radiator or heat register.

9 To avoid personal injury:— Do not place a TV set on a sloping shelf unless properly secured.— Use only a cart or stand recommended by the TVset manufacturer.— Do not try to roll a cart with small casters across thresholds or deep pile carpets.—Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting kit approved by the manufacturer.

USE10 Caution children about dropping or pushing objects into the TV set through cabinet open-

ings. Some internal parts carry hazardous voltages and contact can result in a fire or elec-trical shock.

11 Unplug the TV set from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or an aerosolcleaner.

12 Never add accessories to a TV set that has not been designed for this purpose. Such addi-tions may result in a hazard.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDINGAS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 4

Page 32: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

13 For added protection of the TV set during a lightning storm or when the TV set is to be leftunattended for an extended period of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect theantenna.This will prevent damage to product due to lightning storms or power line surges.

14 A TVset and cart combination should be moved withcare. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven sur-faces may cause the TV set and cart combination tooverturn.

SERVICE15 Unplug this TV set from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:A.When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.B. If liquid has been spilled into the TV set.C. If the TV set has been exposed to rain or water.D. If the TV set does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust

only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions as improper adjustmentof other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali-fied technician to restore the TV set to normal operation.

E.If the TV set has been dropped or damaged in any way.F.When the TV set exhibits a distinct change in performance — this indicates a need for

service.

16 Do not attempt to service this TV set yourself as opening or removing covers may exposeyou to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service person-nel.

17 When replacement parts are required, have the service technician verify in writing that thereplacement parts he uses have the same safety characteristics as the original parts. Useof manufacturer’s specified replacement parts can prevent fire, shock, or other hazards.

18 Upon completion of any service or repairs to this TV set, please ask the service technicianto perform the safety check described in the manufacturer’s service literature.

19 When a TV set reaches the end of its useful life, improper disposal could result in a picturetube implosion.Ask a qualified service technician to dispose of the TV set.

20 Note to CATV system installer.This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 ofthe NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that thecable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to thepoint of cable entry as practical.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 5

Page 33: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

PICTURE SETTINGS . . . . . . . 34Tint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Bright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Noise Muting . . . . . . . . . . . 35Set Video Status . . . . . . . . . . 35

SOUND SETTINGS . . . . . . . 36Bass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6Treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36MTS (Multi-channel Sound) . . . . 36

GENERAL ITEMS . . . . . . . . 37Purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . 37TV Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38V4 Component-In/V2 Component-In . . . . . . . . . 39Closed Caption . . . . . . . . . . 39

BUTTON FUNCTIONS . . . . . . 40Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Exit and PIP Off . . . . . . . . . 40Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Video Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Sleep Timer . . . . . . . . . . . 41Hyper Surround . . . . . . . . . 41Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41BBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42100+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Return+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42VCR Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 43DV D Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 4 3TV/CATV Switch . . . . . . . . . . 43VCR/DVD Switch . . . . . . . . . 43Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

PIP (Picture-In-Picture) . . . . . 44Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . 44On/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Channel +/– . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . .46Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 46Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Authorized Service Centers . . 49Search Codes . . . . . . . . . . 50Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .51

Table of ContentsUNPACKING YOUR TV . . . . . 7

QUICK SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . 8Getting Started . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Control . . . . . . . . . 8Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . 8Making Basic Connections . . . 9Plug In Menu . . . . . . . . . . 10

CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . 11Cable and VCR Connections . . . . . . . 11Connecting to a DVD Player . . . . . . . . 14Connecting to an External Amplifier . . . . 15Connecting to a Camcorder . . . . . . . . 15Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link . . . . 6

REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . 17Remote Control Basics . . . . . 17Changing the Batteries . . . . . 17

REMOTE PROGRAMMING . . . 18CATV and Satellite Codes . . . 18VCR Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 19DVD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 20

ONSCREEN MENUS . . . . . . 21Using the Guide . . . . . . . . 21The Onscreen Menus . . . . . . 21

PLUG IN MENU . . . . . . . . . 22Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . 22Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Auto Tuner Setup . . . . . . . . 22Auto Clock Set . . . . . . . . . 23Manual Clock Set . . . . . . . . 24Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CHANNEL SUMMARY . . . . . 25Channel Summary . . . . . . . 25

V–CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26US V–Chip Ratings . . . . . . . 27Setting US V–Chip Ratings . . . 28Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Set Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . 29Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . 30Directions for Movie Settings . 30Canadian V–Chip Ratings . . . 31Canadian V–Chip Directions . . 31Unrated Programs . . . . . . . 32Set Lock Code . . . . . . . . . 33

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 6

Page 34: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Two AA Batteries1 Television

1 Remote Control

Thank you for your purchase of a JVC Color Television. Before you begin setting up your newtelevision, please check to make sure you have all of the following items. In addition to thisguide, your television box should include:

Once you have unpacked your television, the next step is to connect it to your antenna/cableor satellite system and to connect the audio/video devices you want to use with your televi-sion. To make these connections you will use plugs like the ones illustrated below.

A/V Input PlugRF ConnectorsUsed to connect acoaxial cable from anexternal antenna or CableTV system.

A matching TV stand is also available(optional).

Used to make video con-nections with VCRs,DVDs, Camcorders, etc(optional).

Used to connect JVC AVCompu Link capable components foran automated home the-ater.

Used to connectaudio/video devices likeVCRs, DVD players, stereoamplifiers, game consoles,etc.

S-Video Plug

AV Compu Link Cable

We recommend that before you start using your new television, you read your entire User’sGuide so you can learn about your new television’s many great features. But if you’re anxiousto start using your television right away, a quick setup guide follows on the next three pages.

Unpacking Your Television

7

Note: Your remote control may differ fromthe example illustratedhere.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 7

Page 35: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

8

Slide the cover on the back of the remote down towards the bottom of the remote control.Insert two batteries (included) carefully noting the “+”and “–” markings, placing the “–”end inthe unit first. Slide the cover back into place.

Getting StartedThese quick setup pages will provide you, in three easy steps, with the basic information youneed to begin using your new television right away. This information includes basic instructionson operating your remote control, making a simple cable/antenna and optional VCR connectionand, finally, information on programming your television's Auto Tuner.

If you have questions, or for more detailed information on any of these steps, please consultother sections of this manual.

Step One - The Remote ControlThe remote control is the key to operating your television's many great features. Before youcan operate your remote control, you first need to install the batteries (included).

Basic OperationTurn the television on and off by pressing the POWER button at the top right corner of theremote.

The four key feature buttons at the center of the remote can be used for basic operation of the television.The top and bottom buttons will scan forward and back through the available chan-nels. The right and left buttons will turn the volume up or down.These buttons are also markedwith four arrows and are also used with JVC's onscreen menu system. You will need to usethese buttons later in the Quick Setup.

The next step is to connect your television to an antenna or cable.

Power Button Key Feature Buttons

+Proceed to Step Two

Quick Setup 1

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 8

Page 36: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

9

Cable/RF connector

Step Two - Making Basic ConnectionsNext you will need to connect your television to an antenna or cable system. The most basic antenna/cable connection is shown below. For more detailed connections, such as ones wherea cable box is required, see pages 11 to 13.

1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video input.

2) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.

3) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.

Finally, once you have finished your connections, plug the power cord into the nearest poweroutlet and turn on the television.

1) Connect an RF cable out from the wall outlet in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.

+Proceed to Step Three

Quick Setup 2

Illustration of AV-27F802

You may also wish to connect a VCR at this point. A basic VCR connection is shown below.For detailed instructions on connecting a other components or a home theater system, seepages 14 to 16.

NOTE: A VCRis not required to operate your television.

Illustration of AV-27F802

AV Cables/Plugs

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 9

Page 37: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

10

Press the buttons to move to AUTO TUNER SETUPPress the buttons to begin AUTO TUNER SETUP

To choose CABLE (if you are connected to a cable system) or AIR (if you use an antenna)To move to STARTTo start Auto Tuner Setup

The Auto Tuner will now memorize all of the clear, active channels your television canreceive. This will take one or two minutes.

NOW PROGRAMMING!

48

TUNER MODE : CABLE AIR

START

Step Three - The Plug In MenuWhen you turn your television on for the first time the Plug In Menu will appear. This menusets some of the basic settings for your television. A complete description of the Plug In Menucan be found starting on page 22. We recommend you complete the Plug In Menu itemsbefore you start using your television. But to begin watching your television right away you onlyneed to run the Auto Tuner Setup. This lets your television learn the channels it is able toreceive. To run the Auto Tuner Setup follow the steps below.

The Auto Tuner is finished when the message PROGRAMMING OVER! appears onscreen.

Your Quick Setup is now complete. You can now begin watching your television, or you cancontinue on in this guide for more information on connecting audio/video devices, programmingyour remote control, or using the JVC onscreen menu system to customize your televisionviewing experience.

PLUG IN MENU

LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK

FINISH

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY

EXIT

The Quick Setup is complete

Quick Setup 3

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 10

Page 38: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.

2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RF Outputs on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the back of the VCR.

3) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on theback of the TV.

4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Inputjack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.

5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input Jack.

6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.

• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio Input.

• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.

There are three basic types of antenna or cable connections:• If you have an antenna or have a cable system that does not require you use a cable box

to select channels, please refer to Diagram #1.• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access all the chan-

nels, please refer to Diagram #2. If you cannot operate your Picture-In-Picture function using Diagram #2, try the connection shown in Diagram #3. It is possible yocable box allows the signal of only one channel at a time to be sent to your television.

• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access certain premium channels, but not “basic”cable channels, please refer to Diagram #3.

• For your convenience, connection to a VCR is also shown in the following diagrams. AVCR is not necessary for operation of the television or Picture-In-Picture (PIP) function.You may omit the VCR from your connections if you wish.

• For instructions on connecting a VCR only, please see the Quick Setup on page 9.• For information on using PIP, please see page 44.

• The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 and AV-27F802 only.

Cable and VCR Connections

11

Illustration of AV-27F802

Diagram #1

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 11

Page 39: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

12

1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RFInput of the cablebox.

2) Connect an RF cable from the RFOutput of the cable box, in to the RFInput on the back of the VCR.

3) Connect an RF cable from the RF Output of the VCR, in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.

4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.

5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.

6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.

• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s

Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.

Cable and VCR Connections - Continued

Illustration of AV-27F802

Diagram #2

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 12

Page 40: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

13

The connection diagrams are intended to show some basic general connections.Some cable companies may require special connections to properly use your televi-sion or 2-tuner PIP function. If you follow these diagrams and either the television orPIPdoes not work properly, contact your local cable operator for more connectioninformation. Please see page 44 for more information on the PIP feature.

Cable and VCR Connections - Continued

1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.

2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RFOutputs on the splitter, in to the cable box RFInput.

3) Connect an RF cable from the Cable Box Output, in to the VCR RF Input.4) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the

back of the TV.5) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input

jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Videoinput.

6) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input jack.

7) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.

• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the

TV’s Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.

Illustration of AV-27F802

Diagram #3

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 13

Page 41: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

14

1) Connect Green cable out from DVD player “Y”Component Output, in to TV“Y” ComponentInput.

2) Connect Blue cable out from DVDplayer “PB” Component Output, in to TV “PB” ComponentInput.

3) Connect Red cable out from DVD Player “PR” Component Output, in to TV “PR” ComponentInput.

4) Connect White Audio cable out from DVDLeft Audio Output, in to TV Left Audio Input 2.

5) Connect Red Audio cable out from DVDRight Audio Output, in to TVRight Audio Input 2.

• Green, blue and red are the most common colors for DVD cables . Some models may varycolors. Please consult the user’s manual for your DVD Player for more information.

• Be careful not to confuse the red DVD cable with the red audio cable. It is best to completeone set of connections (DVDor Audio Output) before starting the other to avoid accidentallyswitching the cables.

• See page 20 for instructions on programming your remote control to operate the basic func-tions of your DVD player.

• AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802: You may also connect the DVD player to Input 4. Ifyou use Input 4 for the DVD connection, you must set the V4 COMPONENT-IN on the initialSetup Menu to “YES” for proper display of the DVD signal.

• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702: If you use Input 2 (Component-In) for the DVDcon-nection, you must set the V2 COMPONENT-IN on the initial Setup Menu to “YES” for prop-er display of the DVD signal.

NOTE: Progressive DVDPlayers (players with an output scan of 31.5 KHz) will not work prop-erly with this television.

Connecting to a DVD player

Illustration of AV-27F802

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 14

Page 42: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the Camcorder’s Video Output, in to the TV’s VideoInput jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the Camcorder’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video Input.

2) Connect the white audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’sLeft Audio Input jack.

3) Connect the red audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’sRight Audio Input jack.

• If your Camcorder is a mono sound model it will have only one audio jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio jack.

Connecting to an External Amplifier

Connecting to a Camcorder

1) Connect the white audio cable from the TV’s Left Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s LeftAudio Input jack.

2) Connect the red audio cable from the TV’s Right Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s RightAudio Input jack.

• See also “TV Speaker” and “Audio Out”on page 38 for more information on using externalspeakers.

You may connect a camcorder to your television by using the front Input Jacks (Input 3)located under the front panel door. To access, press lightly on the door to open it. You mayalso connect a game console or other equipment using these jacks. Camcorders may alsobe connected to the television’s rear input jacks.

Illustration of AV-27F802

Illustration of AV-27F802

15

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 15

Page 43: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

16

To Connect: Plug one end of the AV Compu Link cable into the AV Compu Link input on yourVCR, DVD, or other Compu Link device. Plug the other end of the AV Compu Link cable intothe AV Compu Link input at the rear of the television.

Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link

JVC’s AV Compu Link feature makes playing video tapes or DVDs totally automatic. Simplyinsert a pre-recorded tape into your JVC-brand VCR or DVD into your JVC DVD player andthe device will automatically turn on and begin playback. At the same time, using the AVCompu Link, the VCR or DVD player sends a signal to the television telling it to turn on andswitch to the proper video input.• The AV Compu Link cable may be included with the JVC AV Compu Link accessory you

wish to connect. If it is not, contact an authorized JVCService Center forpart # EWP 805-012.

• AV Compu Link can only be used with JVC-brand products.

NOTE:• In order for the VCR playback to begin automatically, the recording tabs must be remove from

the VHS tape. If the tab is in place, automatic switching will occur when you push the VCR’sPLAY button.

• The AV Compu Link cable has a male 3.5 mm (mono) plug on each end.• If your JVC-brand VCR has “A Code/B Code Remote Control Switching”(see your VCR’s

instruction book), using VCR A Code will switch the TV to input 1.• To connect a JVC HiFi receiver or amplifier for a completely automated home theater, see

the HiFi’s connection instructions for detailed connection information.• AV COMPU LINK EX is compatible with the following receivers:RX-664V, RX-665V,

RX-668VBK, RX-774V, RX-778VBK, RX-884V, RX-888VBK, RX-1024V, RX-1028VBK, andlater receiver models.

Illustration of AV-27F802

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 16

Page 44: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote Control

• Before you can operate the remote control, you must firstinstall the batteries (included). See “Changing theBatteries” at the bottom of this page for instructions. (Foran illustration, please see page 8.)

• Press the POWER button to turn the television on or off.

• Make sure the TV/CATV switch is set to TV. Move theswitch to CATV only if you need to operate a cable box.

• Slide the VCR/DVD selector switch to VCR to control aVCR, slide to DVD to control a DVD player. Please seepages 18 to 20 for instructions on programming yourremote control to operate a Cable box, VCR or DVD player.

• Press the CH+ and CH– buttons to scan through the chan-nels. Tap the CH+ or CH– button to move through thechannels one channel at a time.

• To move rapidly through the channels using JVC’sHyperscan feature, press and hold CH+ or CH–. Thechannels will zip by at a rate of five channels per second.

• Press VOL+ or VOL– to raise or lower the volume. An indi-cator bar will appear onscreen to show you the televisionvolume level.

• The CH+/– and VOL+/– buttons are also used to navigateJVC’s onscreen menu system.

• You can directly access specific channels using the 10-keypad.

• For more information on remote control button features,see pages 40 to 45. For information on using theonscreen menus, see page 21.

Changing the Batteries Push down on the remote’s back cover and slide towards the bottom to remove it.Insert two AA batteries (supplied), carefully noting the "+" and "–" markings on the batteriesand on the remote control. To avoid a potential short circuit, insert the "–" end first. Be sure touse only size AA batteries.When batteries are installed, slide the cover back into place (until it clicks into position).• If the remote control acts erratically, replace the batteries . Typical battery life is six months to

one year. We recommend using alkaline batteries for longer battery life. When you changethe batteries, try to complete the task within three minutes. If you take longer than three min -utes, the remote control codes for your VCR, DVD, and/or Cable Box may have to be reset(see pages 18-20).

Remote Control Basics

NOTE: Remote control model RM-C301G is shown at theleft. A different model remote control may have come withyour television.

17

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 17

Page 45: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote ProgrammingSetting the CATV, VCR and DVD Codes

You can program your remote to operate your cable box, satellite receiver, VCR or DVD player by using the instructions and codes listed below. If the equipment does not respondto any of the codes listed below or to the code search function, use the remote control sup-plied by the manufacturer.

Cable Box or Satellite codesThe remote control is programmed with CATV and/or Satellite codes for power on, power off,channel up, channel down, and 10 key operation.1) Find the CATV/Satellite brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the 2-way selector switch to “CATV”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed using the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the Cable Box/Satellite receiver.

• If your CATVor Satellite box does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If itdoes not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.

18

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 18

Page 46: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote ProgrammingVCR codesThe remote control is programmed with VCR codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, pause, record, channel up, and channel down operation.1) Find the VCR brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the VCR.

• If your VCR does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond toany code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.

• Some manufacturer’s VCR’s may not respond to the TV/VCR button, even if other buttonswork properly.

• To record, hold down the REC button on the remote and press PLAY.

19

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 19

Page 47: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote Programming

20

DVD codesThe remote control is programmed with DVD codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, previous chapter, next chapter, tray open/close, and still/pause operation.1) Find the DVD player brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the DVD player.

• If your DVD player does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.

• After you program your remote, some DVD buttons may not work properly. If some buttonsdo not work properly, use the remote control which came with your DVD player.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 20

Page 48: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

To bring up the onscreen menu, press the MENU button on the remote control. The item thatappears in yellow is the one currently selected. If you press the MENU button again, theonscreen display will skip to the next menu screen. If you use the Menu button on the TV’sfront panel instead of the remote, an additional menu screen showing channel number andinput will appear. The “Plug In Menu”will appear the first time the TV is plugged in.NOTE: Menus shown in this book are illustrations, not exact replications of the television’sonscreen displays.

Onscreen Menus

21

Using the Guide

The Onscreen Menus

PLUG IN MENU

LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK

FINISH

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY

EXIT

Certain symbols are used throughout this guide to help you learn about the features of yournew television. The ones you will see most frequently are:

Up and Down arrows mean press the CH+ or CH– buttons. Pressing the CH+ or CH–buttons let you:• Move vertically in a main menu screen• Move through a submenu screen• Move to the next letter, number, or other choice in a submenu• Back up to correct an error• Scan through TVchannels (when not in a menu screen)

Left and right arrows mean press the VOLUME+ or VOLUME– buttons to move left or right to:• Select a highlighted menu item• Select an item in a submenu• Select numbers in certain menu options• Turn the volume up or down (when not in a menu screen)

The “Press Button” icon means you should press the button named on your remote control. (Button names appear in SMALL CAPITAL LETTERS.)

The “Helping Hand”icon points to the highlighted or selected item in a menu.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 21

Page 49: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In MenuIntroduction

Auto Tuner Setup

LanguageYou can choose to view your onscreen menus in three languages:English, French, or Spanish.

Press the MENU button

To LANGUAGE

To choose a language

In Auto Tuner Setup, the TV automatically scans through all available channels, memorizing theactive ones and skipping over blank ones or channels with weak signals. This means when youscan (using the CHANNEL +/– buttons) you will receive only clear, active channels.

Press the MENU button

To AUTO TUNER SETUP

To operate

To choose CABLEor AIR

To move to START

To start Auto Tuner Setup

• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup.• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

NOW PROGRAMMING !

PROGRAMMING OVER!

48

Programming will take approximately 1 to 2 minutes.

• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

The Plug In Menu comes up automatically when you first turn on the TV after plugging it in.The Plug In Menu helps you to get your TV ready to use by letting you set your preferences for:

• The Language in which you want the onscreen menus to appear,• The Auto Tuner Setup of which channels you wish to receive,• Setting the TV’s clock to the correct time so your timer functions will work properly.

Descriptions of each of the Plug In Menu features appear on this page and the next. We rec-ommend you complete the Plug In Menu setup first so your TV is set up just the way you want,right away.

22

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 22

Page 50: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In Menu

23

Auto Clock SetBefore you use any of your TV’s timer functions, you must first set the clock. You may preciselyset your clock using the XDS time signal broadcast by most Public Broadcastingstations.Toset the clock using the XDS signal:

Enter the channel number of your local PBS station

Press MENU

To SETCLOCK

To operate

To AUTO

ToTIME ZONE

To select your time zone

To move to Daylight Savings Time (D.S.T.)

To turn D.S.T. ON or OFF

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• If you do not have a PBS station in your local area, you will have to set the clock manually.See ‘Manual Clock Set’on the next page for instructions.

• The Daylight Savings Time feature automatically adjusts your TV’s clock for Daylight Savings.The clock will move forward one hour at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April.The clock willmove back one hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October.

• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

MODE AUTO MANUAL

TIME ZONE EASTERND.S.T. ON OFF

FINISH

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 23

Page 51: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In Menu

24

Once you have the items in the Plug In Menu set to your personal preferences, move to theFinish option to save your settings.

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• You can change the preferences you set in the Plug In Menu at any time using the regularJVC onscreen menu system.

Manual Clock Set

Finish

NOTE:

You will have to reset the clock after a power interruption. You must set the clock before operat-ing any timer functions.

To set your clock manually (without using the XDS signal), choose MANUAL from the Set Clockmenu and follow the steps below.

To SET CLOCK

To operate

To MANUAL

To move to the hour

To set the hour

To move to minutes

To set the minutes

To move to START CLOCK

To start clock and exit

MODE AUTO MANUAL

TIME --:-- --

START CLOCK

THANK YOU !!

• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 24

Page 52: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Channel SummaryChannel SummaryChannel Summary allows you to customize the line-up of channels received by your TV. Youcan add or delete channels from the line-up or prevent any unauthorized viewers from watchingany or all 181 channels .

Press the MENU button

To CHANNEL SUMMARY

To operate

The Channel Summary screen (above) will now be displayed with the channels set to scanmarked with an "ü". You can delete channels from the scan by removing the "ü". If any chan-nels were missed during Auto Tuner Setup and you wish to add them, you may by placing an"ü" next to the channel number.

To the SCAN column

To include or delete from scan

EXIT when finished

You can block access to a channel by activating the Channel Lock.

To CHANNELSUMMARY

To operate

To the Lock Column

ZERO to lock or unlock that channel

EXIT when finished

Channel Guard Message

When a viewer attempts to watch a guarded channel, the following message appears:

To watch a channel that you have locked,enter the Lock Code using the 10 key pad.If the wrong code is entered, the message“INVALIDLOCK CODE!”will flash on thescreen:

The channel cannot be accessed until the correct code is entered.

• Once a channel has been unlocked, it will remain unlocked until the television is turned off.• See also “Set Lock Code”, page 33.

C H NO. S C A N C H NO. SCAN

0 1 06 ü

0 2 ü 07

0 3 ü 08

0 4 ü 09 ü

0 5 ü 10 ü

THIS CHANNEL IS LOCKED BYCHANNEL GUARD. PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.

NO. - - - -

25

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 25

Page 53: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

26

V-ChipYour TV is equipped with V-Chip technology which enables TV Parental Guidelines (for UnitedStates and Canada) and Movie (MPAA) Guideline controls. V-Chip technology allows you toprogram your TV to receive, or not to receive, programs based on content according to theguidelines. Programs which exceed the ratings limits you set will be blocked. When a viewerattempts to watch a blocked channel, this message appears:

The channel will remain blocked until the correct lock code is entered (see page 33 for informa-tion on setting your lock code).

You can customize the V-Chip settings of your television to match your personal tastes. TheV-Chip menu below is the starting point for your V-Chip settings.

You can use US V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from the United States), Canadian V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from Canada), and movie ratings. You may useany or all of the settings (US V-Chip, Canada V-Chip, Movie ratings). Descriptions for settingeach of the three V-Chip formats appear in the next seven pages along with descriptions of therating categories.

To access the rating categories:

THIS PROGRAMMING EXCEEDSYOUR RATING LIMITS.PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.

NO. - - - -

V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK

FINISH

Special Note about Ratings

Some programs are not broadcast with a ratings signal. Therefore, even if you setup V-Chip ratings limits, these programs will not be blocked. Parents are cautioned to preview the con-

tents of these programs or movies.

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)

Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu

To turn V-Chip ON or OFF (V-Chip must be turned ON for rating settings to operate)

To move to SET US TV RATINGS, SETMOVIE RATINGS, or SET CANADIANRATINGS (see following pages for descriptions of each item)

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 26

Page 54: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

27

V-ChipUS V-Chip Ratings U.S.PARENTAL RATING SYSTEMSPrograms with the following ratings are appropriate for children. TV Y is Appropriate for All Children.

Programs are created for very young viewers and should be suitable for all ages, includingchildren ages 2 - 6.

TV Y7 is for Older Children.Most parents would find such programs suitable for children 7 and above. These programsmay contain some mild fantasy violence or comedic violence, which children should be ableto discern from reality.

Programs with the following ratings are designed for the entire audience. TV G stands for General Audience.

Most parents would find these programs suitable for all age groups. They contain little or noviolence, no strong language, and little or no sexual dialog or situations.

TV PG Parental Guidance Suggested.May contain some, but not much, strong language, limited violence, and some suggestivesexual dialog or situations. It is recommended that parents watch these programs first, orwith their children.

TV 14 Parents Strongly Cautioned.Programs contain some material that may be unsuitable for children under the age of 14including possible intense violence, sexual situations, strong coarse language, or intenselysuggestive dialog. Parents are cautioned against unattended viewing by children under 14.

TV MA Mature Audiences Only.These programs are specifically for adults and may be unsuitable for anyone under 17 yearsof age. TV MA programs may have extensiveV, S, L, or D.

Viewing Guidelines

In addition to the ratings categories explained above, information on specific kinds of contentare also supplied with the V-Chip rating. These types of content may also be blocked.Thecontent types are:

• V/FV is for VIOLENCE/FANTASY VIOLENCE • S stands for SEXUALCONTENT• L stands for strong LANGUAGE• D stands for suggestive DIALOG

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 27

Page 55: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

28

Line up the cursor in the column (TV PG, TV G, etc.) with the content row (V/FV, S, etc.) and

press the or to move the cursor to the correct location. Press or to turn the lockingfeature on or off. An item is locked if the icon appears instead of a “—”.

For example: To block viewing of all TV 14 shows, move the cursor to the top row of thatcolumn and add a lock icon. Once you've put a lock on the top row, everything in that columnis automatically locked.

To the TV 14 ColumnTo turn on the lock

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• If you want to change the setup, move the cursor to the top column and change the lock icon

to “—” by pressing or again. You may then select individual categories to block.

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)

Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu

To turnV-Chip ON or OFF

To move to SET US TV RATINGS

To operate

V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK

FINISH

Setting US V-Chip Ratings

Directions to set US V-Chip Ratings:

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 28

Page 56: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

29

Setting ratings with the V-Chip button

Example 2:

If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above a current setting such asTV PG-V (with violence):

Press ZERO when TV-PG - V is displayed

To access Rating information about a certain program, press the V-CHIP button while viewingthat program. A display like this will appear :

If you decide you want to block this category of viewing, press "0" while the above screen isvisible, and all programs from that category will be blocked.

Example 1:

If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above TV PG:

• For Children's programming you can block TV-Y and Y7 programs by Pressing “0” when Y isdisplayed during a program. Programming for audiences other than children’s audiences willnot be affected.

PROGRAM IS RATED :TV-PG - V

All Programming above TV PG will be blocked.

Press ZERO when TV-PG is displayed

All Programming above TV PG - V (with Violence) will be blocked.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 29

Page 57: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

NR – Not Rated.This is a film which has no rating. In many cases these films were imported from countrieswhich do not use the MPAA ratings system. Other NR films may be from amateur producerswho didn’t intend to have their film widely released.NR (Not Rated) Programming may contain all types of programming including children's programming, foreign programs, or adult material.

G – General Audience .In the opinion of the review board, these films contain nothing in the way of sexual content, violence, or language that would be unsuitable for audiences of any age.

PG – Parental Guidance .Parental Guidance means the movie may contain some contents such as mild violence,some brief nudity, and strong language. The contents are not deemed intense.

PG-13 – Parents Strongly Cautioned.Parents with children under 13 are cautioned that the content of movies with this rating mayinclude more explicit sexual, language, and violence content than movies rated PG.

R - Restricted.These films contain material that is explicit in nature and is not recommended forunsupervised children under the age of 17.

NC-17 - No One Under 17.These movies contain content which most parents would feel is too adult for their children toview. Content can consist of strong language, nudity, violence, and suggestive or explicitsubject matter.

X - No One under 18.Inappropriate material for anyone under 18.

Movie Ratings

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)

Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options

To SET MOVIE RATINGSTo enter movies menu

For example, to block viewing of X and NC-17 rated from shows:

To the X ColumnTo turn on the lock

To the NC-17 Column

To turn on the lock

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

Directions to set Movie (MPAA) Ratings:

30

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 30

Page 58: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

E – Exempt.Exempt programming includes:news, sports, documentaries and other informationprogramming, talk shows, music videos, and variety programming.

C – Programming Intended for Children.Violence Guidelines:There will be no realistic scenes of violence. Depictions of aggressivebehavior will be infrequent and limited to portrayals that are clearly imaginar y, comedic or unrealistic in nature.

C8+ – Programming Intended for Children 8 and Over .Violence Guidelines: Any realistic depictions of violence will be infrequent, discreet, of lowintensity and will show the consequences of the acts. There will be no offensive language,nudity or sexual content.

G – General Audience .Programming will contain little violence and will be sensitive to themes which could affect younger children.

PG - Parental Guidance.Programming intended for a general audience, but which may not be suitable for youngerchildren. Parents may consider some content not appropriate for children aged 8-13.

14+ - 14 Years and Older.Parents are strongly cautioned to exercise discretion in permitting viewing by pre-teens andearly teens. Programming may contain mature themes and scenes of intense violence.

18+ - Adult.Material intended for mature audiences only.

Canadian V-Chip Ratings

Directions to set Canadian V-Chip Ratings:Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)

Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options

To SET CANADIAN RATINGS ENG (for English)To enter ratings menu

For example, to block viewing of programming rated 14+ and 18+:

To the 18+ Column

To turn on the lock

To the 14+ Column

To turn on the lock

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• For instructions on “Set Canadian Ratings FRE (in French)”, please see page 31 in theFrench side of this user’s guide.

31

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 31

Page 59: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

32

V-ChipUnrated ProgramsNotes About Unrated Programs:

Unrated programming refers to any programming which does not contain a rating signal.Programming on television stations which do not broadcast rating signals will be placed in the“Unrated Programming" category.

Examples of Unrated programs:

Emergency BulletinsLocally Originated ProgrammingNewsPolitical ProgramsPublic Service AnnouncementsReligious ProgramsSportsWeatherSome Commercials

• TV programs or movies that do not have rating signals will be blocked if the Unrated

Category is set to BLOCK.

Directions to Block Unrated Programs:

You can block programs that are not rated.

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIP

To operate (The lock icon appears)

Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options

To UNRATED

To VIEW or BLOCKPress EXIT when done

UNRATED VIEW BLOCK

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 32

Page 60: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-ChipSet Lock CodeChannel Guard and V-Chip settings are protected by a four-digit Lock Code. Your TV comespre-set with a Lock Code of "0000". You may change the code to any four-digit number youwish. To change the Lock Code, follow the steps below.

Press the MENU button

To SETLOCK CODE

To operate

The lock icon appears.

Press ZERO to access the Lock Code

The first digit will be highlighted

To select the number

To move to the next digit

Continue to follow these directions for all four numbers.

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

Your Lock Code is now set..

LOCK CODE 0 0 0 0

FINISH

0

• After a power interruption you must reset the Lock Code.• Write your Lock Code number down and keep it hidden from potential viewers.• If you forget the Lock Code, a new code may be set using the steps listed above.

NOTE:

33

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 33

Page 61: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Picture Settings

34

Tint

Color

Picture

Bright

Detail

Tint allows you to adjust the levels of red and green in your TV picture.

Press the MENU button

To TINT

To increase the levels of green

To increase the levels of redTo move to the next setting

The color function lets you make all the colors in the TV picture appear either more vivid orsubtle.

Press the MENU button

To COLORTo make the colors more vivid

To make the colors more subduedTo move to the next setting

Picture allows you to adjust the levels of black and white on the TV screen, giving you a darkeror brighter picture overall.

Press the MENU button

To PICTURETo increase the level of contrast

To decrease the level of contrastTo move to the next setting

You can adjust the overall brightness of the TV picture with the Bright control.

Press the MENU button

To BRIGHT

To lighten the picture

To darken the pictureTo move to the next setting

The Detail feature adjusts the level of fine detail displayed in the picture.

Press the MENU button

To DETAIL

To make the picture sharper (more details)

To make the picture smoother (less detail)To move to the next setting

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 34

Page 62: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Picture Settings

35

Noise Muting

Set Video StatusWith Set Video Status, you can save your own set of picture quality adjustments as “Choice”and have access to them at the touch of a button.

Press the MENU button

To SETVIDEO STATUS

To operate

To set the TINT levels

To move to the next option

Repeat these steps until all levels are set.

To SAVEAS CHOICE

To save settings and exit

• You must use SAVE AS CHOICE to exit the Set Video Status menu, otherwise your prefer -ences will not be saved.

• You can access your “Choice”settings at any time by pressing the VIDEO STATUS button onthe remote control.

TINT -------------|-------------COLOR -------------|-------------PICTURE -------------|-------------BRIGHT -------------|-------------DETAIL -------------|-------------

SAVE AS CHOICE

The setting screen will disappear if you do not make any adjustments or move to the next set-ting in approximately three seconds. Any changes you have made to picture settings up to thatpoint will be stored. You can exit the Picture Settings menu at any time by pressing the EXIT

button on the remote control.

NOTE:

This feature inserts a blank blue screen over channels which are not broadcasting or are tooweak to be received clearly.

Press the MENU button

To NOISE MUTING

To turn Noise Muting ON or OFF

• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup or when you operate Channel Summary.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 35

Page 63: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Sound Settings

You can increase or decrease the level of low-frequency sound in the TV’s audio with the Bassadjustment.

Press the MENU button

To BASS

To increase the bass

To decrease the bass

To move to the next setting

Use Treble to adjust the level of high-frequency sound in your TV’s audio.

Press the ME N U bu t t o n

To TREBLE

To increase the treble

To decrease the treble

To move to the next setting

Adjust the level of sound between the TV’s two speakers with the Balance setting.

Press the MENU button

To BALANCE

To shift the balance towards the right speaker

To shift the balance towards the left speaker

To move to the next setting

MTS technology allows several audio signals to be broadcast at once, giving you a choice inwhat you wish to hear with a TV program. In addition to mono or stereo sound, an MTS broad-cast may also include a Second Audio Program (SAP).

Press the MENU button

To MTS

Select the mode

(The ON AIR arrow tells you if a broadcast is in Stereo and/or contains an SAP).

• Keep the TV in STEREO mode to get the best sound quality. The sound will work inSTEREO mode even if a certain broadcast is in MONO sound only.

• Choose the MONO setting to reduce excessive noise on a certain channel or broadcast.• Selecting SAP will allow you to hear an alternative soundtrack, if one is available.

MTS (Multi-Channel Television Sound)

Treble

Balance

Bass

You can leave the Sound Settings menu at any time by pressing the EX I T button on theremote control.

NOTE:

36

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 36

Page 64: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

General Items

The On/Off timer lets you program your television to turn itself on or off. You can use it as analarm to wake up, to help you remember important programs, or as a decoy when you're nothome.

Press the MENU button

To ON/OFFTIMER

To operate (begins with ON TIME)

To set the hour (AM/PM) you want the TV to turn on

To move to minutes

To set the minutes

To accept ON TIME and move to OFF TIME (the time the TV will turn off). Set the OFF TIMEthe same way as ON TIME

To accept OFFTIME and move to CHANNEL

To select channel

To move to MODE

Choose ONCE or EVERYDAY

To ON/OFFTIMER

Choose YES to accept the timer setting, choose NOif you don't wish to accept

To FINISH

To save settings

On/Off Timer

On/Off Timer Note for PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) only.

• The On/Off time cannot be set to locked or guarded channels.• In order for the On/Off timer to work, the clock must be set.• After a power interruption, the Timer settings must be reset.

NOTE:

If the television is on when a timed event is about to start a Timer Preview window will appear.The Timer Preview window will appear in the lower right corner of the screen seven secondsbefore the timer is programmed to begin. When the timer activates, the Preview picture willbecome the main picture.

37

PurityThis helps clean up the picture so that it may not contain any “snow”.

Press the MENU button

To PURITY

To enter

To adjust purity

N S -------------|-------------

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 37

Page 65: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

General Items

38

If your TV is connected to a stereo system, you can turn off the TV speakers and listen to theaudio through your stereo.

Press the MENU button

To TVSPEAKER

To turn the TV's speakers ONor OFF

EXIT when finished

• Before you turn the TV Speaker setting from OFF to ON, make sure that the TV volumelevel is low! If the TV volume is set too high, the sound level will be extremely loud.

• After a power interruption, the TVSpeaker settings will return to “ON”.

TV Speaker

• External Speakers: When using external speakers or amplifiers, shut off the TV Speakers(see ‘TV Speaker’) above.

NOTE:

If your television is connected to an external speaker source, Audio Out gives you the option of controlling the volume level with your TV’s remote control.

Press the MENU button

To AUDIO OUT

ToVARI or FIX

EXIT when finished

VARI: Lets you adjust the volume of the external speakers using the VOLUME +/– buttons onyour TV’s remote control.FIX: The volume of the external speakers is adjusted using the audio device’s remote control.

Audio Out

TV SPEAKER ON OFF

AUDIO OUT VARI FIX

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 38

Page 66: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

General Items

Get the best quality video from your DVD player by using this setting and the DVD inputs at therear of the television. Set either to YES for component input (for DVD) or to NO for compositevideo input (for a regular VCR).

Press the MENU button

ToV4 COMPONENT-IN (or V2 COMPONENT-IN for models AV-36F702, AV-32F702and AV-27F702)

To turn the input ON or OFF

EXIT when finished

• This option should be used with DVD players only. For information on connecting VCR’s see page 11. For more information on connecting a DVD player, see page 14.

• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 note: These models do not have Input 4.

V4 Component-In (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) / V2 Component-In (AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702)

V4 COMPONENT-IN YES NO

Many broadcasts now include an onscreen display of dialog called Closed Captions. Somebroadcasts may also include displays of additional information in text form. Your television canaccess and display this information using the Closed Caption feature.To activate the ClosedCaption feature, follow the steps below.

Press the MENU button

To CLOSED CAPTION

To operate

To select CAPTION (for Closed Captions), TEXT (for text display), or OFF (for no display)

To move to CAPTION or TEXT

To select a caption (CC1 to CC4) or text channel (T1 to T4)

To accept that selection and move to FINISH

To save settings and exit

MODE : CAPTION

CAPTION : CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4TEXT : T1 T2 T3 T4

FINISH

Closed Caption

• Closed Caption subtitles are usually found on closed caption channel CC1. Some programsmay include additional text information which is usually found on text channel T1. The otherchannels are available for future use.

• Closed captioning may not work correctly if the signal being received is weak or if you areplaying a video tape.

• Most broadcasts containing Closed Captioning will display a notice at the start of theprogram.

NOTE:

39

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 39

Page 67: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions

The MENU button allows you to access JVC’s onscreen menu system. Press MENU to activatethe onscreen menu system.

• See individual topics (like “Sound Settings”) for specific information on using menus.

Press the EXIT button to leave a menu screen. On the RM-C301G this button is also labeled“PIP OFF”. Press EXIT/PIP OFF to turn off the Picture-in-Picture function (please see page 44for more information on the PIP feature).• PIP is available only on AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802.

Menu

Exit and PIP Off

Display

• Please note that if the Clock, Sleep Timer or On/Off Timer are not set, the Display screen willshow:"CLOCK NOT SET", "SLEEP TIMER OFF", and "ON/OFF TIMER OFF" respectively.

NOTE:

The Display screen shows the current status of timers and inputs.

Press the DISPLAY button

The screen above shows the following information:

• The current channel or AV input (Channel 07)

• The current time (12:20 pm)• Sleep Timer status/minutes remaining (The Sleep Timer is off)• On/Off Timer status (Set to turn on everyday at 7:00 PM, off at 10:00 PM)• Each Press of the DISPLAY button changes the display mode:

Display – Full screen shown above

Time – Shows the current time only

Channel – Shows the current channel

Off –Turns Display off

• You may also turn off the Display at any step by pressing EXIT.

07NOW 12:20 PMSLEEP TIMER OFFON/OFF TIMER EVERYDAY

ON TIME 7:00 PMOFF TIME 10:00 PM

40

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 40

Page 68: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button FunctionsVideo Status

Muting

The VIDEO STATUS button gives you a choice of three TV picture display settings, including a display of your own preferences.

Standard – Resets the picture display to the factory settings.

Choice – Displays the setting levels you specified on the "Set Video Status"Menu(see page 35).

Theater – Gives a rich, film-like look to video.

Press the VIDEO STATUS button

The Sleep Timer can turn the TV off for you after you fall asleep. Program it to work in intervalsof 15 minutes, for a total time of up to 180 minutes.

Sleep Timer Message

20 seconds before the automatic shutoff, this message will appear:

GOOD NIGHT!!

PUSH SLEEP TIMER BUTTON

TO EXTEND.

Creates a deep, three-dimensional sound effect by channeling the audio through the TV's front-firing speakers. Press the HYPER SURROUND button to turn the effect on or off.

The MUTING button instantly turns the volume down completely when you press it. PressMUTING and the volume level will instantly go to zero. To restore the volume to its previouslevel, press MUTING again.

HYPER SURROUND ON OFF

Hyper Surround

Sleep Timer

41

Press the SLEEP TIMER button

You then have 20 seconds to press the Sleep Timer button to delay the shutoff for another

15 minutes.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 41

Page 69: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions

Use the 100+ button to directly access channels above Channel 99. For example to move tochannel 124, press100+, 2 (two), 4 (four).

100+ Button

Return+

InputSelects the signal input source for the television:TV (for Antenna or Cable) or Video-1, 2, 3, or 4for video devices like VCR’s, DVD players, or camcorders.

IN P U T

BBEBBE high definition audio adds natural, clear and extraordinary sound quality to any program.Turn BBE On or Off using the BBE button.

BBE ON OFF

The RETURN+ button has two functions:

Return – Returns to the channel viewed just before the channel currently onscreen.

Return+ – Lets you program a specific channel to return to while scanning through the chan-nels using the CH+ and CH– buttons.

RETURN+ and hold for three seconds

The channel currently active has been programmed as your Return+ channel. Now scanthrough the channels using the CHANNEL+/– buttons

RETURN+

You will return to your programmed channel.

• To cancel your Return+ channel, press and hold the RETURN+ button for three seconds. Themessage “RETURN CHANNEL CANCELLED!”will appear.

• Return+ works only with the CHANNEL+/– buttons. Pressing any number key will cancelReturn+.

• Return+ does not affect the PIPchannel (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only).

RETURN CHANNEL PROGRAMMED !

• BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc. For U.S., licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.under USP 4638258, 4482866 and 5510572. For Canada, licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc.

NOTE:

• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 do not have a Video-4 input.

42

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 42

Page 70: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions

43

LightYour remote control includes illuminated buttons for key features like CHANNEL +/– andVOLUME +/–. Press the LIGHT button to turn the illumination on.

DVD Buttons

VCR Buttons

TV/CATV Switch

VCR/DVD Switch

You can also use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your DVD player. These functions include:play, rewind, fast-forward, stop, still/pause, previous/next, tray open/close,power on, and power off.

Move the selector switch to DVD to operate.

• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand DVD players.For any other manufacturer’s brand DVD player, please see the code chart and instructions on page 20.

Use either the television’s own tuner or a cable box to select channels. Set this switch to TV tooperate the television’s built-in tuner. Move the switch to CATV to operate a cable box.

• See page 18 for information on programming your remote for cable box operation.

You can control a VCR or DVDplayer with the buttons on the lower part of the remote control.Use the VCR/DVD selector switch to choose either VCR or DVD operation.

• See pages 19 and 20 for information on programming your remote with VCR and DVD oper-ating codes.

You can use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your VCR. These functionsinclude:play, record, rewind, fast-forward, stop, pause, channel scan, TV/VCR, power on, andpower off.

Move the selector switch to VCR to operate.

• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand VCR’s. For any other manufac-turer’s brand VCR, please see the code chart and instructions on page 19.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 43

Page 71: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions - PIPPIP displays two separate pictures on screen. Your television has 2-Tuner PIP, meaning youcan view pictures from two different channels simultaneously. A special set of PIP control but-tons are located on the upper part of the remote control. Descriptions of each button appearon this page.

The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only.

On/MoveTurn PIP on by pressing the ON/MOVE button.

02

07

Cable Box NoteThe 2-Tuner PIP function may not operate when used with certain cable boxes. This isbecause while some models of cable box may receive up to 181 channels, they may only sendthe signal from one channel to your television (please also see diagram on page 11). For thePIPtuner to operate correctly, it must have access to all available channels. Since the televi-sion is receiving the signal of only one channel from the cable box, it is impossible for the 2-Tuner PIP to display a second, different channel.

Because there are many different models of cable boxes in use today, if you are having prob-lems operating your PIP feature with your cable box, we recommend you contact your localcable company for connection advice.

44

PIP OFF to turn PIP off

(PIP) ON/MOVE

NOTE:• Each press of ON/MOVE will shift the PIP window to a different corner.

ON/MOVE

Once PIP is turned on, you can move the PIP window to any of the TV’s main picture’sfour corners with the ON/MOVE button

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 44

Page 72: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions - PIPFreeze

Swap

Channel +/– for PIP

Source

Use the FREEZE button to lock a single, still image onto the PIP window.

• If PIP is off when FREEZE is pressed, a snapshot of the main screen is taken and placed inthe PIP window.

• If PIP is on when FREEZE is pressed, the image in the window when the button was pressedis held.

You can exchange the channel displayed on the main screen for the one shown in the PIP win-dow by pressing SWAP.

Like the main CHANNEL +/– buttons, CHANNEL +/– for PIP lets you scan through the channels inthe PIP window.

• Direct channel selection with the 10 key pad for PIPis not possible.

You can select the signal source for the PIP window image.

• If the PIP does not have a signal, the window will be blue.• If you connect a DVD to Video-2 or Video-4, the PIP window will be blue.

• The PIP window is 1/9 the size of the full screen.

• PIP will not display blocked channels or programs. A blue screen will display instead.

NOTE:

45

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 45

Page 73: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Troubleshooting

46

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 46

Page 74: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

47

WarrantyFor Canadian model televisions, see the separate sheet for Canadian

Warranty information.

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forthbelow ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVEMATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP from the date of original retail purchase for the period shownbelow (the “Warranty Period”) (PICTURE TUBE is covered for Two (2) years.)

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY (50) UNITED STATES, THEDISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.

WHAT WE WILL DO:If this product is found to be defective within the warranty period,JVC will repair orreplace defective parts at no charge to the original owner. Such repair and replacementservices shall be rendered by JVC during regular business hours at JVCauthorizedservice centers. Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of thisWarranty Period. All products and parts thereof may be brought to a JVCauthorizedservice center on a carry-in basis. Televisions with a screen size of 25 inches and largermay be covered on an in-home basis where such service is available.

WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:To determine if in-home service is ava i l a ble in your area, either contact the selling dealer (retail-er) or call 1-800-537-5722 to locate the nearest JVC authori zed service center. S e rvice loca-tions can also be obtained from our website h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m.In-home serv i c e, if ava i l-a bl e, will require clear access to the Te l evision by the service representative s.If in-home serv i c eis not ava i l a bl e, carry in service will be prov i d e d .

If service is not locally available, box the product carefully, preferably in its original car-ton, and ship, insured, with a copy of your bill of sale plus a letter of explanation of theproblem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the name and location which will begiven to you by the toll free number.

If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our CustomerRelations Department.

WHAT IS NOT COVERED:This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:1) Products which have been subject to abuse , accident,alteration,modification,tam-

pering,negligence, misuse, faulty installation,lack of reasonable care, or if repairedor serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by JVC to render suchservice, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products,or if the modelor serial number has been altered, tampered with,defaced or removed;

2) Initial installation, installation and removal from "built-in" entertainment centers andother mounting systems;3) Operational adjustments covered in the Owner’s Manual, normal maintenance , videoand audio head cleaning;4) Damage that occurs in shipment, due to an act of God,and cosmetic damage;5) Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;6) Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus (Needle) are covered for 90days from the date of purchase;

Parts Labor

1 YEAR1 YEAR

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 47

Page 75: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

48

Warranty

REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPA R ATE WA R R A N T Y. THIS WA R R A N T YDOES NOT APPLY FOR DETAILS OF REFURBISHED PRODUCT WA R R A N T Y.PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATIONPACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.

For customer use:Enter below the Model No. and Serial No.which is located either on the rear, bottom orside of the cabinet.Retain this information for future reference.

Model No.: Serial No.:Purchase Date: Name Of Dealer:

7) Accessories;8) Batteries (except that Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from date of pur-

chase.)

There are no express warranties except as listed above.

THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTYOF MERCHANTABILTY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTYHEREIN.

JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE,OR ANY OTHER DA M AG E S , WHETHER DIRECT, I N C I D E N TAL OR CONSEQU E N T I A L(INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULT-ING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WAR-RANTY, ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THEWARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limita-tions on how long the warranty lasts,so these exclusions or limitations may not apply toyou.This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rightswhich vary state to state.

JVCCOMPANYOF AMERICA 1700 Valley RoadDIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP. Wayne, New Jersey 07470

h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 48

Page 76: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

49

Authorized Service Centers

QUALITY SERVICE

TOLL FREE: 1 (800) 537-5722http://www.jvc.com

HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER

Dear Customer,

In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, please read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In the event that repairs are neces-sary, or for the address nearest your location within the Continental UnitedStates, please call 1 (800) 537-5722 for your nearest authorized servicer or visitour website at www.JVC.com.

Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.

CautionTo prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.There are no user serviceableparts inside. Please refer to qualified service personnel for repairs.

AccessoriesTo purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may contact your local JVCDealer. From the 48 Continental United States call toll free: 1 (800) 882-2345 or onthe web at www.JVC.com

For service in CanadaTo locate your local JVC service center or dealer in Canada please call:

Or visit us on the web at www.JVC.ca

Do not service the television yourself

In Eastern Canada:1 (416) 293-1311

In Western Canada:1 (604) 270-1311

En Français (Montréal):1 (514) 871-1311

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 49

Page 77: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

50

Search CodesCable/Satellite Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-Way Mode Selector switch to CATV.2) Press the TV POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press TV POWER, see if the CATV or Satellite box responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no

response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 52 times without a response, use theremote control which came with the equipment.

5) Press RETURN+ to exit.

VCR Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.2) Press the VCR POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press VCR POWER, see if the VCR responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no

response, repeat Step 3. If you repeat Step 3 a total of 80 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the VCR.

5) Press RETURN+ to exit.

DVD Player Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.2) Press the DVD POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press DVD POWER, see if the DVDplayer responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set. If there was no

response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 30 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the DVDplayer.

5) Press RETURN+ to exit.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 50

Page 78: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Specifications

51

Specifications subject to change without notice.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 51

Page 79: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICADivision of JVC Americas Corp.

1700 Valley RoadWayne, New Jersey, 07470

JVC CANADA, INC.21 Finchdene SquareScarborough, Ontario

Canada, M1X 1A7

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 52

Page 80: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702 /Y

AV-36F802 /Y

COLOR TELEVISION

BASIC CHASSIS

AC

No. 51907BDec. 2001

COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.

TVTV

RM-C303G[AV-36F702]

RM-C301G[AV-36F802]

CD-ROM No. SML200201

Page 81: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

q NOTE ON USING CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS1. SAFETY

The components identified by the symbol and shading arecritical for safety. For continued safety replace safety criticalcomponents only with manufactures recommended parts.

2. SPECIFIED VOLTAGE AND WAVEFORM VALUESThe voltage and waveform values have been measured under thefollowing conditions.

(1) Input signal : Color bar signal(2) Setting positions of each knob/button and

variable resistor : Original setting position whenshipped

(3) Internal resistance of tester : DC 20kØ/V(4) Oscilloscope sweeping time : H ⇒ 20µS/div

: V ⇒ 5mS/div: Others ⇒ Sweeping time is

specified(5) Voltage values : All DC voltage values

9Since the voltage values of signal circuit vary to some extent ac-cording to adjustments, use them as reference values.

3. INDICATION OF PARTS SYMBOL [EXAMPLE]• In the PW board : R1209 → R209

4. INDICATIONS ON THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM(1) Resistors• Resistance value

No unit : [Ø]k : [kØ]M : [MØ]

• Rated allowable powerNo indication : 1/10 [W]Others : As specified

• TypeNo indication : Carbon resistorOMR : Oxide metal film resistorMFR : Metal film resistorMPR : Metal plate resistorUNFR : Uninflammable resistorFR : Fusible resistor

9Composition resistor 1/2 [W] is specified as 1/2S or Comp.

(2) Capacitors• Capacitance value

1 or higher : [pF]less than 1 : [µF]

• Withstand voltageNo indication : DC50[V]AC indicated : AC withstand voltage [V]Others : DC withstand voltage [V]

9 Electrolytic Capacitors47/50[Example] : Capacitance value [µF]/withstand voltage[V]

AV-36F702 /Y

AV-36F802 /Y STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

• TypeNo indication : Ceramic capacitorMY : Mylar capacitorMM : Metalized mylar capacitorPP : Polypropylene capacitorMPP : Metalized polypropylene capacitorMF : Metalized film capacitorTF : Thin film capacitorBP : Bipolar electrolytic capacitorTAN : Tantalum capacitor

(3) CoilsNo unit : [µH]Others : As specified

(4) Power Supply

: B1

: B2(12V)

: 9V

: 5V

9Respective voltage values are indicated

(5) Test point

: Test point

: Only test point display

(6) Connecting method: Connector

: Wrapping or soldering

: Receptacle

(7) Ground symbol

: LIVE side ground

: ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side ground

: EARTH ground

: DIGITAL ground

5. NOTE FOR REPAIRING SERVICEThis model’s power circuit is partly different in the GND. The differenceof the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND and theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND. Therefore, care must be takenfor the following points.

(1) Do not touch the LIVE side GND or the LIVE side GND and theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND simultaneously. If the above cau-tion is not respected, an electric shock may be caused. Therefore,make sure that the power cord is surely removed from the recepta-cle when, for example, the chassis is pulled out.

(2) Do not short between the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL)side GND or never measure the LIVE side GND andISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND at the same time with a measur-ing apparatus ( oscilloscope, etc.). If the above precaution is notrespected , a fuse or any parts will be broken.

• Since the circuit diagram is a standard one, the circuit and cir-cuit constants may be subject to change for improvement with-out any notice.

Dec. 2001 No. 51907B

Page 82: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2-2 No.51907B

CONTENTSSEMICONDUCTOR SHAPES ................................................................................................................................. 2-2

BLOCK DIAGRAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-3

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

E

C

B

OUT

E

IN

E C BE C

(G)(D)(S)B

IN E OUT

E C B E

C

BE C B

CHIP TR

TOP VIEWBOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEWTRANSISTOR

TOP VIEWBOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEWIC

TOP VIEWCHIP IC

1 N

1 N

1 N

1

NN

N

N

N

1

SEMICONDUCTOR SHAPES

CHANNEL CHART [US] ........................................................................................................................................ 2-35[CA] ........................................................................................................................................ 2-36

PATTERN DIAGRAMS

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-7

MAIN, FRONT CONTROL AND POWER SW PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS P2-11

PIP PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM — P2-13

AV SELECTOR PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-15 P2-17

CRT SOCKET PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-19

DAF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-21

LF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-23

ModelP.W.B. name

MAIN PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-25 P2-27

CRT SOCKET PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-29

PIP PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-30

AV SELECTOR PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-31

FRONT CONTROL PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-32

LF, DAF AND POWER SW PWB PATTERN DIAGRAMS P2-33

AV-36F702ModelPattern name

AV-36F702

AV-36F802

AV-36F802

Page 83: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702 AV-36F702

2-3No.51907B

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

2-4 No.51907B

P

J601COMPONENT

VIDEO-IN

J501INPUT1

P

Y

IC501

AV SW

IC101

1 CHIP DECODER

IC701

MICROCOMPUTER

T502

FBT

POWER SUPPLY

CIRCUIT

REG.

AC INB1

FOCUS

IC001MTS&TONE/VOL

CONTROL

IC702EEPROM

IC381AUDIO SW IC371

AMP

CF0214.5MHzTRAP

TU001TUNER

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

IF R, G, B

CF0414.5MHz BPF

RGB DRIVE

IF

SIF

MPX

V. OUT

H. OUT

VTVR, G, B

V01

SCL0SDA0

SCL0SDA0

SCL0SDA0

SCL0SDA0

Y

C

L/R TVL/R

VIDEO

CY

C

YAV SW PWB (1/2)

FRONT CONTROL PWB

CRT SOCKET PWB

AV SW PWB (2/2)

MAIN PWBPOWER SW PWB

IC401VERT OUT

SCL0SDA0

DAF PWB

LF PWB

J502INPUT2

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

J401INPUT3(FRONT)

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

J503AUDIO OUT

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

VOL+

POWER REMOCONRECEIVER

VOL- CH+ CH- MENU

ON TIMERLED

IC151SOUND

ENHANCEMENTAUDIO PROCESSOR

IC401AUDIO OUT

Q511H. OUT

SCREEN

HV

L/R

L/R

L/R

L/R

V

H

DY01DEF YOKE

SPL

SPR

AV-36F702 BLOCK DIAGRAM

COM_YCOM_CBCOM_CR

SCL1SDA1

TV

IC2013L DIGITAL

COMB FILTER

LPF

BPF

AMP

BUF

B

R

Y

C

Y

C

Page 84: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

PR

Y

J602COMPONENTVIDEO-IN

J601COMPONENTVIDEO-IN

J501INPUT1

IC601VIDEO2/VIDEO4INPUT SELECT

PB

PB

PR

Y

IC301PIP

CONTROLLER

IC501

AV SW

IC101

1 CHIP DECODER

IC701

MICROCOMPUTER

T502

FBTPOWER SUPPLY

CIRCUIT

REG.

AC INB1

FOCUS

IC151Y/C SW

IC001MTS&TONE/VOL

CONTROL

IC2013D Y/CSEP.

Q302, Q303AMP

IC702MEMORY

IC202MEMORY

IC381AUDIO SW IC371

AMP

CF021

TU001TUNER

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

IF R, G, B

CF041

RGB DRIVE

IF

SIF

MPX

V. OUT

H. OUT

VTVR, G, B

V01

TU001TUNER

V-PIP(TV)

SCLSDA

SCLSDA

SCLSDA

SCLSDA

SCLSDA

R-YB-YY

VC-RVC-GVC-B

Y

C

Y

L/RL/RVIDEOCY

CYC

Y

YC

C

OSD-ROSD-GOSD-B

VP

V-PIP(EXT.)

PIP PWB

AV SW PWB (1/2)

3D Y/C MODULE PWB

FRONT CONTROL PWB

CRT SOCKET PWB

AV SW PWB (2/2)

MAIN PWBPOWER SW PWB

AFC2

SCLSDA

Y

Q311, Q312AMP

IC401VERT OUT

C

SCLSDA

HP

LF PWB

J502INPUT4

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

J504INPUT2

J401INPUT3(FRONT)

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

J503AUDIO OUT

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

VOL+

POWER REMOCONRECEIVER

VOL- CH+ CH- MENU

ON TIMERLED

IC151SOUND

ENHACEMENTAUDIO PROCESSOR

IC401AUDIO OUT

Q511H. OUT

SCREEN

HV

L/R

L/R

L/R

L/R

V

H

DY01DEF YOKE

SPL

SPR

AV-36F802 BLOCK DIAGRAM

DAF PWB

2-6No.51907B 2-5

AV-36F802 AV-36F802

No.51907B

Page 85: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2-7No.51907B

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAMCIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

2-8 No.51907B

X

Q022

SDA0

VTV

SCL0

AGC_MUTE

BT

0 QRN143J-0R0XL041

AFT1

0R002

5V_A

1000

/16

C00

3

∗1Q021

9V_VC

4.7k

R31

8

XQ651

10/50C002

5.6kR140

10/16

N

BP

C136

0.1B2

C302

1kR043

100/16C014

100/16C023

0.01C024

∗3D307

0.01

C04

6

∗1Q02

4

0.1 B2C027

∗C150

560R290

XY651

10/50C042

∗2Q041

2.7kR041

XR031

0.1 B2

C11

6

33/16C029

12kR021

XC

399

0.1

TF

C60

9

∗8D101

XR291

120kR292

XC667

XR032

XR033

220kR293

XR034

EHT

XC031

XC032

XL023

0Y654

XL0

26

XCH

C035

QGA2501C5-07ZCN004

XY154

XR037

MPX

10/50C045

4.7/50C001

47kR001

0R

003

0R

004

0

QRN143J-0R0X

L021

XR027

QAU0234-001! TU001

QAX0349-001CF001

XCH

C033

22QQL244K-220Z

L022

5V_A

1000pC025

XR036

QAX0639-001Z

CF021

XL024

2.7kR038

XR035

XQ023

0.01C011

0.01C012

5.6kR013 100

QRE121J-101Y

R014

18R015

27R016

1.8kR012

82R011

XC013

0.39QQLZ014-R39L012

XL0

11

2SC5083/L-P/-T

Q011

XY155

∗J602

0.01C016

0.01

C01

5

XR017

XL013

10/50C028

∗J602

XR610

0

QRN143J-0R0XL027 100/16

C038

470/10C036

100R023

0.47

/50

C02

6

0.01C037

1kR024

QAX0642-001ZCF041

∗8D102

820R028

33kR029

0.01

C28

8

560R025

150R022

1kR042

∗IC651

0.01C030

47p CHC044

47p CHC043

22

QQL244K-220Z

L042

CE40668-001ZX201

330R026

68kR030

10p CHC201

33k

R20

1

10/5

0C

041

.22/50C202

0.00

22C

203

∗4D352

2200

/6.3

C11

1

0.01

C11

2 2.2k

R30

1

2.2k

R30

2

2.2k

R30

3

0R354

100

R30

6

100

R30

5

100

R30

4

∗R611

CO

M_Y

XR612

100kR018

X

R019

SD

0.1 B2

C39

3 0.1 B2

C39

4

0.1 B

2C

395

100

R10

1

100

R10

2

QAX0324-002SF011

∗5

Q711

100/

16C39

1

0.01

C39

2

10kR799

10kR798

0R

360

10k

R35

9

CN0L1

CNMD1

X 1WR856

0.1T

FC

610

0.1T

FC

611

TB1253AN1CHIP DECODER

IC101

QQL244K-470ZL101

0.01

C23

7

1/50

C11

4

.47/50C113

1MR

111

33 2WQRG029J-330R857

XHS007

18 2WQRG029J-180

R858

1kR319

XR009

∗3D353

∗Y156

0R046

33p

NDC21HJ-330X

C04

7

0.01C048

0.15 TFC354

0.1

TF

C11

5

15kR047

150kR048

XC005

XC006

∗1Q352

MTZJ9.1C-T2D010

XQ353

0R355

12kR356

XR357

33/16C352

XC353

XR358

47/25C603

∗IC601

TU_POW

75R601

75R602

NQR0169-001XLC601

NQR0169-001XLC602

75R603

47/25C601

47/25C602

5V_D

56QQL244K-560ZL001

CN0E1

XLC001

NQR0169-001XLC603

0Y003

∗C606

0Y002

XC

396

∗R604

∗R605

∗LC604

∗LC605

∗R606

∗C604

∗C605

XC

397

XC

398

∗2Q025

0.01C034

LOO

P_F

∗LC606

XR

110

QGA2501C5-05ZCNMPX

BWD855

XR859

∗R607

∗R608

∗R609

∗D605

∗D602

∗4D601

∗4D

603

∗D

604

∗4D606

477/10C607 0.01

C608

0R039

5.6kR860

.82/

50T

FC

021

.47/

50T

FC

281

1.8kR231

∗3D306

QQR0621-002ZK939

∗3D305

∗3D310

∗3D309

∗3D308

R141

∗R615

C402

∗R614

∗1Q233

∗1Q232

47kR238

∗R

613

C022

R040

56p CHC233

XC234

56QQL244K-560Z

L232

3.9kR237

3.3kR241

1.5kR243

100/

16C

287

22p

CH

C133

10p

CH

C131

15kR132

68kR133

2.7kR131

5.6kR134

∗1Q131

1kR135

10p

CH

C132

220/

16C

282

0.01

C28

3

470

R28

8

ABL

1.8k

R28

1

680

R28

3

xR

285

150k

R28

9

4.7k

R28

6

10/5

0C

286

XR

284

3.9k

R28

22.

2/50

C28

4

0.01

C28

5

100R287

AN7809FIC852

H_OUTFBPEW

0R652

0R651

C_S

WV

C

FSC

47/25C663

47/25C664

3.3k

R020

Y_S

WV

C

V_G

R3D

ING

RO

UT

1kR136

∗1Q132

∗1Q133

1kR137

1kR139

1kR138

10pCH

C134

33p CHC135

0Y653

AN7805FIC853

XQ001

XD001

XC004

X

R008

XR007

XR006

XR005

XQ002

POW_8V

220/16C856

470/16C857

POW_12V

220/16C853

220/16C854

AN7812FIC851

POW_17V

100/25C851

100/16C852

NRSA63J-0R0XY652

XR654

XR653

GR_SW

TP_952.5

LTV

RTV

ASP_ABL

D_SW

∗R155

∗SWITCH

Q153

0R044

0R045

0.01C151

∗R156

VC_R

∗Y/C SW

IC151

GND

Vcc

∗SWITCH

Q154

VC_GVC_BVC_YS

GND

TV

V_OUT

X_RAY

YCSW

Y_V

CS

W

CEHT11B-002QHS006

QNN0349-002

J601

J601

SC

L0

SD

A0

CO

M_P

R

TV

AF

T1

AFT1

SC

L0

EHT

VC

_YS

VC

_R

VC

_G

VC

_B

SC

L0

Y_S

WV

C

SD

A0

C_S

WV

C

AGC_MUTE

SD

CO

M_P

R

CO

M_P

B

CO

M_Y

SD

V_O

UT

ASP_ABL

SD

A0

BSR_RY4

FSC

BSR_BY4

BSR_Y4

BSR_RY2

BSR_BY2

BSR_Y2

CO

M_P

B

CO

M_Y

D_S

W

VC_BVC_YS

VC_RVC_G

YCSW

TVX_RAY

SDA0TU_POW

SCL0

ASP_ABL

D_SW

H_O

UT

X_R

AY

FB

P

EW

H_OUTFBPEW

TU

_PO

W

CONTROL

12V

AG

C_M

UT

E

V_OUT

YC

SW

TU NC

SWITCH

AGC

FM

IF5V LOCKSCL SDAADRS

DEMOD.

AUDIOATT

SAW FILTER

BTNC

PIF PROC.

AU

DIO

OU

T

ANT INPUT

PIF GND

RF

AG

C

AG

CIF

LOO

P F

EX

T_A

U_I

N

GR&3DY/C

DC

NF

AF

TO

UT

VR

EF

IFV

ccD

ET

OU

T

DE

EM

P

4.5MHz

4.5MHzBPF

AMP

GN

D

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

GN

D

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

GN

DG

ND

GN

D

SC

LS

DA

5VA

3.0V

3.0V

Y-O

UT

C-O

UT

3.3V

3.3V

V-I

N

GR

SW

C-I

N

5V 5V 12V

IFG

ND

VC

OA

dj

IFV

cc

12V

GR

OU

T

F

12V

9V

5V

>3.

0V

3DY/C

BUFFER

GN

DT

P_9

52.5

AU

DIO

_LA

UD

IO_R

BUFFER

>3.

0V

BA17812Tor

or

or

BA17809T

BA17805T

TRAP

C047

Q011

AMP

TUNER

AMP

AMP

AMPSWITCH

REGULATOR

12V REGULATOR

9V REGULATOR

5V REGULATOR

SWICTH

BUFFER

SWICTH

(9V

)

Y C

lam

p F

ilter

CV

BS

Int i

n

AP

L D

et F

ilter

CV

BS

Ext

in

U in

V in

C in

CV

BS

out

Dig

GN

D

V o

ut

V R

amp

H V

cc(9

V)

H A

FC

Filt

er

Bla

ck D

et F

ilter

H o

ut

Syn

c ou

t

X R

ay

FB

P in

/GP

out

Dig

VD

D

EW

out

AB

CL

in

Ik in

EH

T in

SD

A

SC

L

RG

B V

cc(9

V)

Ext

B in

Ext

G in

Ext

R in

Ys/

Ym

in

SV

M o

ut

YC

GN

D

B o

ut

G o

ut

R o

ut

YC

Vcc

(5V

)

CW

out

AP

C F

ilter

X'ta

l

INPUT2

INPUT4(AV-36F802 ONLY)

Vcc

GND

GND GND

H

H H

RYBY

Y

Video 2

Video 4

MAIN PWB ASS'YSAC-1542A-M2(AV-36F702)SAC-1547A-M2(AV-36F802)

CNMD1

CNMD1

CNMD1

1.0Vp-p(H) 0.68Vp-p(H)

47 42

27

24

17

2.2Vp-p(H)

1.6Vp-p(H)

2.1Vp-p(H)

IC101

IC101

38

34

4.6Vp-p(H)

14 15 16

4.0Vp-p(H) 3.5Vp-p(H) 3.5Vp-p(H)

IC101

1.9Vp-p(V)

IC101

0V 4.8V 3.8V 4V

8.8V 2.

1V

2.3V

1.6V

2.1V

2.3V

2.2V

2.3V

2.4V

0V 4.8V

3.9V

6.8V8.9V 1.9V 3.1V0V

0.9V

3.2V 3.3V

3V

4.9V

4V

3.1V

1.7V

1.7V

0.6V

7.3V

4.6V

1.5V

4.8V

2.4V

2.4V

2.5V

0V 3V 0V

2.2V

2.2V

8.9V

2.4V

2.7V 3.1V 0V

2.8V

5.9V

2.4V 3.3V

2.2V

2.5V

4.5V 0V 3.1V 0V 3.1V 0V 4.6V

0V 0V 4.6V 8.8V 4.6V 0V 4.5V

4.9V

2.1V V

2.4

3.7V

1.4V

0.8V

8.7V 3.6V

2.9V

3.6V3.0V

2.6V 4.7V

2.4V

2.7V

4.7V

31.5V 0V1.6V

8.7V

1.0V

0V 0V 3.2V 4.2V 4.2V 4.2V

4.3V 2.6V 2.6V 2.6V 7V 7V 8.8V

8.7V

4.3V 3.7

V3.1V

5.7V

3.1V8.8V

2.5V

0V0.6V

0V

4V8.8V

3.4V

0.4V

1.4V

2.4V 2.7V 4.9V

3.3V

4.2V 2.6V

3.3V

3.7V4.9V

11.8V

2.6V

4.9V

3.3V

4.9V

8.7V

5.6V

5.0V

0NOT USEDNOT USEDQNN0349-00247µF/25V47µF/25V0.01µF470µF/10V47µF/25V47µF/25V47µF/25VNCF21CZ-105XQRG029J-180QRG029J-33000NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDSAC-1547A-M2NOT USED00NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDQRG029J-270QRG029J-470NOT USEDNOT USED220Ω220Ω220ΩSAC-1542A-M2

Y156Y155Y154J602C664C663C608C607C606C605C604C150R858R857R652R651R612R611R610

3.3kΩ3.3kΩ3.3kΩ75Ω75kΩ75Ω5.6kΩ22kΩQAU0234-001∗5∗5NQR0169-001XNQR0169-001XNQR0169-001X∗4∗4∗4PQ3RD13M52055FP-XTC4066BF/N/-XESAC-1547A-M2NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDQAU0176-001NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDSAC-1542A-M2

R609R608R607R606R605R604R156R155TU001Q154Q153LC606LC605LC604D605D604D602IC651IC601IC151∗ ∗DIFFERENCE LIST( PARTS)

: NRSA63J-0R0X

: DTC124EKA-X: MTZJ9.1C-T2: 1SS133-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X

: NON MOUNT

∗3

∗5: MTZ8.2C-T2∗8

∗4

∗1∗2

X0

: BUS WIREBW

NOTE

Page 86: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

2-10No.51907B 2-9

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No.51907B

3.3 2WQRX029J-3R3

! FR524

150k1/2W

R527

120k1/2WR528

SARS01-T2D915

FR526

X

Y916

XC941

∗4K935

RU3YX-LFC4D935

CNDAF

SE135NIC921

ST

B_V

CC

0.001QCB32HK-102ZC531

XC922

1SS81-T5D526

4.7 FR1/2WQRZ9017-4R7

! FR52547

QRZ9011-470

! R525

X

Y917

MA

IN_P

OW

QQLZ018-760L521

2.4kNRSA02D-242X

! R535

2.7k1/2W*

R526

EH

T

ICP-N75-Y!

CP

CP932

QQH0110-001! T502

0.01QFLC2AJ-103Z

C527

2.2K1/2W*

R918

1000/25C524

1000/25QEHR1EM-108Z

C523

100/35C525

AU

_GN

D

XD542

3.3 2WQRX029J-3R3

!FR523

1SR35-400A-T2D537

ST

B_5

V

EL1Z-T3D523

EL1Z-T3D524

1SS81-T5D525

BWK940

XC528

XY905

15 FR1/2WQRK126J-150X

! FR521

RH1S-T3D521

10/250QETN2EM-106Z

C521

XL513

0Y902

100kR943

MTZJ5.1C-T2D918

CE42034-002T501

0.01 400VQFP32GJ-103

C919

.0015/500QCB32HK-152ZC940

470/200QEZ0169-477

C907

.1/100MY,5%

C410

∗3D914

ICP-N75-Y!

CP

CP933

47QRG01GJ-470

R909

∗1Q431

680 1/2W*QRK126J-681X

R914

∗3D920

MTZJ30A-T2D917

0.01QCZ9074-103

! C998

BWK914

QQ

R08

72-0

02K

920

47kR951

RGP10J-5025-T3D911

ST

B_G

ND

∗1Q440

680k

R1/2QRE121J-684Y

R919

0.001QCZ9054-102

C904

AU

_VC

C

0.001QCZ9054-102

C905

0.001QCZ9054-102

C908

CE41507-001PCN0CP

220/160QEZ0203-227

C931

1000P 2kVQCZ0340-102

C937

RU30A-F1D931

CEKP007-002

!

POSISTORTH901

100R440

S1

CH41169-005YCN0S1

P

QGA2501C5-06ZCN005

3300p 2KVQCZ0340-332

C9120.15

2WMFRR913

0.182WMFR

R912

330pNDC31HJ-331X

C916

HV

CHC802T-05N-JCN0HV

1.2kR944

1801/2W

R940

MTZJ5.1C-T2D529

MA700A-T2D910

BWD532

7.5kNRVA02D-752X

! R537

2.2/100

N

C505

6801/2W

R512

2SD1383K/AB/-XQ951

∗1Q941

330R529

10kR405

XR522

2 7WUNFQRF074J-2R0

R507

XR536

MA4068N/Z1/-T2

!

D531

V

22k1/2w

R930

QRF074K-R47R901

10kR412

10kR411

5V_A

10kR441

ABL

18 1/2W*R417

47/25C432

150 2WOMRQRL029J-151

R414

1QRX01GJ-1R0

R403

FBP

XD402

2SA1123/R/Z1-TQ971

101/2W*

R404

1/50QETN1HM-105Z

C411

0NRSA02J-0R0X

R407

XR408

QQR0621-002ZK401

100/35

QEHR1VM-107ZC404

QMFZ034-5R0Z-J1! F905

C522

1000/35QEHQ1VM-108

C421

1SR35-400A-T2D401

3.3k1/2W*

QRK126J-332X

R917

0.001QCZ9054-102

C906

XD415

2200/25QETM1EM-228

C938

2SD2645-YDQ511

OPT2WMFR

R916

XR409

8.2kR401

∗4K932

2.23W

QRT039J-2R2

R939

BWK938

STR-F6626/F3IC911

1500pCH2

C401

0.1B2

C415

∗4K933

QQS0090-001! T921

FB

P

RGP10J-5025-T3D930

10p/500 5%C405

V

0.015

CH

NCB21HK-153X

C403

BS

_17V

22k1/2w

R911

.1/100

MY

QFLC2AJ-104ZC407

47QQL26AK-470Z

L931

BWY401

100p

NDC31HJ-101X

Y911

XY914

BWY910

1/50C942

RGP10J-5025-T3D913

47QQL26AK-470Z

L933

0.01QCZ9074-103

! C999

1kR952

1501/2W

R953

1000/25QETN1EM-108Z

C951

33k

QRJ146J-333X

R523

390QRJ146J-391X

R531

0.82 TFQFV21HJ-824Z

C526

BW

Y904

XY909

GN

D

1SR124-400A-T2D527

0.0151400VHQFZ0198-153

!C513

0.022

PP630V

C514

XY912

27k3WMFR

QRL039J-273

R513

BWY913

K917

RBV-406MD901

∗4K912

K9162700p1800VH

QFZ0196-272

!

C510

RU3AM-LFC4

D502

RH3G-F1D501

VP

2

AC

4.7/50

N

QEZ0195-475Z

C507

ICP-N75-Y!

CP

CP936

8.2kR434

XC517

RGP10J-5025-T3!

!

D507

560p/500QCB32HK-561Z

C516

100/160QEZ0203-107

C504

CN00Q

0.47250VMPPQFZ0197-474

C515

QQLZ027-821L512

XR549

8.2k1/2W*

R545

8201/2W*

R548

2.2k1/2W*

R5441.2k1/2W*

R543

XC542

XR552

∗2Q541

∗2Q542

CN00P

33kR978

100kR547

1.2k3WMFR

QRL039J-122

R504

330p/500QCB32HK-331Z

C502

150p/500QCB32HK-151Z

C5012SC4212/Z1/

Q501

0R501

1SR35-400A-T2D956

10k1/2W*

R503

XR570

XR571

330R546

XR572

XR573

100/50QETN1HM-107Z

C914

XD543

XC543

D953

1K 0.5%R972

2.7k1/2W*

R973

22k1/2W*

R975

PO

W_8

V

47k1/2W

R977

∗3D973

MTZJ15C-T2D972

XR551

100/16C971

47/25C972

0B2

NRSA63J-0R0X

C925

2SD1408/OY/-LBQ543

XC949

CE41029-00AL511

XL940

270R502

1/160C503

221/2W

R511

1.5k3WMFR

QRL039J-152

R505

XR550

6.8kR435

CN00KXCN00A

LA7841IC401

H

10/50C973

47kR433

100kR432

1000/25QETN1EM-108Z

C935

0Y903

VGND

1000/25QETN1EM-108Z

C934

V

47QQL26AK-470Z

L934

ICP-N75-Y!

CP

CP934

MTZJ33A-T2D941

18

2WMFRQRL029J-183

R941

V

H

2.2k1/2W*

R924

0.1B2

C918

2200pC917

RGP10J-5025-T3D912 27

1/2W

R915

∗4K931

AB

L

X_R

AY

RU3YX-LFC4

D933

1500PQCB32HK-152ZC939

2200/25QETM1EM-228

C933

470pMY,5%

C913

47/25C948

BWD958

XC955

1SR35-400A-T2D957

1SR35-400A-T2D954

1SR35-400A-T2D955

27KR532

∗3D952

∗3D945

QSK0113-001! RY951

QSK0120-001! RY941

QQT0315-001! T951

QGZ5003C1-02CNDEG

XR935

1000/16C943

47QQL26AK-470Z

L937

1000/16C932

RU3YX-LFC4D937∗4

K937

2.7k1/2W

R431

TU

_PO

W

GN

D

OC

P

H_O

UT

B1_

PO

W

EW

12V

V_O

UT

PO

W_1

2V

BT

∗3D432

1SR35-400A-T2D431

1/50C431

12kR533

∗3D535

BWD534

2SC2785/JH/-TQ531

2SA1037AK/QR/-XQ532

12kR534

33kR538

WJM0212-003A

CN008

10/50C533

39 3WMFRQRL039J-390

R553

PO

W_1

7V QJB003-033626

CN009

TLP621(B)! PC921

AU

_GN

D

8V

POW_17V

POW_8V

EW

BS_17V

AB

L

B1_POW

AU_GND

X_R

AY

V_O

UT

H_O

UT

POW_12V

BT

TU

_PO

W

MAIN_POW

STB_GND

AU_VCC

STB_VCC

GND

PO

W_1

7V

ST

B_5

V15V

ST

B_G

ND

STB_5V

MA

IN_P

OW

PO

W_1

2V

BT

GN

D

ST

B_V

CC

BS

_17V

AU

_VC

C

PO

W_8

V

STB_5V

FB

P

QQD0029-001

FEED

V_a

mp

FOCUS

HVT

DAF

12V

H.OUT

B1

0.5

DAF

B1

V.OUT

QQW0107-001

NCB1

-Vcc

DEG

SCREEN

ISOLATED

VD

Vcc

V1V2H3

H5

HV

FOCUS

L01

NC

POWER REGULATOR

GN

D

GN

D

H_P

ULS

ET/B

SIDEPIN

217V

DEF YOKE

(V)

SIDEPIN

SCREEN

PB

PUMP UP

(H)

B1 135V

HEATER

MAIN PWB

PWB

TO

TO DAF

GN

D

GN

D

SWITCH

SWITCH

H.DRIVE

S_C

OR

E1

S_C

OR

E2

DY01

ASS'Y

X_RAY

H.DRIVE

H.DRIVE

DRIVE

OC

P

TP-91B

TP-E

14V

NC

.T

SIDEPIN_OUT

HB

GNDNC

OSC

XRAY1

TSD

QFP32JJ

XRAY2

SW TRANSF

LIVE ( )

BACK

( )

HEAT

RELAY

INNER

SINK

PIN

THERMALPROTECTION

PWBTO

RELAY

DEG

ERROR

MAIN

OVPGND

Vcc

TO CRT SOCKET PWBCN006

AMP

VOLTAGE

SWITCH

SWITCH

-223

NC

!

∗4

∗4

!

∗3

!

!

!

!

DAFPWB

FOR ADJ.CONNECTOR

TO CRT

SAC-1542A-M2 (AV-36F702)SAC-1547A-M2 (AV-36F802)

Q501

0.8Vp-p(H)

B

140Vp-p(H)

Q501 C

Q511

2.4Vp-p(H)

B

T502

T502

6Vp-p(V)

33Vp-p(H)

100Vp-p(H)

150Vp-p(H)

T502

90Vp-p(H)

8

150Vp-p(H)

2 T502 9

T5027 6 T502 4

32Vp-p(V)

60Vp-p(V)

IC401 2

IC401 3 7

0.6V

1.4V

0V0.7V

0V

13.6V

155V

0V

1.8V

134V

11.2V

-12.2V

0V

0.6V

-14.3V0.2V 14.6V

2.5V

2.5V

14.1V

11.7V

4.4V 11.8V

3.9V

5V

4.4V5V

5V

0V

0.2V

72.4V

-0.1V

3.4V

3.9V

0.6V

3.8V

3.2V

0.6V

17.6V

: NRSA63J-0R0X

: QQR0582-001Z: 1SS133-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X

: NON MOUNT

∗3∗4

∗1∗2

X0

: BUS WIREBW

NOTE

Page 87: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2-11No.51907B

MAIN, FRONT CONTROL AND POWER SW PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

2-12 No.51907B

QAX0307-001X700

MN1876478JL1IC701

X CH

C70

8

XC

HC

709

0.06

8C

710

4.7QQL244K-4R7Z

L700

100/16C707

100

R73

1

2.7k

R73

310

0R

732

2.7k

R73

4

XD

703

XD

704

XR

735

XR

736

2.2k

R73

7

10k

R74

0

0R

741

10k

R74

21k

R73

8

10k

R74

32.

7kR

739

xR74

4

XR

747

10k

R74

8

2.2k

R74

9

2.2k

R75

0

2.2k

R75

1

1kR

752

xR

746

0R

753

XY157

∗R

762 X

R79

7

10k

R76

3

0.00

1C

700 1k

R70

010

0R

708

4.7k

R70

4

100

R70

9

4.7k

R70

5

1kR

701

1kR

702

10k

R70

6

10k

R70

7

XR

703

XC

701

XR

716

XC

702

XR71

2

*R

714

10k

R71

5

XR71

7

xR71

0

1kR72

7

MM1437AF-XIC703

100/16C800

0.1B2

C801

100/16C802

10/50C803

10kR800

∗3D

801

1SS81-T2D800

10/50C806

0.015C805

S-24C04BDPIC702

10/50C807

1000

p

CH

C80

4

6.8kR769

∗2Q701

10kR772

QNS0001-001J810

6.8kR770

6.8kR774

XQ702

∗2Q703

XR773

10kR777

SD

∗1Q

700

1kR75

4

10kR756

15kR755

MT

ZJ5

.6B

-T2

D70

0

22k

R72

91/

50C

706

∗3D

701 1k

R72

8

CN00C

220

R76

822

0R

767

220

R76

622

0R

765

220

R76

4

MT

ZJ8

.2C

-T2

D70

8

MT

ZJ8

.2C

-T2

D70

7

MT

ZJ8

.2C

-T2

D70

6

MT

ZJ8

.2C

-T2

D70

9

MT

ZJ8

.2C

-T2

D71

0

XR781

xR783 X

R782

XC711

∗3D

702

0R807

QGA2501C5-04ZCN0SS

XR

801

VT

V

BS_17V

MP

XF

SC

xR

713

XR

711

0R71

8

XR71

9

XR72

0

1kR72

1

1kR72

2

1kR72

3

1kR72

4

180pCH

C703X

C704

XC

705

∗R72

5

1kR72

6

XR73

0

39pCH

C722

xR75

7

39pCH

C723

xR75

8

6.8kR778

XQ704

XR780

CO

M_Y

0R74

54.7kR784

XR785

120kR788

xR789

39kR786

XR787

4.7/50C712

XC713

XD

705

XR

802

XR

803

XR

804

330

R79

3

330

R79

4

330

R79

5

XR79

6

∗Y712

VP

2

XY700

0Y701

XY702

0Y703

0Y704

0Y705

FB

P

D_S

WG

R_S

WY

CS

W

AS

P_A

BL

*Y

152

Q705

10kR792 68k

R791

27kR790

1SS81-T2D711D712

D714

D713

BT

XC715

1/50C714

VC_B

QGB1505J1-35CN003

VC_YS

X_R

AY

VC_R

QGA2501C1-09CN006

TU

_PO

W

VC_G

BWK941

VP

RT

VLT

V

OC

P

AG

C_M

UT

E

TV

B1_

PO

W

MTZJ8.2C-T2D810

MA

IN_P

OW

10L8

10

1/50BP

C152

∗3D715

1kR

806

1/50C811

.47/50C810

XC812

0R810

AC

47k

R81

1

0.00

1C

813

1kR

812

∗3D

811

100k

R81

4

XR813

DTC144EKA-XQ810

150kR815

XC814

GN

D

0R

816

XC

815

AF

T1

QGB1505J1-25CN001

QGB1505J1-35CN002

XQ707

BW

D71

6

Y_V

CS

W

12V

9V_V

C

5V_A

AU

_VC

CA

U_G

ND

TP

_952

.5

V_G

R3D

IN

C_S

WV

C

Y_S

WV

C

SC

L0S

DA

0

5V_D

0Y800

ST

B_G

ND

GR

OU

T

XY151

ST

B_V

CC

0Y

150

ST

B_5

V

QGA2501C5-07ZCN007

1/50C612

MTZJ5.6B-T2D724MTZJ5.6B-T2D723

XC

727

LOO

P_F

XD812

0.015C816

100kR817

XR779

XC

728

0Y714

XY713

1kR81

8

CN0SN

LA6515IC501

2SA966/OY/-T

Q552

2SC1740S/QR/-TQ5512.7k

R594

22QRJ149J-220

R591

18kR592

10kR595

100kR593

10Q

RE

121J

-100

YR

588

100k

R58

7

XY153

150k

R58

6

4.7k

R58

5

DT

C36

3TK

-XQ

706

47k

R77

5

12k

R77

6

VP

560P

CH

2C

726

D72

2

XC725

470p

CH

C72

4

∗3D721

10k

R82

4

XR

825

XR

826

1kR827

XR823

XR

822

100k

R82

1

0.01

C72

1

6.8kR590

56k

R58

412

0k

R58

2

10Q

RE

121J

-100

YR

581

5.6kR589

0.47TF

C551

0.47TF

C552

47/25C553

68k

R58

3

VP

RE

MO

CO

N

VP

2

REMOCON

9V_VC

SCL0A

FT

1

KE

Y1

KE

Y2

X_R

AY

OSD

OS

DR

OS

DG

OS

DB

OS

DY

S

SIGNAL

LAT.

CLK

D_S

W

LAT.

DAT

A

A_M

UT

E

KEY2KEY1

COMPULINK

COMPULINK

MA

IN_P

OW

BS

_PO

W

TV

AG

C_M

UT

E

B1_

PO

W

GR

_SW

BB

E_S

W

AF

T1

VP

CONTROL

C/N

S_3

C_V

CS

W

FB

P

GND

M_M

UT

E

SDA0

STB_VCC

AS

P_A

BL

ST

B_5

V

STB_GND

LAT.DATA

LAT.CLK

P_LED

B_LED

NS_CORR

NS_SW

VP

2F

BP

CONTROL

MA

IN_P

OW

OSDYSOSDBOSDGOSDR

HP

BT

RBS

COM_Y

VBS

SC

L0

C/N

BS_POW

1CHIP_AVSW

S_S

W

P_L

ED

B_L

ED

NS

_SW

M_M

UT

E

YC

SW

OC

P

A_MUTE

HP

BS

TU

_PO

W

AC

NS

_CO

RR

BT

C3

V_C

CD

VC_YSVC_BVC_GVC_R

C3S3_GNDY3

VC_R

VC_G

VC_B

VC_YS

LTV

V3V3_GNDL3

V_VCSW

R3

S_3ABS_GND

STB_5V

RBS

Y3

12V

SD

B1_

PO

WT

V

AG

C_M

UT

ET

U_P

OW

OC

P

AS

P_A

BL

X_R

AY

YC

SW

GR

_SW

D_S

W

VO

L_AT

T

RTV

AC

CO

M_Y

GN

D

SD

RT

V

S3_GND

R3

V3_GNDV3

COM_Y

L3

LTV

S_SW

BS

BBE_SWV_CCDVOL_ATTSCL0SDA0A_MUTE

GR3D_AVSW

ABS_GND

VBS

VBS_GND

VBS_GND

LOO

P_F

LOO

P_F

SD

A0

FSC

MPX

5V_A

V_SWVC

GND

Y_VCSW

GND

C_VCSW

SD

A0

C_SWVC

Y_SWVC

TP

_952

.5

5V_A

9V_VC

9V_VC

12V

AU_GND

AU_VCC

MP

XF

SC

SC

L0

AC

Y_V

CS

W

C_S

WV

C

Y_S

WV

C

9V_V

C

5V_A

AU

_VC

CA

U_G

ND

TP_952.5

5V_D

5V_D

ST

B_G

ND

V_VCSW

ST

B_V

CC

ST

B_5

V

STB_GND

V_SWVC

VCC

Vss

sR

emoc

on

SD

A1

SC

L1

Key

1

Key

2

E.E

.Sen

s

D_M

OD

E

SY

ST

EM

1,2

C/N

Teid

en

AC

in

CM

SY

NC

AS

P_A

BL

N/S

CO

RR

EC

TIO

N

VM

_LE

VE

L

S_S

W

PO

WE

R_L

ED

BS

/SPA

_LE

D

N/S

ON

OF

F

M_M

UT

E

AV

DD

CR

EF

VP

H

VC

P

CV

BS

Vss

YC

SW

VO

L_AT

T

A_M

UT

E

SPA

_ON

/OF

FS

PA_S

TE

RE

O

OC

PM

EC

A

IIC_S

TOP

SY

ST

EM

3

SY

ST

EM

4

Vss

c

/H_S

ync

D_S

W

OS

D_Y

s

OS

D_B

OS

D_G

OS

D_R

GR

SWBS

TU

_PO

W

AG

C_M

UT

E

TV

B1_

Pow

BS

_Pow

Mai

n_P

ow

LOO

P_F

/RS

T

/V_S

ync

WA

KE

_UP

LAT.

CLK

LAT.

DAT

A

SD

A0

SC

L0

VD

D

OS

C1

OS

C2

Com

puLi

nk

ON

_TIM

ER

_LE

D

PIP

_AF

T

A0 A1 A2 Vss

VccTest

SCL1SDA1

CHIP

US C CHIP

MA

IN_A

FT

SP

EA

KE

R_O

nOff

VA

RI/F

IX

BB

E_O

nOff

CC

D_X

O

CC

D_X

I

Teid

en

X X X X X X X XX_R

AY

NC

NC

9V_VC9V_VC_GND9V_VC_GND

PIP5V

PIP5V_GND

MICOMGNDYS

B

PIP5V_GND

G

VP

VTV2GND

HP

R

HV_GND

V_PIP

NC

MICOMGND

NC

AFC2

PIP5V

9V_VC

SCL0SDA0

MICOMGND

NC

30V

MIX2_RMIX2_GMIX2_B

MIX2_YS

V_PIPGND

NC

30VGND

CM

P_S

WX

SD

X

XXXXX

Y_COMP

Y3S_3

FSCM_MUTE

RBS

COMPULINKEX

9V_SW

ST

B_G

ND

L

RR

L

L_GNDL_GND

R_GNDR_GND

A_VCCA_VCC

A_VCC_GNDA_VCC_GND

VOLATT

SOA

BBE

A_MUTE

STB_5V

9V_VC

MPX

9VGND

12V

12VGND

SDASCL

5VA

5VAGND

VTV(GROUT)

CIN1(NC)

YIN1(NC)

YCINGND

VOUT1GND

VOUT1(NC)

9V_VC

9V_SWGND

9V_VC

SSW

COUT

ASWYOUT

9VGND

LTV

V_PIP

VARI/FIX

ABSGND

VBSGND

V_CCD

LV3

V3GND

RV3

C3V3GND

V3V3GND

RTV

MAIN PWB ASS'YSAC-1542-M2(AV-36F702)SAC-1547A-M2(AV-36F802)

∗3

∗3

∗3

∗2

AV SELECTORPWB

PIP PWB(AV-36F802 ONLY)

∗3

15kR703

XR704

QJB003-093626CN006

XD401

KEY2

REMOCON

XR701LED_T

QNZ0453-001J401

15kR706

LED_P

1STB5V

XR927

∗4D403

4.7kR705

KEY1

XR926

QJB003-074426CN007

4.7kR702

S706

QJB003-060806CN00B

X

∗VA901

BWY401

0

NRSA63J-0R0X

Y402

∗4D402

75R404

S705

CN00L

NQR0169-001X

LC401

33kR406

XY905

.47/50C445

0.01C446

XY907

XL02

75R405

S702S703S704

XY904

XR925

XY

906

XS901

NQR0169-001XLC402

XCN0L1

∗4D404

∗4D405

75R401

220kR402

220kR403

1/50C443

1/50C442

.47/50C444

∗4D406

V3

R3

L3

LED_P

N/S ROTATION

LED_T

L

MENU

B

7

LED_P

VOL-

LED_T

REMOCON

KEY1

V

STB_5V

V3

YC

NC

NC

NC

STB_GND

L/MONO

R

12V

GND

REMOCONKEY1KEY2

VOL+ CH-

STB_5VSTB_GND

C3S3_GNDY3S_3V3V3_GNDL3A_GNDR3

CH+

S702-S706 QSW0619-003Z

FRONT CONTROL PWB ASS'YSAC-8507A-M2POWER

SWPWB

QGA2501C5-06ZCN00B

1.5kR108

∗3SWITCH

Q101

3.3kR107

SLR-342VR3FD101

REMOCON

LED_TLED_P1STB5V

∗3SWITCH

Q102

560R10147/25

C102

KEY1

QSW0847-001S701 GP1U281Q

REMOCONRECEIVER

IC101

OUT

Vcc

GND

(RED)

1.8VB

4.9V

V4.8

POWER

/0V4.8V

4.8V0V/

5V

or

KEY1STB_GND

LED_TLED_P

STB_5VREMOCON

PIC-28143SY

POWER SW PWB ASS'Y SAC-8601A-M2FRONTCONTROLPWB

: NRSA63J-0R0X

: DTA124EKA-X: MTZJ10C-T2: 1SS133-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X

: NON MOUNT

∗3

∗5∗4

∗1∗2

X0

: BUS WIREBW

NOTE

5V5V

0V0V0V0V0V0V2V5V 0V0V0V5V0V0V0V0V0V0V2.6V0.4V2.4V0V1.6V5V5V5V

4.9V0V4.9V2.8V2.8V0V0V0V0V4.9V0V4.8V0V0V0V0V0.1V5V

4.7V

4.6V

4.5V

4.9V2.1V0V 0V 0V

4.6V

0V

5V

5.4V

0V 0V

4.9V

4.9V

7.8V

4.9V

5V 0V

4.9V

5V

4.7

V

0 V

0V

3V3.6V

2.4V

4.3V5V

4.9V

3.9V

0V

0V

2.7V

3.2V0V

2.2V

2.4V

2.7V

0.3V

3.8V 0V

4.6V 0V

2.6V

1.1V

00NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USED1kΩ1kΩ1kΩSAC-1547A-M2NOT USEDNOT USED0000NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDSAC-1542A-M2

Y712Y152R804R803R802R801R762R725R714

∗ ∗DIFFERENCE LIST( PARTS)

Page 88: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

2-14No.51907B 2-13

PIP PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]

AV-36F802 AV-36F802

No.51907B

XBUFFER

Q102

10/50C004

QAU0206-001!

TU001

47/25C008

AN7805F5V REGULATOR

INOUT

IC001

XR007

BWY002

QGB1505K1-35

CN003

0R011

∗2Q303

BWY360

XR125

XR126

X

R012X

C012

XR124

XR123X

L121

0R121X

C121

XY351

XY359

XCF001

XQ304

XR310

XC001

0Y302

XC305

XC304

XL305

10/50C003

10/5

0C

006

BWL001

XY354

10kR002

100R004

0R005

100R003 10k

R001

XR006

XC010

XC011

BWY915

BWY355

BWY356

BWY357

BWY358

2.2kR303

100

R31

3

330R316

XR315

0Y30110

0R

311

2.2kR306

XR302

47kR301

0R314

∗5D301

∗2Q302

∗2Q301

XY903

0.1B2

C326

XC353

0C302

XC303

0.1B2

C331

0.1B2

C3160.1B2

C3170.1B2

C318

XC352

1/50C321

2.2/50C329

2.2/50C327

10/50C323

10/50C314

XC351

10/50C319

XY904

XY908

27p

CH

C312

0.01C330

0.01C315

XY909

27pCH

C313

0.01C322

0C301

0.01C324

0.01C320

0.01C325

0.01C328

27MHz X-TALQAX0521-001Z

X301

6.8L304

BWY910

6.8L303

6.8L302

X

IN OUT

IC351

47kR304

XR305

XY911

XY912

BWY913

XR333

XQ332

XQ331

0R331

BWC334

XR334

XR332

XC335

XR335

XR336

XR339

XQ334

XQ333

0R337

BWC336

XR340

XR338

XC337

1kR309

3.3kR308

3.3kR307 X

R341XR342

XR345

XR351

SDA9389X-XIC301

XQ336

XQ335

0R343

BWC338

XR346

XR344

XC339

XR347

XR348

0Y331

BWY352

0Y332

0Y333

XY353

0R317

XC332

68p CHC333

XD302

XY902BWY906

XY901

BWY907

XR127

SC

L0

SD

A0

9V_VC

30V

9V_V

C

R G BY

S

BOUT

ROUT

MIX

2_Y

S

9V_V

C_G

ND

AFC2

HP

VP

SD

A0

SC

L0

MIX

2_B

MIX

2_G

30V

MIX

2_R

SC

L0

R G BY

S

AF

C2

VP

HP

SD

A0

RO

UT

GO

UT

BO

UT

MIX

2_Y

S

MIX2_R

MIX2_B

MIX2_GGOUT

GN

D

NC

9V_V

CV

TV

2 G

ND

NC

NC

or BA17805T

NC

NC

CV

BS

1

NC

NC

NC

VR

EF

HC

VB

S2

CV

BS

3V

RE

FL

VS

SA

1

NC

VD

DA

1U

RE

FV

SS

A2

VD

DA

2

NC

RO

UT

BO

UT

GO

UT

YS

OU

TY

SIN

BIN

NC

RIN

9V_V

C

NC

GIN

V_P

IP

AMP

XIN

GN

D

V_PIP

XQ

SC

PV

P/S

CP

SD

AS

CL

VD

DV

SS T

XF

RE

Q

NC

NC

VPHP

(EXT.)

V_P

IP(T

V)

V_P

IP(E

XT.

)

PIP PWB ASS'YSAC0P501A-M2

5V

BUFFER

AMP BUFFER

AMP BUFFERMIX2_YS

9V

9V

PIP

5V

PIP

5V_G

ND

(CHIP)

PIP

5V

V_P

IP

GN

DA

FT

RF

_AG

CV

IDE

O

NC NC

5v 30vBTAGC 9V IFSCL SDAADRS

NC

LOCKNC

TUNER-IF1

NC

GN

D

GN

D

NC

(CHIP)

(CHIP)(CHIP)

PIP

5V_G

ND

MIC

OM

HV

_GN

D

MIC

OM

GN

D

30V

GN

D

MIC

OM

PIP CONTROLER

INVERTER

INVERTER

BUFFER

MAIN PWB

IC301 28

1.0Vp-p

1.1V

1.7V 4.7

V

0V0.6V

0.6V0.6V4.

9V

4.9V

4.9V0V2.2V

0.9V

4.2V

2.7V

2.7

V

2.4

V

0V

0.6

V

0.6

V

0.4

V

0V

0V4.9V0V0.

9V1.7

V

1.7V0.9V

0.6V

0V0.6V

8.8V

5V

2.5V

4.0V

2.4V

V8.8

32.1V5V

V2.62.4V2.5V4.6V

: NRSA63J-0R0X

: BUS WIRE (0Ω): 1SS133-T2: 2SC2412K/QR/-X

: NON MOUNT (OPEN)BW

∗2∗5

X0

NOTE

Page 89: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702 AV-36F702

2-15No.51907B

AV SELECTOR PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM [AV-36F702]

2-16 No.51907B

AUDIO OUT

(NOT USED)

INPUT2

(NOT USED)

INPUT1

MAIN PWB

AV SELECTOR PWB ASS'YSAC0S511A-M2

: NRSA63J-0R0X

: DTC323TK-X: DTC124EKA-X: MTZJ10C-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X

: NON MOUNT

∗4

∗8∗5

∗1∗2

X0

: BUS WIREBW

NOTE

0V

V V0V

4.3V

2.5 2.7

4.3V

3.9V

4.8V

0V

0V

4.4V

4.4V

3.9V

3.9V

0V

4.8V

V4.4

4.4V 3.93.9V V

4.4 4.7V V

8.7V3.5V 4.6V

4.4V

4.3V

4.4V

4.4V

4.4V

4.1V

3.8V

4.3V

4.4V4.4V4.4V 3.9V

4.2V

4.4V

3.9V

4.3V 3.7V

8.8V

4.4V

8.8V

4.4V

0V

V4.4

V4.4

V4.4 4.4

VV4.4 4.4V

V4.4

4.4V

8.7V

8.7V

4.4V4.4V4.4V

4.4V

4.4V

4.4V

0.6V

0V

0V

0V

0V

1.3V 1.3V

7.8V

0V

0.6V 0V

21.1V V2.1 10.10V

V10.1V

2.6VV2.4

0VVV4.5

V4.5

V4.4

V4.4

V4.4

VVVVVVVVVV4.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.5

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.4 4.7 0.2 3.2 4.5 0V4.42.74.44.15V1.24.5VVVV

4.5 5VVVVVVV

4.5VVVVVV

V4.4

V4.4

9V 4.5V

9V

/0V

7.2V

/0V

7.2V

4.6V

4.6V

4.6V

4.4V

0V

0V/

9V

0V/

9V

4.4V

4.6V

4.6V

4.6V

CXA2089Q-XIC501

QNZ0454-001J501

QGB1505K1-35CN002

XR534

∗2Q263

0.01C531

1kR270

680R269

0R528

0R529

XD522

33kR518

75R519

75R520

75R521

0.01C509

.47/50

C508

XLC501

XLC502

220kR522

220kR523

1/50C512

1/50C513

.47/50C511

0R558

0R559

0R560

0R561

XD523

XR524

XR525

XR526

0.01C206

75R527

XC515

XC514

XLC503

XLC504

220kR532

220kR533

1/50C520

1/50C521

.47/50C517

XR562

XR563

0R564

0R565

BA15218NIC371XY381

BWY401

3L DIGITAL COMB FILTERTC90A53NIC201

470kR242

4700pC237

XR535

XC522

XC523

0.01C532

XC533

100/16C401

XR

403

XD403

XC534

XC

408

1/50C412

1000/25C407

XR404

XD

402

XC409

R

0.001C309X

C307

L

L

R

0NRSA63J-0R0X

C3120R306

0R305

0.001C310

0NRSA63J-0R0X

C3111/50C413

220R303

2.2kR302

56k

R09

0

∗5Q301

220R304

XY152

QGB1505K1-25CN001

XD

512

∗4D

511

∗4D

508

XD

510

∗4D

509

∗4D

505

∗4D

504

∗4D

503

∗4D

502

∗4D

501

1kR

501

1kR

502

220

R50

3

1kR

504

1kR

505

XR

506

XD

506

∗4D

507

XD513

XD514

∗4D515

∗4D516

∗4D517

∗4D518

∗4D519

XD520

∗4D521

1kR507

1kR508

220R509

XD527

XD528

XR406

XR

511

XR

510

10kR243

10kR2440.01C238 0.01

C234

330R566

330R567

47/25C504

XY151

XC53

6

XC53

7

22/50C503

XR513

XR512

0.01C501

0.01C502

∗1Q211

47/50C205

180pCH

C246

0R568

XY201

∗5Q454

0.01C242

0.01C243

0.01C249

22k

R402

∗5Q302

0.01C244

0.01C247

0.01C248

0.01C241

1000/25C410

18kR401

XC453

0.22TFC404

XQ455

15

QQL244K-150Z

L202

XY202

BWL241

XC308

2.2kR301

XK201

XR405

10/50C233

0.01C236

XR252

XD453

39pCH

C255

∗1Q251

XR580

1000/25C411

680R253

1

NCF21CZ-105X

C40

3

390R254

47/25C333

15QQL244K-150Z

L261

470R251

1

NCF21CZ-105X

C40

2

XY203

∗2Q252

15pCH

C263

∗1Q262

1kR265

0R210

TC4066BP/N/VARI/FIX SWIC381

GND

Vcc

680

R25

5

LA4485IC401

470R263

22kR385

∗1Q453

.47/50C215

22kR386

1kR217

XC454

∗1Q212

1.8kR216180p

CH

C214100pCH

C212

47p CHC213

1.5kR215

4.7

QQL244K-4R7Z

L211

XC201

180R214

15kR211

0.01C245

1kR213

10/25

N

BP

C211

33kR212

2.2kR218

10/50C235

100R236

1kR234

100R231

100R235

0R223

2.7kR23322k

R230

47kR229

∗1Q218

∗2Q219

XQ451

1kR232

XY382

0.01

C53

8

0.01C539

2.2/

50

N

BP

C34

5

2.2/

50

N

BP

C34

4

0.01C226

XC254

XC253

XC261

XC262

BWL251

47/50C251

BWL201

XC203

XC204

0.01C252

XC455

XC209

XC208

0R

906

XEF202

XEF201

XR264

0.01C223

18kR459

XR461

XR457

33kR458

XR460

XR249

820R241

XJ504

QNN0349-001J502

0.01C239

12kR2398.2k

R238

10/50C232

10/50C231

100R258

100R261

∗1Q253

∗1Q261

2.2kR259

2.2kR262

BWL242BWL244BWL243

XR901

XR248

100R247

XR246

XR245

XR902

XR904

XR903

XQ901

100R202

.47/50

N

BP C505

XR451

2.2/50C084

XR453

XC451

XR454

XD451

XR452

0R574

1/50C343

4.7/50

N

BPC082

∗1Q509

100

R571

2.7kR573X

R572

100/16C331

3.3/50QBTC1CK-335Z

C089

0.1

B2

C33

7

6.8kR082

XC452

XR455

XR456

0.1B2

C081

2.2/

50C

338

220R391

22kR387

1/50

C09

2

0.1B2

C088

33k

R08

6

15k

0.5%

R08

7

220R392

∗8SWITCH

Q387

QNN0348-001J503

1/50

C09

3

220R396

220R395

22kR384

.47/50C391

∗8SWITCH

Q385∗8

SWITCH

Q384∗8

SWITCH

Q386

.47/50C392

1/50

NBP

C08

3

82kR393

82kR394

XD452

0.1B2

C087

XQ452

4.7/

50C

094

1/50

C09

5

3.3k

R08

5

0.01C265

XC267

.47/50

N

BPC264

X

N

C266

10/5

0

QBTC1CK-106Z

C09

1

XC

341

0.00

22C

336

0.02

7B

2C

334

0.047B2

C085

∗4D391

1.5k 0.5%R088

5.6k

R08

9

15kR083

1kR

081

10kR371

10kR372

10kR373

4.7kR378

6.8kR381

4.7kR377

XC374 33k

R375

33kR376

10kR374

BA15218NIC371

1/50

C09

0

∗5SWITCH

Q381

22kR382

47/25C373

1/50N BP

C372

68kR084

.47/

50C

086

100

R33

1

∗5SWITCH

Q382

CONTROLMTS &UPC1851BCU

TONE/VOL

IC001

NJM2150ADIC151

1/50

N

BPC151

100

R33

4

1/50

N

BPC152

22kR151

22kR152

22kR154

22kR153

0.0033C153

0.033

B2C155

0.033B2

C1560.0033

C154

10/5

0C

158

47/25C159

0.1B2

C160

XR15

6

XR15

8

0R155

0R157

10kR159

10/50C157

100

R33

2

∗4D392

100

R33

3

XC

342

0.00

22C

339

0.1

B2

C34

0

1/50

N

BP

C371

0.01C332

2.2/

50C

335

BSRT

V_CCD

C1

Y1

AVSWGND

V1

AVSWGND

LV1

RV1

AVSWGND

S_1

9V_VC

S2_1

S2_2

AVSWGND

Y_C

OM

P

Y2

AVSWGND

VA

RI/F

IX

V2

VIDEO2

LV2

RV2

C2

S_2

V2

SOA

MPX

VOL_ATT

BBE

RV

2

LV2

RV

3

LV3

AVSWGND

VIDEO3

V3

Y3

C3

BS

RT

S_3

9V_VC

Y2

C2

YIN1

S2_2

S_2

V1

RV1

C1

Y1

S_1

LV1

Y_COMP

C_2L

IIC

SDASCL

SD

A

RTVLTV

SC

L

LV3

YOUT

COUT

Y_2L

VTV

9V_VC

S_3

AV

SW

GN

D

AV

SW

GN

D

RV

3

A_G

ND

5VA

AV

SW

GN

DC

3

R

12V

CIN1

A_V

CC

YIN

1

L

FSC

V3

Y3 9V

_SW

C_2L

AV

SW

GN

D

VT

V

BB

E

YO

UT

CO

UT

SC

L

Y_2L

SD

A

RT

V

9V_V

C

5VA

S2_1

LTV

A_G

ND

V_C

CD

FS

C

VOUT1

CIN

1

VO

UT

1

A_M

UT

E

SO

A

A_MUTE

MP

X

A_V

CC

VO

L_AT

T

A_G

ND R

A_G

ND L

VARI_R

VARI_L

V1

LV1

Y1

RV

1

C1

S2-

1

S-1V2

LV2

Y2

S2-2

S-2

RV

2

C2

V3

LV3

Y3

RV3

C3

BSRT

S-3

LV4

V4

RV4

AD

R

SC

L

SD

A

DC

OU

T

CO

UT

2

LOU

T2

YO

UT

2

RO

UT

2

VO

UT

2

Vcc

MU

TE

YIN

1

BIAS

CIN1

LOUT1

YOUT1

ROUT1

VOUT1

TRAP

GND

COUT1

LTV

TV

RTV

VREFL

VREFH

Video1

Video4

VSS1

Video2

VDD1

SWITCH

SWITCH

(3.3k)

(L211)

(C402,C403)

VRB

VRT

ADIN

BIAS1

CLAMPC

1/2VDD

VDD2

(1.2k)

TEST

KILLER

VARI OUT

(1k)

YOUT

BIAS2

COUT

BIAS3

R

VFIL

CKIN

(L202,L301)

PIROT DET

VSS2

CBPF

VENH0

VENH1

1LINE

CORING

VDD3

VSS3

VREFV

VSS4

VDD4

L202

V

L

L

R

R

L

R

0V 0V0V 0V

0V

0V0V0V0V

LRR L

L_G

ND

L_G

ND

PHASE

(2Vp-p)

(∗1)

L

R_G

ND

R_G

ND

A_V

CC

A_V

CC

A_V

CC

_GN

DA

_VC

C_G

ND

VO

LAT

T

SO

A

BB

E

LTV

A_M

UT

E

9V_S

W

9V_V

C

MP

X

BB

E

9VG

ND

12V

12V

GN

D

SD

AS

CL

5VA

5VA

GN

D

VT

V

BS

CIN

1

YIN

1

YC

ING

ND

VO

UT

1GN

D

VO

UT

1

9V_S

W

9V_S

WG

ND

RB

SA

BS

GN

DY

_CO

MP

VB

SG

ND

VB

S

V_C

CD

9V_V

C

SS

W

CO

UT

AS

WY

OU

T

FS

C

LV3

V3G

ND

RV

3

S_3 C3

V3G

ND Y3

V3

V3G

ND

M_M

UT

E

(V_P

IP)

9VG

ND

ON

_OF

F

RT

V

GN

D

DET

VC

C

SDASCL

FIXEDLINE OUT

EXT1 IN INEXT2 TV OUTOUT

TONE/SURROUND VARIABLELINE

IIC BUS

VRE

Vcc

L_B

OO

ST

H_B

OO

ST

LPF

_LLP

F_R

1/2Vcc

CR

2_L

VARI/FIX

CR

_R

SAP DEMODULATION dbx NR

MOA

BP

F_L

BP

F_R

CR

1_L

L

R

CR

1_R

HP

F_L

BBE IC

HP

F_R

L_IN

PU

TR

_IN

PU

T

VR

EF

FOL

(1/2)

(2/2)

FOR EL1

L_O

UT

PU

T PD1 PD2 d01PH

D1

PH

D2

COM SDT NDT SOT SI1 SOA STI SRB ITI WTI WRB do2 VOF

R_O

UT

PU

T

9V

ER1 EL2 ER2 TVL TVR LBC LTC TLO RBC RTC TRO SUR LOT ROT D-GND

A-GND

0V0V 0V

0V

0V

0V

0V/4.8V

/0V7.2V

0V/9V

7.2V/0V

9V

4.4V

4.4V4.4V

4.4V4.4V

4.4V

0V

0V

2.1Vp-p(H)

EQ509

15

1.0Vp-p(H)

IC501 1.9Vp-p(H)

2.1Vp-p(H)

IC501

IC501

45

43

1.0Vp-p(H)

17

0.64Vp-p(H)

19 40

2.2Vp-p(H)

IC501

Page 90: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

2-18No.51907B 2-17

AV SELECTOR PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]

AV-36F802 AV-36F802

No.51907B

CXA2089Q-XIC501

QNZ0454-001

J501

QGB1505K1-35CN002

220kR534

XQ263

xC531

XR270

XR269

0R528

0R529

XD522

33kR518

75R519

75R520

75R521

0.01C509

.47/50

C508

XLC501

XLC502

220kR522

220kR523

1/50C512

1/50C513

.47/50C511

0R558

0R559

0R560

0R561

XD523

XR524

XR525

XR526

XC206

75R527

XC515

XC514 XLC503

XLC504

220kR532

220kR533

1/50C520

1/50C521

.47/50

C517

XR562

XR563

0R564

0R565

BA15218NIC371

Y152

BWY401

IC201

XR242

XC237

220kR535

1/50C522

1/50C523

xC532

0.01C533

100/16C401

XR403

XD403

0.01C534

XC408

1/50C412

1000/25C407

XR404XD

402

XC409

R

0.001C309

XC307

L

L

R

0

NRSA63J-0R0X

C312

0R306

0R305

0.001C310

0

NRSA63J-0R0X

C3111/50C413 220

R303

2.2kR302

56k

R09

0

∗5Q301

220R304

XC

536

QGB1505K1-25CN001

XD

512

∗4D

511

∗4D

508

XD

510

∗4D

509

∗4D

505

∗4D

504

∗4D

503

∗4D

502

∗4D

501

1kR

501

1kR

502

220

R50

3

1kR

504

1kR

505

XR

506

XD

506

∗4D

507

XD513

XD514

∗4D515

∗4D516

∗4D517

∗4D518

∗4D519

XD520

∗4D521

1kR507

1kR508

220R509

∗4D527

∗4D528

XR406

1kR

5111k

R51

0

XR243

XR244XC238

XC234

330R566

330R567

47/25C504

XC

537

Y151

22/50C503

XR513

XR512

0.01C501

0.01C502

XQ211

XC205

XC246

0R568

XY201

∗5Q454

XC242

XC243

XC249

22k

R402

∗5Q302

XC244

XC247

XC248

XC241

1000/25C410

18kR401

XC453

0.22TFC404

XQ455

XL202

XY202

XL241

XC308

2.2kR301

XK201

XR405

XC233

XC236

XR252

XD453

XC255

XQ251

XR580

1000/25C411

XR253

1

NCF21CZ-105X

C40

3

XR254

47/25C333

XL261

XR251

1

NCF21CZ-105X

C40

2

XY203

XQ252

XC263

XQ262

XR265

X

R210

TC4066BP/N/VARI/FIX SW

IC381

GND

Vcc

XR25

5

LA4485IC401

XR263

22kR385

∗1Q453

XC215

22kR386

XR217

XC454

XQ212

XR216X

C214XC212

XC213

XR215

XL211

XC201

XR214

XR211

XC245

XR213

X

N

C211

XR212

XR218

XC235

XR236

XR234

XR231

XR235

XR223

XR233X

R230

XR229

XQ218

XQ219

XQ451

XR232

2.2/

50

N

BP

C34

5

2.2/

50

N

BP

C34

4

0.01

C53

9

0.01

C53

8

XC226

XC254

XC253

XC261

XC262

XL251

XC251

XL201

XC203

XC204

XC252

XC455

XC209

XC208

0R906

XEF202

XEF201

XR264

XC223

18kR459

XR461

XR457

33kR458

XR460

XR249

XR241

QNN0348-001J504

QNN0349-001J502

XC239

XR239

XR238

XC232

XC231

XR258

XR261

XQ253

XQ261

XR259

XR262

XL242

XL244

XL243

100R901

XR248

XR247

XR246

XR245

XR902

XR904

XR903

XQ901

100R202

.47/50

N

BPC505

XR451

2.2/50C084

XR453

XC451

XR454

XD451

XR452

XR574

1/50C343

4.7/50

N

BPC082

∗1Q509

100

R571

2.7kR573X

R572

100/16C331

3.3/16TAN

C089

0.1

B2

C33

7

6.8kR082

XC452

XR455

XR456

0.1B2

C081

2.2/

50C

338

220R391

22kR387

1/50

C09

2

0.1B2

C088

33k

R08

6

15k

1%

NRVA02D-153X

R08

7

220R392

∗8

SWITCH

Q387

QNN0348-001J503

1/50

C09

3

220R396

220R395

22kR384

.47/50C391

∗8

SWITCH

Q385 ∗8

SWITCH

Q384∗8

SWITCH

Q386

.47/50

C392

1/50

NBP

C08

3

82kR393

82kR394

XD452

0.1B2

C087

XQ452

4.7/

50C

094

1/50

C09

5

3.3k

R08

5

XC265

XC267

X

N

C264

X

N

C266

10/1

6TA

N

C09

1

OP

TC

341

0.00

22C

336

0.02

7B

2C

334

0.047B2

C085

∗4D391

1.5k1% NRVA02D-152X

R088

5.6k

R08

9

15kR083

1kR

081

10kR371

10kR372

10kR373

4.7kR378

6.8kR381

4.7kR377

OPTC374 33k

R375

33kR376

10kR374

BA15218NAMP

IC371

1/50

C09

0

∗5SWITCH

Q381

22kR382

47/25C373

1/50

N

BPC372

68kR084

.47/

50C

086

100

R33

1

∗5SWITCH

Q382

CONTROLMTS &UPC1851BCU

TONE/VOL

IC001

NJM2150ADIC151

1/50

N

BPC151

100

R33

4

1/50

N

BPC152

22kR151

22kR152

22kR154

22kR153

0.0033C153

0.033

B2C155

0.033B2

C1560.0033

C154

10/5

0C

158

47/25C159

0.1B2

C160

OP

TR

156

OP

TR

158

0R155

0R157

10kR159

10/50

C157

100

R33

2

∗4D392

100

R33

3

OP

TC

342

0.00

22C

339

0.1

B2

C34

0

1/50

N

BPC371

0.01C332

2.2/

50C

335

BSRT

V_CCD

C1

Y1

AVSWGND

V1

AVSWGND

LV1

RV1

AVSWGND

S_1

9V_VC

S2_1

S2_2

AVSWGND

Y_COMP

Y2

AVSWGND

VA

RI/F

IX

V2

VIDEO4

LV2

RV2

C2

S_2

V2

SOA

MPX

VOL_ATT

BBE

AVSWGND

RV

2

LV2

RV

3

LV3

AVSWGND

VIDEO3

V3

Y3

C3

BS

RT

S_3

9V_VC

Y2

C2

YIN1

S2_2

S_2

V1

RV1

C1

Y1

S_1

LV1

Y_COMP

C_2L

IIC

SDASCL

SD

A

RTVLTV

SC

L

LV3

YOUT

COUT

Y_2L

VTV

9V_VC

S_3

AV

SW

GN

D

AV

SW

GN

D

RV

3

A_G

ND

5VA

AV

SW

GN

DC

3

R

12V

CIN1

A_V

CC

YIN

1

L

FSC

V3

Y3

9V_S

W

AV

SW

GN

D

VT

V

BB

E

YO

UT

CO

UT

SC

L

Y_2L

SD

A

C_2L

RT

V

9V_V

C

5VA

S2_1

LTV

A_G

ND

V_C

CD

FS

C

VOUT1

CIN

1

VO

UT

1

A_M

UT

E

SO

A

A_MUTE

MP

X

A_V

CC

VO

L_AT

T

A_G

ND R

A_G

ND L

VARI_R

VARI_L

V1

LV1

Y1

RV

1

C1

S2-

1

S-1V2

LV2

Y2

S2-2

S-2

RV

2

C2

V3

LV3

Y3

RV3

C3

BSRT

S-3

LV4

V4

RV4

AD

R

SC

L

SD

A

DC

OU

T

CO

UT

2

LOU

T2

YO

UT

2

RO

UT

2

VO

UT

2

Vcc

MU

TE

YIN

1

BIAS

CIN1

LOUT1

YOUT1

ROUT1

VOUT1

TRAP

GND

COUT1

LTV

TV

RTV

VREFL

VREFH

Video1

Video2

VSS1

Video4

VDD1

DIGITAL COMB FILTER

(3.3k)

(L211)

(C402,C403)

VRB

VRT

ADIN

BIAS1

CLAMPC

1/2VDD

VDD2

(1.2k)

TEST

KILLER

AUDIO OUT

(1k)

YOUT

BIAS2

COUT

BIAS3

R

VFIL

CKIN

PIROT DET

VSS2

CBPF

VENH0

VENH1

1LINE

CORING

VDD3

VSS3

VREF

VSS4

VDD4

IC371

L

R

LRR L

L_G

ND

L_G

ND

PHASE

2Vp-p

(∗1)

L

R_G

ND

R_G

ND

A_V

CC

A_V

CC

A_V

CC

_GN

DA

_VC

C_G

ND

VO

LAT

T

SO

A

BB

E

LTV

A_M

UT

E

9V_S

W

9V_V

C

MP

X

BB

E

9VG

ND

12V

12V

GN

D

SD

AS

CL

5VA

5VA

GN

D

VT

V

VA

RI/F

IX

CIN

1

YIN

1

YC

ING

ND

VO

UT

1GN

D

VO

UT

1

9V_S

W

9V_S

WG

ND

RB

SA

BS

GN

DY

_CO

MP

VB

SG

ND

V_P

IP

V_C

CD

9V_V

C

SS

W

CO

UT

AS

WY

OU

T

FS

C

LV3

V3G

ND

RV

3

S_3 C3

V3G

ND Y3

V3

V3G

ND

M_M

UT

E

9VG

ND

ON

_OF

F

RT

V

GN

D

DET

VC

C

SDASCL

FIXEDLINE OUT

EXT1 IN INEXT2 TV OUTOUT

TONE/SURROUND VARIABLELINE

IIC BUS

VRE

Vcc

L_B

OO

ST

H_B

OO

ST

LPF

_LLP

F_R

1/2Vcc

CR

2_L

VARI/FIX

CR

_R

SAP DEMODULATION dbx NR

MOA

BP

F_L

BP

F_R

CR

1_L

L

R

CR

1_R

HP

F_L

BBE IC

HP

F_R

L_IN

PU

T

NC

R_I

NP

UT

NC

VR

EF

FOL

(1/2)

(2/2)

FOR EL1

L_O

UT

PU

T PD1 PD2 d01PH

D1

PH

D2

COMSDT NDTSOTSI1 SOA STI SRB ITI WTI WRB do2 VOF

R_O

UT

PU

T

R187R188

9V

ER1 EL2 ER2 TVL TVR LBC LTC TLO RBC RTC TRO SUR LOT ROT D-GND

A-GND

0V

AUDIO OUT

INPUT2

INPUT4

(NOT USED)

INPUT1

MAIN PWB

AV SELECTOR PWB ASS'YSAC0S505A-M2

2.1Vp-p(H)

E

2.2Vp-p(H)

40

1.0Vp-p(H)

15

43

45

2.1Vp-p(H)

17 19

1.0Vp-p(H)

IC501

IC501

IC501

Q509

IC501

1.9Vp-p(H)

0.64Vp-p(H)

3836

2.1Vp-p(H) 2.1Vp-p(H)

9V

/0V

7.2V

/0V

7.2V

4.6V

4.6V

4.6V

4.4V

0V

0V/

9V

0V/

9V

4.4V

4.6V

4.6V

4.6V

0V/4.8V

/0V7.2V

0V/9V

7.2V/0V

9V

4.4V

4.4V4.4V

4.4V4.4V

4.4V

0V

0V 0V0V 0V

0V

0V0V0V0V

0V0V 0V

0V

0V

0V

2.6VV2.4

0VVV4.5

V4.5

V4.4

V4.4

V4.4

V4.4

V4.4

VVVVVVVVVV4.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.5

9V 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.4 4.7 0.2 3.2 4.5 0V4.42.74.44.15V1.24.5VVVVV

4.5 5VVVVVVV

4.5VVVVVV

4.4V

3.9V

4.4V

3.9V

4.7V 3.9V

3.9V

4.4V

4.4V

4.4V

4.2V

4.4V

4.3V

3.8V

4.4V

4.1V

4.4V

4.3V

4.4V

4.6V8.7V3.5V2.7V

2.5V

0V

4.3V

3.9V

4.3V

4.8V

0V

0V

4.4V

3.9V

4.4V

3.9V

4.8V

0V

4.4V

4.4V

4.4V

4.4V

4.4V

4.44.4 4.4 4.4 4.4VVVVV

4.4VV

4.40V

4.4V 4.4V4.4V8.7V8.7V

8.8V

4.4V

4.4

V

0V

4.4

V

8.8V

4.3V 3.7V

1.3V

1.3V 0.6V

21.1V2.1V

0V 10.1V

10.1V

0V0V

0V

0V

0V

7.8V

0.6V0V

: NRSA63J-0R0X

: DTC323TK-X: DTC124EKA-X: MTZJ10C-T2: 2SC2412K/QR/-X

: NON MOUNT

∗4

∗8∗5

∗1

X0

: BUS WIREBW

NOTE

Page 91: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2-19No.51907B

CRT SOCKET PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

2-20 No.51907B

: NRSA63J-0R0X

: 1SS133-T2: 2SA933AS/QR/-T: 2SC1740S/QR/-T

: NON MOUNT (OPEN)

∗3

∗1∗2

X0

: BUS WIRE (0Ω)BW

NOTE

XQ307

XQ310

150R301

1SS82-T2D304

18QQL244K-180Z

L301

47QQL244K-470Z

L3041k1/2WC

R325

∗3D301

5.6R145

0R316

XR319

XR322

15k2W

R310

5.6R146

18k2W

R313

2SC5083/L-P/-TQ302

Q305 XQ308

XQ311

150R302

1SS82-T2D305

18QQL244K-180Z

L302

47QQL244K-470Z

L3051k1/2WC

R326

∗3D302

1.2kR331

0R317

XR320

XR323

15k2W

R31118k2W

R314

10R308 150

R305

560pCH

C302

2SC5083/L-P/-TQ303

TP-E1

XQ309

XQ312

150R303

1.2kR332

1SS82-T2D306

18

QQL244K-180Z

L303

47QQL244K-470Z

L3061k1/2WC

R327

∗3D303

0R318

XR321

1.2kR333

XC331

Q304

XR324

15k2W

R31218k2W

R315

XC332

10R309

XC333

∗3D101

10R307 150

R304

XD102

150R306

470/16NC323

560pCH

C303

R

560pCH

C301

∗3D331

390R335

2SC5248/DE/Q108

1/250C321

XL106

1/250C322Q306

1M1/2WC

R361

BWR364

470k 1/2WCR363

1k1/2WC

R362

0.001 3KVQCZ0324-102

C363

BWC362

1/250C361

RM2C-LFA1D361

2SA1964/DE/Q107

CE41507-001PCN0E2

1.5kR334

TP-B

10/50C101

∗1Q109

R

G

B

120kR142

33kR136

WJA0029-002ACN005

1.5kR134

680R139

∗2Q103

XR141

0CH

C125

XMY

C107

XR144

XQ110

XD107

XR138

XC108

XR137

Ys

XQ104

XR110

3.3kR111

XR112

X

R113CE41492-001Z

K103

∗1Q105

∗2Q106

101/4W

QRJ146J-100X

! R114

CE41492-001ZK102

100/16

N

C109

47R115

47R116

G

CH41169-003YCN00V

B

B

G

R

220pCH

C111

220pCH

C110

5pCH

C122

XCH

C1270.0047

500V

C115

0.0047C114

TP-G

56kR127

5.6R129

1.2kR128

39R130

120R131

100/10C119

330/10N

C120

RH1S-T3D106

10/160C117

CE41492-001ZK105

CE41492-001ZK104 3902WA OMR

R132

150p5%500V

QCS32HJ-151Z

C121

100/6.3C118

10/160C113

39R124

5.6R125

1.2kR123

RH1S-T3D105

56kR126

680R143

Y

XR109

560QRZ9021-561

! R122

XR199

0R336

2SC5083/L-P/-TQ301

0R337

0R338

XD313

CE42670-001

!SK001

∗1Q151

∗2Q152

47kR151

68kR152

68kR153

47kR154

0.1NCB21EK-104X

C1510.1

NCB21EK-104X

C1521k

R117

CN0SC

CN0E4

XD312

XD314

1kR352

1kR351

1kR353

560R354

∗2Q351

∗3D351

56kR355

330/16C351

0R108

XR041

XR040

XY003

XY

001

BW

Y00

2

XR118

120R119

QJB003-074426

CN004

12V

VM DRIVE

HV

NC

CRT SOCKET PWB ASS'Y

B

G

R

HEATER

GND

G1

G2

G3

SPOT

VM STOPVM DRIVE

KILLA

VM AMP

VM COIL

HEATER

NC

(TO CRT NECK)

VM OUT

VM OUT

11.4V

NC

MAIN PWB

CRT

CRTEARTH

1W_FR

SAC-3513A-M2

MAIN PWB

R DRIVEG DRIVE

FOCUS

CRT SOCKET

FBT

MAIN PWB

HB

SCREEN

Y_VM

Ys

G

12V

R

GND

B

B DRIVE

V

2SC5147/CDE/F43

B1(135V)

GND

HB

159V

2SC5147/CDE/F43

2SC5147

SCREEN

/CDE/F43

A90AJZ90X02

500V

1.8V

2.4V

12V

6.5V

11.3V

2.7V

0V

3.3V

0V

1.8V

6.5V

1.1V

6.5V

6.5V

5.8V

5.8V

12V112V

58V

3V

58V

11.9V

160V

1.6V

160V

160V

V201

161V

11.9V

2.2V

1.7V

11.4V

166V

167V

201

166

V

V

166V

1.3V11.9

V

2.4V

1.9V

11.4V

158V

1.6V

158V

158

201V

V

Page 92: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

2-22No.51907B 2-21

DAF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No.51907B

180k1/2WR765

180k1/2WR764

180k1/2WR763

180k1/2WR762

180k1/2WR761

ES1F-LFG2D761

ES1F-LFG2D762

QFZ0122-682C761

QFZ0122-103C753

4.7kR757

12kR756

10kR754

1.2kR753

10kQRZ0056-103Z

R70312k1/2W

R702

22QRG01GJ-220

R701

47kR751

8.2kR752 56k

R755

XY701

∗1Q751

NZZ000000000427CN00Q

∗1Q752

NZZ000000000428CN00K

2SC4632Q753

0.033MY,5%

C751

QQLZ028-272L701

.1/50QFV71HJ-104Z

C701

47/25C752

QQR1153-001T701

120kR758

22k

3WOMRQRL039J-223

R771

MTZJ33A-T2D771

10/50C771

NZZ000000000429CN0CP

CE41507-001P

CNDAF

B1

B1NC

GND

V_Amp

H_Pulse

GND

DAF_Out

C_Pluse

NC

NC

AMP

DAF TRANSF.

BUFFERAMP

MAINPWB

MAINPWB

DAF PWB ASS'YSAC-2605A-M2

: 2SC3311A/QR/-T: NON MOUNT (OPEN)

∗1X

: BUS WIRE (0Ω)BW

NOTE

Page 93: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2-23No.51907B

LF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

2-24 No.51907B

LF PWB ASS'YSAC-9506A-M2

MAIN PWB

CN00P

!

CN0E3

OPTY901

OPTC905

AC125VQCZ9052-102

! C904

2.7MR1/2

QRZ9041-275

! R998

0.047AC275V

QFZ9040-473

MF

QFZ9067-473

! C902

0.1AC275V

QFZ9040-104

MFQFZ9067-104

! C903

0.1AC275V

MF

QFZ9067-104

! C901

QQR0527-004!

LINE FILTER

LF901

ERZV10V621CS! VA901

5.6 1/2WQRE121J-5R6Y

R997

PW

CN0PW

120 R1/2R999

5A

QMF0007-5R0J1

!

FUSEF901

QQR1159-001

!

LINE FILTER

LF902

XCN0E1

AC120V 60HzPOWER CORD

GMP14CO-200J3

or

or

Page 94: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

2-26No.51907B 2-25

AV-36F702 AV-36F702

No.51907B

PATTERN DIAGRAMSMAIN PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM [AV-36F702]

A

A

B

B

C

C

D

D

E

E

F

F

G

G

H

H

I

I

JKLM

0

11

22

33

44

55

66

77

88

99 1

0

4

B

ISOLATED

TUNER

COMPONENT

60

/DEF

35

MJ

K

L

3 12 2 4

1

5

6

3

2

5

6

3

1

125V

5A

H.OUT

3 1

1

4

6

7

8

3DY/C

16 5

IN

OUT

C

E56

45

32

4 1

29

28

35 40

20

4

B

16

5

7

MICOM

1

30

25

20

15

10

5

1

GNDHB

HEATER

GND

E+14

E-14

HPB1 COL

ABL

23

4

5

7

8

9

10

6

BT

NC

IF

5V

NC

SDA

SCL

ADRS

AGC

TU

LIVE

81

38

1

IF/VIDEO/CHROMA

17 5

15

E

3

11

5 1

1

916

10 5

PIP

33

40 64

1520

30

50

35

DETOUTVOL

FBT OUT

LOCK

B

E

POWER

1

57

B

C

E

1

DAF

15

GND

5

6

9

5

1

5

10

13

2

34

1

V.OUT

17

8

14

RED

15

1

4

5

1

WHT

1

MARK

BRN

15

1

50

14

58

NOZAKI01.02.23

123

4 5

Group No.

CKF1457-

-1

OUT

C

IN

3 2

C002

C003

C004

C012

C013

C015

C021

C023

C025C026

C028

C029C030

C032

W102

C035

C036

C038

C042C043

C116

C132C134

C135

C150

W103

W477

W478

C284

W14

C034

L101

C354

C391

C404C410

C411

C517

C521

C525

C528

C542

C543

C601C602

C603

C604

C608

W108

W109

C664

C701

C703

C707

C711

C712C713C714 C715

C802

C84

C805

C813

C851

C853

C854

C857

C907

C913

C918

C727

C922

C931

C932

C933

W510

C939

C940

C941

C942

W511

R858

W480

R857

W481

W574

C973

C999

CF001

CF021

CF041

S

W112

CN006

CN007

CP934

D11

W482C048

W113

W114

W564

W116

W117

D352

D401

W483

D415

D431

D432

D507

D521

D525

D526D529

D531

D532D810

D542

D543

D601

D602

W515

W516

C951

W565

D700

D705

D706

D707

D708

D709D710

D711

D712

D714

D800

D811

M

W578

D910

D911

D912

D913D917

D918

W566

D930

D933

D935

HS007

D937

R939

D941

W584

W517

DAF

D952

D953

D9 54

D955

D956

D957

D958

D972

D973

F905

FR521

FR525

FR526

IC101

IC151

IC401

IC601

IC651

IC701

IC702

IC851

IC853

W520

K401

K914K916

K917

W488

K931

K932

K933

K935

L012

L013

L022

L024

W120

L026

L041

L512

L513

L521

L810

L933

L934

W585

IC501

PC921

Q001

Q002

Q011

Q022

Q131

Q132

A

Q233

W125

W129

W130

Q551

Q352

Q353

Q431

Q700

Q701Q702

Q703Q704

R588

MPX

R581 R582

Q941

R587

R589

Q951

Q971

R590

R001

R004

R005

R008

R011

R012R013

R014

R015

R016

R017

R021

R024

R025 26

R0 R027

R028

R029

R030

R031

R032

R03335R0R038

R043

R045

R101

R12

R111

R131R134

R135 R137

R138

R139

W132

R156

W135

Q711

R201

R231

A

R612 11R6

R237

R238

R610

RY941

C724

R243

R285

W137

W138

W139

W140

W141

W142

C725

C432

W150

W151

R592

R354R355

R358

R359

R401

R403

R404

R405

R411R412

R417

R432

R433

R503

R511

R513

R522

R526

R527

R528

R531

37R5

R538

R543

R544

R546

R548

R552

R553

R571

R572

R601

R602R603R65

R66

R608 W556

R594

R407

R653

W155

R700

R707

R708

R709

R710

R711

R712

R714

R728

R730

R753

R755

R756

R799

R769R770

R773

W157

W158

R777

R778

R780

R787

R793R794R795

R796

R797

R801R802R803R804

R812

R813

R815

C552

C553

R911

R915

R916

W557

W586

M

W587W590

W591

R935C723

R940

R944

W592

W593

W594W595

R953

W596

W612

R807

R972

R973

R978

SF011

T501

TH901

X201

X700

W541

Y150

Y151

R817

Y651

Y701

Y703

D723

Y800

Y902

N

Y905

HV

SS

S1

C816 IC703

Q511

W161

RY951

C

CP

CN005

HS003

MD1

W162

W163

T502

W164

W165

W167

W168

W169

W170

W171

W172

W522

W176

W523

W554

W191

W192

D724

K941

W200

W201

R293

W205

W210

W211

W213

W215

J601

W218

W220

W221

W222

J602

W229

W230

W497

W233

W234

Q707

G

W238

D855

CN

4

W240

W241

W243

W244

W245

W247

W249

W251

W253

W254

W255

W256

W259

W261

W263

W264

W265

W268

W270

W272

N

W277

W278

W280

C663

W282

W283

W284

W286

R779

W291

W457

J810

W295

W296

W543

W298

W299

W507

W301W302

W303

W305

W306

W307

W524

W309

W312

W314

L

UL MARK

Q

K

CN009

HS002

HS005

C728

W324

W327

W330

W331

W3 32

W335

W570

W337

W339

L

W346

W500

W352

C522 W353

W354

W356

W360

W361

D721

W368

W544

W525

W376

W385

H

W392

W393

W394

W501

W545

W398

W399

W404

W408

W409

W413

W414

W417

W418

W421

W422

W423

W424

C399

W526

C136

W430

W433

R291

R292

HS004

W435

W441

W442W443

W447

Q

W454W455

Q706

Q

Y712

Y654

Y714

E1

Y154Y155

W471

W472

W547

W476

R776

H

B

W504

D722

B

R823

R930

W536

G

W549

R047

C005

C006

L001

W550

W551

C612

L1

Y914

Y910

Y912

W553

C403

R409

W558

R440

R441

C925

C949

Y713

W559

D716

C396

C397C398

C

R

R

K939

W599

W600

W601

R613

R614

R615

R141

R040

K940

W609W611

Y916

Y917

S

35

30

25

20

20

2530

35

15

10

5

1510

5

2

1

2

125

AV

SW

20

15

10

512

RE

GU

LATOR

INO

UT

C

EB

SID

EP

IN

BC

E

13

12

C

BE

12

48

91011

1213

1416 3

57

1518

17

5

4

3

2

1

E

B

6

12

3

12

32

1

BR

NR

ED

WH

T

C001

C011

C014

C016

C022

C024C

027

C031

C0

33

C037

C041

C044

C045

C046

C111

C112

C113

C114

C115

C131

C133

C201

C202

C2

3

C233

C234

W537

C237

C281

C282

C283

C285

C286

C2

87

C288

W106

C352

C353

C392

C393

C394

C395

C41

C405

C407

C415

C421

C431

C501

C502

C503

C505

C507

R860

C515

C516

C523

C524

C526

C527

C531

C533

C605

C606

C607

C609

C610

C611

R318

W110

W1

11

C667

C700

C7

2

C704

C705C

706

C7

8C7

9C7

10

C800

C801

C803

C806

C807

C810

C811

C812

C814

C815

C852

W572

C856

C904

C905

C908

C948

C912

C914

Q531

C916

C917

C919

C934

C935

C937

C938

C943

R856

Y156

C955

W575

C971

C972

CN

001C

N002

CN

003

DE

G

CP

932

D812

D001

D102 D

305

6 D3

D307

W539

W576

D523

D524

D527

D534

D535

R009

D603

D604

D605

D606

W512

W577

W514

D701

D702

D7 3

D704

D713

D801

W579

W580

D901

D914

D915

D920

W581 D

38 9 D

3

D310

D931

D945

W485

W486

W487

D715

Y909

IC911

W519

CL004

D402

K912

K937

K938

L011

L021

L023

L027

L042

C047

L232

L511

L700

L931

L937

LC601

LC602

LC603

LC604

LC605

LC606

Q0

21

Q023

Q024

Q041

Q133

W122

W123

Q153

Q154

Q232

W124

W489

W127

W128

Q501

Q532

Q541

Q542

Q543

Q651

Q705 Q

810

Q552

R583

R584

R585

R586

R002

R0

3

R006

R007

R020

R022

R023

R034

R036

R0

37

R041

R042

R0

44

R132

R133

R136

W131

W133

W134

R155

W4

90

W491

R241

R2

81

R282

R283

R284

R286

R287

R2

88

R289

R301

R302

R303

R304

R3

5

R306

W459

R909

W145

W146

W540

R591

R593

R356

R357

60R

3

W492

R414

W493

R431

R434

R435

R501

R502

R507

R512

W153

R523

R529

R532

R533

R5

34

R535

R536

R545

R547

R549

R550

R551

R570

R573

R604

R607

R69

R595

C7

22

R651

R6

52

R654

W154

R701

R702

R703

R704

R705

R706

R713

R715

R716

R717

R718

R719

R7

20

R721

R722

R723

R724

R7

25R

726R

727

R729

R731

R732

R733

R734

R735

R736

R737

R738

R739

R740

R741

R742

R743

R744

R745

R746

R747

R748

R749

R750

R751

R752

R754 R

757R

758

R824

W527

R762

R763

R764

R765

R766R

767R

768

W156

R772

R7

74

W159

R781

R782

R783

R784

R785

R786

R788

R789

R790

R791

R792

R800

R810

R811

R814

R816

C551

SN

R912

R913

R914

R917

R918

R919

W160

R924

Y904

W528

R943

D537

R046

R951

R952

R290

W494

R975

R977

R110

W495

TU

001

Y152

Y153

Y401

Y6

52

Y653

Y700

Y702

Y74Y705

Y903

A

IC852

T951

IC921

R901

T921

W173

W175

W177

W180

W182

W183

W184

W185

W187

W188

W496

W193

W194

W195

W197

R798

W202

W567

W206

W207

W208

W209

W212

W214

W223

W224

W225

W568

W569

W231

W242

W246

W542

W250

W252

W258

W260

W498

W267

W2

69

W271

W273

W274

C152

R827

Q025

W292

W304

W310

W449

W3

11

W313

W318

CP

933

W320

C151

W325

R408

Y157

W456

W334

W340

W341

W342

W345

W349

W350

W351

W355

W358

W359

HS

006

W365

W366

W534

W371

W375

W377

W450

W381

CL002

W391

W474

W451

R039

W403

W407

W415

W416

W419

R140

W428

W429

W434

R319

W436

W437

W438

W440

W448

W460

W462

W464

C302

W467

W473

W475

W546

CN

008

75R

7

D353

W5

3

C726

W508

R018

R019

R821

R822

C721

R826

R825

R859

W535

48 W5

R0

48

CP

936

Y911

Y913

Q440

L940

R806

1 LC

Y002

Y003

W561

W562

W563

W604

R818

C4

2

W610

P

D010

C

E

C

B

C504

C510

C513

C51

4

C906

D501

D502

FR523

FR524

K920

R504R505

R525

C998

R941

CL003

FRONT

( ) TP-E1

( )

TP-91B (B1) CAUTION: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATED FUSE (S) ANDROHM'S MFR'S TYPE CP(S).

F

Page 95: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F802 AV-36F802

2-27No.51907B

MAIN PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]

2-28 No.51907B

A

A

B

B

C

C

D

D

E

E

F

F

G

G

H

H

I

I

JKLM

0

11

22

33

44

55

66

77

88

99 1

0

4

B

ISOLATED

TUNER

COMPONENT

60

/DEF

35

MJ

K

L

3 12 2 4

1

5

6

3

2

5

6

3

1

125V

5A

H.OUT

3 1

1

4

6

7

8

3DY/C

16 5

IN

OUT

C

E56

45

32

4 1

29

28

35 40

20

4

B

16

5

7

MICOM

1

30

25

20

15

10

5

1

GNDHB

HEATER

GND

E+14

E-14

HPB1 COL

ABL

23

4

5

7

8

9

10

6

BT

NC

IF

5V

NC

SDA

SCL

ADRS

AGC

TU

LIVE

81

38

1

IF/VIDEO/CHROMA

17 5

15

E

3

11

5 1

1

916

10 5

PIP

33

40 64

1520

30

50

35

DETOUTVOL

FBT OUT

LOCK

B

E

POWER

1

57

B

C

E

1

DAF

15

GND

5

6

9

5

1

5

10

13

2

34

1

V.OUT

17

8

14

RED

15

1

4

5

1

WHT

1

MARK

BRN

15

1

50

14

58

123

4 5

OUT

C

IN

3 2

CKF1457-CU2-1

01.07.04WATO

14

C002

C003

C004

C012

C013

C015

C021

C023

C025C026

C028

C029C030

C032

W102

C035

C036

C038

C042C043

C116

C132C134

C135

C150

W103

W477

W478

C284

W14

C034

L101

C354

C391

C404C410

C411

C517

C521

C525

C528

C542

C543

C601C602

C603

C604

C608

W108

W109

C664

C701

C703

C707

C711

C712C713C714 C715

C802

C84

C805

C813

C851

C853

C854

C857

C907

C913

C918

C727

C922

C931

C932

C933

W510

C939

C940

C941

C942

W511

R858

W480

R857

W481

W574

C973

C999

CF001

CF021

CF041

S

W112

CN006

CN007

CP934

D11

W482C048

W113

W114

W564

W116

W117

D352

D401

W483

D415

D431

D432

D507

D521

D525

D526D529

D531

D532D810

D542

D543

D601

D602

W515

W516

C951

W565

D700

D705

D706

D707

D708

D709D710

D711

D712

D714

D800

D811

M

W578

D910

D911

D912

D913D917

D918

W566

D930

D933

D935

HS007

D937

R939

D941

W584

W517

DAF

D952

D953

D9 54

D955

D956

D957

D958

D972

D973

F905

FR521

FR525

FR526

IC101

IC151

IC401

IC601

IC651

IC701

IC702

IC851

IC853

W520

K401

K914K916

K917

W488

K931

K932

K933

K935

L012

L013

L022

L024

W120

L026

L041

L512

L513

L521

L810

L933

L934

W585

IC501

PC921

Q001

Q002

Q011

Q022

Q131

Q132

A

Q233

W125

W129

W130

Q551

Q352

Q353

Q431

Q700

Q701Q702

Q703Q704

R588

MPX

R581 R582

Q941

R587

R589

Q951

Q971

R590

R001

R004

R005

R008

R011

R012R013

R014

R015

R016

R017

R021

R024

R025 26

R0 R027

R028

R029

R030

R031

R032

R03335R0R038

R043

R045

R101

R12

R111

R131R134

R135 R137

R138

R139

W132

R156

W135

Q711

R201

R231

A

R612 11R6

R237

R238

R610

RY941

C724

R243

R285

W137

W138

W139

W140

W141

W142

C725

C432

W150

W151

R592

R354R355

R358

R359

R401

R403

R404

R405

R411R412

R417

R432

R433

R503

R511

R513

R522

R526

R527

R528

R531

37R5

R538

R543

R544

R546

R548

R552

R553

R571

R572

R601

R602R603R65

R66

R608 W556

R594

R407

R653

W155

R700

R707

R708

R709

R710

R711

R712

R714

R728

R730

R753

R755

R756

R799

R769R770

R773

W157

W158

R777

R778

R780

R787

R793R794R795

R796

R797

R801R802R803R804

R812

R813

R815

C552

C553

R911

R915

R916

W557

W586

M

W587W590

W591

R935C723

R940

R944

W592

W593

W594W595

R953

W596

W612

R807

R972

R973

R978

SF011

T501

TH901

X201

X700

W541

Y150

Y151

R817

Y651

Y701

Y703

D723

Y800

Y902

N

Y905

HV

SS

S1

C816 IC703

Q511

W161

RY951

C

CP

CN005

HS003

MD1

W162

W163

T502

W164

W165

W167

W168

W169

W170

W171

W172

W522

W176

W523

W554

W191

W192

D724

K941

W200

W201

R293

W205

W210

W211

W213

W215

J601

W218

W220

W221

W222

J602

W229

W230

W497

W233

W234

Q707

G

W238

D855

CN

4

W240

W241

W243

W244

W245

W247

W249

W251

W253

W254

W255

W256

W259

W261

W263

W264

W265

W268

W270

W272

N

W277

W278

W280

C663

W282

W283

W284

W286

R779

W291

W457

J810

W295

W296

W543

W298

W299

W507

W301W302

W303

W305

W306

W307

W524

W309

W312

W314

L

UL MARKQ

K

CN009

HS002

HS005

C728

W324

W327

W330

W331

W3 32

W335

W570

W337

W339

L

W346

W500

W352

C522 W353

W354

W356

W360

W361

D721

W368

W544

W525

W376

W385

H

W392

W393

W394

W501

W545

W398

W399

W404

W408

W409

W413

W414

W417

W418

W421

W422

W423

W424

C399

W526

C136

W430

W433

R291

R292

HS004

W435

W441

W442W443

W447

Q

W454W455

Q706

Q

Y712

Y654

Y714

E1

Y154Y155

W471

W472

W547

W476

R776

H

B

W504

D722

B

R823

R930

W536

G

W549

R047

C005

C006

L001

W550

W551

C612

L1

Y914

Y910

Y912

W553

C403

R409

W558

R440

R441

C925

C949

Y713

W559

D716

C396

C397C398

C

R

R

K939

W599

W600

W601

R613

R614

R615

R141

R040

K940

W609W611

Y916

Y917

S

35

30

25

20

20

2530

35

15

10

5

1510

5

2

1

2

125

AV

SW

20

15

10

512

RE

GU

LATOR

INO

UT

C

EB

SID

EP

IN

BC

E

13

12

C

BE

12

48

91011

1213

1416 3

57

1518

17

5

4

3

2

1

E

B

6

3

12

32

1

BR

NR

ED

WH

T

2

1

C001

C011

C014

C016

C022

C024C

027

C031

C0

33

C037

C041

C044

C045

C046

C111

C112

C113

C114

C115

C131

C133

C201

C202

C2

3

C233

C234

W537

C237

C281

C282

C283

C285

C286

C2

87

C288

W106

C352

C353

C392

C393

C394

C395

C41

C405

C407

C415

C421

C431

C501

C502

C503

C505

C507

R860

C515

C516

C523

C524

C526

C527

C531

C533

C605

C606

C607

C609

C610

C611

R318

W110

W1

11

C667

C700

C7

2

C704

C705C

706

C7

8C7

9C7

10

C800

C801

C803

C806

C807

C810

C811

C812

C814

C815

C852

W572

C856

C904

C905

C908

C948

C912

C914

Q531

C916

C917

C919

C934

C935

C937

C938

C943

R856

Y156

C955

W575

C971

C972

CN

001C

N002

CN

003

DE

G

CP

932

D812

D001

D102 D

305

6 D3

D307

W539

W576

D523

D524

D527

D534

D535

R009

D603

D604

D605

D606

W512

W577

W514

D701

D702

D7 3

D704

D713

D801

W579

W580

D901

D914

D915

D920

W581 D

38 9 D

3

D310

D931

D945

W485

W486

W487

D715

Y909

IC911

W519

CL004

D402

K912

K937

K938

L011

L021

L023

L027

L042

C047

L232

L511

L700

L931

L937

LC601

LC602

LC603

LC604

LC605

LC606

Q0

21

Q023

Q024

Q041

Q133

W122

W123

Q153

Q154

Q232

W124

W489

W127

W128

Q501

Q532

Q541

Q542

Q543

Q651

Q705 Q

810

Q552

R583

R584

R585

R586

R002

R0

3

R006

R007

R020

R022

R023

R034

R036

R0

37

R041

R042

R0

44

R132

R133

R136

W131

W133

W134

R155

W4

90

W491

R241

R2

81

R282

R283

R284

R286

R287

R2

88

R289

R301

R302R

303

R304

R3

5

R306

W459

R909

W145

W146

W540

R591

R593

R356

R357

60R

3

W492

R414

W493

R431

R434

R435

R501

R502

R507

R512

W153

R523

R529

R532

R533

R5

34

R535

R536

R545

R547

R549

R550

R551

R570

R573

R604

R607

R69

R595

C7

22

R651

R6

52

R654

W154

R701

R702

R703

R704

R705

R706

R713

R715

R716

R717

R718

R719

R7

20

R721

R722

R723

R724

R7

25R

726R

727

R729

R731

R732

R733

R734

R735

R736

R737

R738

R739

R740

R741

R742

R743

R744

R745

R746

R747

R748

R749

R750

R751

R752

R754 R

757R

758

R824

W527

R762

R763

R764

R765

R766R

767R

768

W156

R772

R7

74

W159

R781

R782

R783

R784

R785

R786

R788

R789

R790

R791

R792

R800

R810

R811

R814

R816

C551

SN

R912

R913

R914

R917

R918

R919

W160

R924

Y904

W528

R943

D537

R046

R951

R952

R290

W494

R975

R977

R110

W495

TU

001

Y152

Y153

Y401

Y6

52

Y653

Y700

Y702

Y74Y705

Y903

A

IC852

T951

IC921

R901

T921

W173

W175

W177

W180

W182

W183

W184

W185

W187

W188

W496

W193

W194

W195

W197

R798

W202

W567

W206

W207

W208

W209

W212

W214

W223

W224

W225

W568

W569

W231

W242

W246

W542

W250

W252

W258

W260

W498

W267

W2

69

W271

W273

W274

C152

R827

Q025

W292

W304

W310

W449

W3

11

W313

W318

CP

933

W320

C151

W325

R408

Y157

W456

W334

W340

W341

W342

W345

W349

W350

W351

W355

W358

W359

HS

006

W365

W366

W534

W371

W375

W377

W450

W381

CL002

W391

W474

W451

R039

W403

W407

W415

W416

W419

R140

W428

W429

W434

R319

W436

W437

W438

W440

W448

W460

W462

W464

C302

W467

W473

W475

W546

CN

008

75R

7

D353

W5

3

C726

W508

R018

R019

R821

R822

C721

R826

R825

R859

W535

48 W5

R0

48

CP

936

Y911

Y913

Q440

L940

R806

1 LC

Y002

Y003

W561

W562

W563

W604

R818

C4

2

W610

P

D010

C

E

C

B

C504

C510

C513

C51

4

C906

D501

D50

2

FR523

FR524

K920

R504R505

R525

C998

R941

CL003

FRONT

( ) TP-E1

( )

TP-91B (B1) CAUTION: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATED FUSE (S) ANDROHM'S MFR'S TYPE CP(S).

F

Page 96: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

2-30No.51907B 2-29

CRT SOCKET PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM PIP PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]

AV-36F702AV-36F802 AV-36F802

No.51907B

IC

H

R

SC

G

IC

BCD

11

22

3

4

C

A

0

CL002

B

G1

E

D CB

A

E

E B

C

1

0

B

GND

1 3

V

B

H

1 6

B1

H

MARKCRT EARTH

VM

CRT

B

FOCUS ADJ.

B

G G

B

E

C

EB

C

B

E

BE

3

4

RG12VB

MARK

E

TAKADA01.02.23

Y

C113

W001

R123

R125C111

C118

R142

R136R139

R199

R122

C127C121

C114

Q107L304

L301

R310

R313

R145

C117

TP-E1

10C1

R3 7

W022

C115

D301

R331

R301

R363

R364

W003

W004

C321

R305R308

R303

R306

D33

C332

R332

CN004

W009

W010W012

Q308

L302

L305

R311

R314

R315

R312

R108

R324

R323

R362

Y001

C322

W015

W016

W018R137

R109

R113

16R1

R128

E4

R130

R321

Q305

C361

W019

SCREEN

Q301

C331

C33

SK001

Q33

L306

Q108

R111

CN005

R334

R335

W028

R151

R152

R153

R154

C151

C152

E2

TP-G

W038

R351

D314

D313

C351

R355

D351

R040

HS011

HS013

HS014

TP-B

W039

C

INO

UT

VID

EO

RF

-AG

C

AF

T

GN

D

9V NC IF NC

30V

LOC

K

5V

9V

SD

A

SC

L

BT

AG

C

NC

NC

GN

D

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

1

10111215202527

5P

IP C

ON

TR

OLE

R

Y35

9

D30

1

IC35

1

W06

7

R35

1

Y35

8

W04

7

W06

8

W07

4

W05

0

R30

8W05

1

W05

2

C00

8

W05

5

W07

0

Y36

0

C31

9

C32

1

C32

3

C32

9

Q30

3

W05

8

R30

9W07

2

W06

1

L001

W06

2

R00

7

CF

001

Y91

5

W06

4

X30

1

Q10

2

Q30

1

2Q3

R00

1

R00

2

R00

3

R00

4

W06

6

W07

3

W07

6Y

302

C30

4

C30

5

R12

4

R30

4

R31

3

C01

1

C31

5

C31

6C

317

C31

8

C32

0C

322

C33

0C33

1

C12

1

R00

5

R01

1

C01

0

R12

3

Y35

1

IC30

1

R12

7

Y90

6

W03

7

W02

8

Y90

4

Y90

3

Y00

2

R31

7C

332

D30

2 C33

6

R34

0R

338

R34

1 337

R

Q33

4

Q33

3

C33

8 R34

3Q

335

R34

4R

346

Q33

6

R34

8 R34

7

R33

3

C33

4

R33

1Q

331

R33

2R

334

R34

5

Q33

2R

336

R33

5

W04

4

C

EB

B

BE

EE

E

EB

C

E

BE C

B

E

B

C

B

C

BB

E

E

B

C

BE

C

CE

B

E BE

E

BE

B

B

CK

F15

00-A

01-1

R12

4

C10

1

C10

8

D10

2

R14

3

R11

0

L106

C12

0R13

1

38R1

Q10

9

Q11

0

Q10

3

C12

5

Q10

4Q

106

R12

9

R32

5

R12

6

R30

4

C12

2

W02

5

D10

7

W02

3

W02

4

C30

1R

361

Y00

2

D30

4

D30

5W

006 C

109

R30

2

D10

5

D10

6

R13

2

C10

7

R30 9

R33

3

R14

6

D30

6

C33

3

W00

8

W01

1

Q31

1W

034

D33

1

HS

010

Q31

2

Q30

9

R32

6

W01

3

R11

7

R32

7

C32

3

R13

4

R1

44

L303

C36

2

R11

2

R11

5

D36

1

W0

26

R12

7

Q15

1

R31

8

R31

7R32

0

Q30

7

R14

1

Q30

4Q

306

Q31

0

R11

4

R31

6

R31

9

C11

9

D30

2

Q3

2

K10

2

K10

3

K10

4

K10

5

R33

7

Q10

5

R33

6

C36

3

R32

2

C30

2

R33

8

R11

8

R11

9

UL

MA

RK

D10

1

Q15

2

W03

0

R35

2

R35

3W

031

W03

2D31

2 D31

1

R35

4

Q35

1

W03

3

R04

1

W03

5

HS

012

Y00

3

IN

OUT

1 5

10

15

20 30

3525

1

15

20

25

NC ADRS

C

5

4

3

1

0

BCDE

0

1

2

3

4

5

E D C B A

2

14

PIP TUNER/IF

28

5

10

WATO

CKF1378-CU1

A

'01.01.25

Y357

IC001CL001

CN003

C001

C004

C006

W053

W054

C314

C327

C351

C352

W075

Y911

L302

L303

L304

R307

W065

W077

Q304R310

UL MARK

L305

R121

R125

R126

R301

R302R303

R305

R306

R311

R314R315

R316

L121 C003

C301

C302

C312

C313

C324

C325

C326

C328

C353

C012

R006

R012

Y912

C303

Y352

TU001

W006

Y353

Y354

W022

Y907

Y909

Y908

C333

Y901

Y902

Y910

Y301

Y913

R339

42R3

C337

C339 Y332

Y333

Y331

C335

W042

Y356

Y355

TOPTOP

FRONT( )

( )

Page 97: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2-31No.51907B

AV SELECTOR PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM FRONT CONTROL PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM

2-32 No.51907B

A

BC

C

D

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 77

GD

B

E

1 2 3 4

5

EF

G

F

0

6

A

1

2

4

3

C446

D406

R925

R405

R406

R702

R703 R705

R926

LC401

W005

CL001

Y401

15

1013

15

36

45

48

1

25

20

13

5

1

42

3

1

4

3

26

56

2

45

18

119

3712

1010

811

9

127

30

40

MT

S/T

ON

E/V

OL

BB

E/A

MP

AU

DIO

SW

SE

P

Y/C

AU

DIO

OU

T

1510

2021

3540

42

20

101

1115

5

30

37

10

24

1410

75

1

15

12

AV

SW

1410

5

2825

20

2225

18

NO

ZA

KI

CK

F14

53-C

01-1

31

24

00.1

2.22

C15

3

C25

3

C30

7

C30

8

IC40

1

D52

2

LC50

1

LC50

2

LC50

3

R26

4

C15

4

Y15

2

W20

1

W00

4

W00

5

W00

6

W00

7

J501

EF

201

EF

202

J503

D52

8

IC00

1 Q90

1

R08

4R

088

R15

1R

152

R15

3

C34

4

R15

4

R15

9

R33

1R

332

R37

1

C20

1

C20

3

C20

9

C21

1

C21

3

W00

8

W19

8

C22

6

C23

1

C24

5C

246

C24

7

C24

8C

249

C25

2

C25

5

R37

2

W00

9

W01

0

R40

1

C41

0

R40

2

C50

1

C50

3C

504

Y15

1

R37

8

C50

8

R38

2

R38

4

R39

2

R90

2

D40

2

D45

1

D45

2

D50

1

D50

2

D50

4

D50

8D

509

D51

5D

516

D51

7

D51

8

W01

1

W20

2 IC20

1

C45

4

IC50

1

L242

W01

4

J504

C20

6

Y38

1

L211

L241

L261

W01

6

W01

7

W01

8

W01

9

Q21

2

Q25

2

61Q2

Q45

2Q

455

W02

1

W02

2

W02

7

W02

9

W03

0

W03

4W

036

W03

7

W03

8

Y38

2

W04

2

W04

3

W04

4

W04

5

W04

6

W05

0

R21

1

R21

3R

214

R21

5

R21

7R

218

R23

2

R23

3

R23

4R

235

R24

1

R25

5R

258

R25

9R

263

R30

1

R30

2

R45

2R

453

R45

4

R45

5

W05

3

R50

1

R50

2

R50

6

R50

7

R50

8

R51

0

R51

3

R51

8

R51

9

R52

0

R52

2

R52

3

R52

4

R52

5

R52

6R

527

R52

8

W05

4

W05

5

R53

2

R53

3

W05

6

W05

7

W06

2

W06

3

W06

8

W07

4

R57

1

W08

0

W08

1

R90

6

C23

3

W08

6

W08

7

W09

2

W09

3

W09

4

W09

8 W09

9

W10

0

W10

1

W10

2

W10

3

W10

4

W10

6

W10

7

W10

8

W10

9

W11

5

W11

7

W11

8

W11

9

W12

1

W12

2

W12

3

W12

4

W12

5

W18

3

W12

8U

L M

AR

K

W13

0

W13

4

W13

9

W14

1

W14

2

W14

4

W14

5

W14

6

W14

7

W14

9

W15

5W

156

W15

8

W15

9

W16

2

W16

3

W16

4

W16

6

D45

3

W20

0

W16

9

W17

0

W17

1

W17

2

W17

3

W17

4

W17

6W

180

R58

0

C26

7

Q26

3

IC38

1

IC15

1

C08

4

C08

6

C09

0

C09

1

C09

3

C09

4

C09

5

C15

7

C15

8

C33

1

C33

5C

338

C37

3

C39

1

C08

2

C08

3

C15

1

C37

1

C37

2

Q38

4Q

385

D39

1

C08

1

C08

7

C15

5C

156

W18

4

Y40

1

W18

5 C23

5

C23

8

C23

9

L243

L244

R23

8

R23

9

R24

3

R24

4

W19

0

W19

1

W19

2W19

5

W19

6

C41

2

C41

3

J502

Y20

1

Y20

2

UP

PE

RR

IGH

TD

OW

NLE

FT

31

2 1

RL

V

VO

L+V

OL-

CH

+C

H-

ME

NU

610 5

1

12

34

56

78

1011

129

1314

15

3 4

56

15

71

59

MA

RK

MA

RK

MA

RK

S

MA

RK 1

3

1

MA

RK

CK

F1456-A

01-1

TAK

AD

A01.02.23

UL M

AR

K

J401

S901

VA

901C

442

C443

C444

C445

BL1

CN

006

CN

007

D401

D402

D403

D404

D405

R401

R402

R403

R404

R701

R704

R706

S702

S703

S704

S705

S706

W006

W007

L

R927

W003

Y402

LC402

Y904

Y905

Y906

Y907

3430

3525

20

15

10

5

2

1

24

25

20

158

1 5

2 10

15

C223

C254

C261

C262

W001

C451

D523

LC504

W188

Q251

W003

C345

W189

R252

R253R254

C264

C332

C336

R568

R572R574

R901

C339

C205

C341C342

C265

D527

CN001

CN002

C374

C531

C532

C533

C534

R081

R082R083

R085R086

R089

R155R156R157

R158

C536

R333R334

C204

C208

C212

C214

C215

R090

W199

C232C241

C242

C243C244

C251

C263

R373R374

R375R376

R377

C309

C310

C311

C312

C402

C403 C401

C407

C408

C409

C411

C452

C453

C502

C509

R381

C511

C512

C513

C514

C515

C517

R385

C520

C521

C522C523

R386

R387

R391

R393R394

R395

R396

C404

D403

D503D505

D506

D507

D510

D511

D512D513

D514

D519

D520D521

R903

R904

W203

K201

L201

L202

L251

W015

Q211

Q218

Q219

Q253

Q262

Q301

Q302

Q451

W020

W023

W024

W025

W026

Q509

W028

W031

W032

W033W035

W040

W041

W047

W048

W049

R202

C537

R210

R212

R216

R223

R229

R230R231

R236

R251

W051

W052

R261

R262

R265

R303

R304

R305

R306

R461

R460

R403

R404

R405

R406R451

R456

53Q4

Q454

R457

R503

R504

R505

R509

R511

R512

R521

R529

R534R535

W058

W059

W060

W061

W064

W066

W067

W069

W070

W073

W075

W076

W077

R558

R559 R560

R561

R562

R563

R564

R565

R566R567

R573

W078

W079

W082

W083

W085

HS401

W088

W089W090

W095

W096

W097

W105

W110

W111

W112

W113

W114

W116

W120

W126

W131

W133

W137

W138

W140

C234

W148

W150

W151W154

W157

W165

W177

W178

W179

C455

C266

R269

70R2

R458R459

IC371

C089

C092

C159

C333

C343

C392

C152

C505

Q381

Q382

Q386

Q387

D392

R087

C085

C088

C160

C334

C337

C340

W186

W187

C236

C237R242

R245R246R247R248

R249

W193

W194

W197

C538

Y203

C539

FRONT

TOP

FRONT

( )

( )

Page 98: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

2-34No.51907B 2-33

LF, DAF AND POWER SW PWB PATTERN DIAGRAMS

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No.51907B

- LF -

- DAF -

- POWER SW -

125V 5A

LIVE

ISOLATED

E1

E3

CKF1493-B01-1ISOLATED00.12.20 NOZAKI

F901

R998

UL MARK

Y902

Y903

Y904

Y905

3

WH

T

21

1

WH

TR

ED

BR

N

C901

C902

C903

C904

C905

PW

P

LF901

LF902

R999

VA

901

Y901

R997

3

Q

1

MARK

MARK K

541 6

CP

RED

DAF

11

8

ORANGE

CKF1455-A01-1

01.02.23 TAKADA

51

D771

R762

R763

R764

C701

L701

Q751

Q752

R755

CL002

C761

R701

R771

T701

D762 D761

CL001

POWER

POWER LED

6 1

31

CKF1375-B01-1

D101

S701

IC101

C102

R101

B UL MARK

C

BE

Q753

R757

R702

R761

R765

R703

C751C

752

C771

C753

UL M

AR

K

R758

R751

R752

R753

R754

R756

W003

W004

Y701

W001

W002

R107

R108

Q101

Q102

FRONT

FRONT

FRONT

( )

( )

( )

Page 99: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 2-35

MODE

CHANNEL CHART (US

TV REAL DISP.020304050607080910111213

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW

W+1W+2W+3W+4W+5W+6W+7W+8W+9W+10W+11W+12W+13W+14W+15W+16W+17W+18W+19W+20W+21W+22W+23W+24W+25W+26W+27W+28W+29W+30W+31W+32W+33W+34

141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970

CATVBAND

CHANNEL TUNERBAND

IV

IV

II

II

I

I

I

VH

MID

SUPER

HYPER

ULTRA

VL

MODETV REAL DISP.

W+35W+36W+37W+38W+39W+40W+41W+42W+43W+44W+45W+46W+47W+48W+49W+50W+51W+52W+53W+54W+55W+56W+57W+58W+59W+60W+61W+62W+63W+64W+65W+66W+67W+68W+69W+70W+71W+72W+73W+74W+75W+76W+77W+78W+79W+80W+81W+82W+83W+84A-8A-4A-3A-2A-1

717273747576777879808182838485868788899091929394

1001011021031041051061071081091101111121131141151161171181191201211221231241250196979899

CATVBAND

CHANNEL TUNERBAND

IV

ULTRA

UHF

SUBMID

TOTAL 180CHVHF 124CH

UHF 56CH

14

69

NOTE:TO RECEIVE THE SUBSCRIPTION OR PREMIUM PROGRAMMING FROM CERTAINCABLE COMPANIES. SPECIAL ADAPTERS MAY BE REQUIRED.

Page 100: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2-36 No.51907B

MODE

CHANNEL CHART (CA)

TV REAL DISP.020304050607080910111213

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW

W+1W+2W+3W+4W+5W+6W+7W+8W+9W+10W+11W+12W+13W+14W+15W+16W+17W+18W+19W+20W+21W+22W+23W+24W+25W+26W+27W+28W+29W+30W+31W+32W+33W+34

141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970

CATVBAND

CHANNEL TUNERBAND

IV

IV

III

II

I

II

I

VH

MID

SUPER

HYPER

ULTRA

VL

MODETV REAL DISP.

W+35W+36W+37W+38W+39W+40W+41W+42W+43W+44W+45W+46W+47W+48W+49W+50W+51W+52W+53W+54W+55W+56W+57W+58W+59W+60W+61W+62W+63W+64W+65W+66W+67W+68W+69W+70W+71W+72W+73W+74W+75W+76W+77W+78W+79W+80W+81W+82W+83W+84A-8A-4A-3A-2A-1

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293941001011021031041051061071081091101111121131141151161171181191201211221231241250196979899

CATVBAND

CHANNEL TUNERBAND

IV

ULTRA

SUBMID

UHF

TOTAL 180CHVHF 124CH

UHF 56CH

14

69

NOTE:TO RECEIVE THE SUBSCRIPTION OR PREMIUM PROGRAMMING FROM CERTAINCABLE COMPANIES. SPECIAL ADAPTERS MAY BE REQUIRED.

Page 101: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Printed in JapanVP0112SW

36F702Y-UCM #436F802Y-UCM #4

JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA

Head office : 1700 Valley Road, Wayne, New Jersey 07470 (973)317-5000East Coast : 10 New Maple Avenue, Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058 (973)396-1000Midwest : 705 Enterprise St. Aurora, Illinois 60504 (630)851-7855West Coast : 5665 Corporate Avenue, Cypress, California 90630 (714)229-8011Southwest : 10700 Hammerly, Suite 105, Houston, Texas 77043 (713)935-9331Hawaii : 2969 Mapunapuna Place, Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 (808)833-5828Southeast : 1500 Lakes Parkway, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30243 (770)339-2582

JVC CANADA INC.Head office : 21 Finchdene Square Scarborough, Ontario M1X 1A7 (416)293-1311Vancouver : 13040 Worster Court Richmond B.C. V6V 2B3 (604)270-1311

DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.

®

Page 102: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 37

PARTS LIST

CAUTIONq The parts identified by the symbol are important for the safety . Whenever replacing these parts, be sure to use specified ones to secure the

safety .

q The parts not indicated in this Parts List and those which are filled with lines --- in the Parts No. columns will not be supplied .

q P. W. Board Ass'y will not be supplied, but those which are filled with the Parts No. in the Parts No. columns will be supplied .

ABBREVIATIONS OF RESISTORS, CAPACITORS AND TOLERANCES

RESISTORS CAPACITORS

C R Carbon Resistor

F R Fusible Resistor

P R Plate Resistor

V R Variable Resistor

HV R High Voltage Resistor

MF R Metal Film Resistor

MG R Metal Glazed Resistor

MP R Metal Plate Resistor

OM R Metal Oxide Film Resistor

CMF R Coating Metal Film Resistor

UNF R Non-Flammable Resistor

CH V R Chip Variable Resistor

CH MG R Chip Metal Glazed Resistor

COMP. R Composition Resistor

LPTC R Linear Positive Temperature Coefficient Resistor

C CAP. Ceramic Capacitor

E CAP. Electrolytic Capacitor

M CAP. Mylar Capacitor

HV CAP. High Voltage Capacitor

MF CAP. Metalized Film Capacitor

MM CAP. Metalized Mylar Capacitor

MP CAP. Metalized Polystyrol Capacitor

PP CAP. Polypropylene Capacitor

PS CAP. Polystyrol Capacitor

TF CAP. Thin Film Capacitor

MPP CAP. Metalized Polypropylene Capacitor

TAN. CAP. Tantalum Capacitor

CH C CAP. Chip Ceramic Capacitor

BP E CAP. Bi-Polar Electrolytic Capacitor

CH AL E CAP. Chip Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitor

CH AL BP CAP. Chip Aluminum Bi-Polar Capacitor

CH TAN. E CAP. Chip Tantalum Electrolytic Capacitor

CH AL BP E CAP. Chip Tantalum Bi-Polar Electrolytic Capacitor

RESISTORS

F G J K M N R H Z P

±1% ±2% ±5% ±10% ±20% ±30%+30% +50% +80% +100%-10% -10% -20% 0%

Page 103: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

38 No. 51907B

CONTENTSUSING P.W. BOARD & REMOTE CONTROL UNIT ................................................................................. 39EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................... 40EXPLODED VIEW .................................................................................................................................... 41

[AV-36F702]PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST

MAIN PW BOARD ASS'Y .....................................................................................................................................42DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................................46CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................46FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y ...............................................................................................................47POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................47LF PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................................47AV SELECTOR PW BOARD.................................................................................................................................48

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTS LIST (RM-C303G-1A) ..............................................................................49

[AV-36F802]PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST

MAIN PW BOARD ASS'Y .....................................................................................................................................50DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................................54CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................54FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y ...............................................................................................................54POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................54LF PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................................54PIP PW BOARD ASS’Y.........................................................................................................................................54AV SELECTOR PW BOARD ASS’Y .....................................................................................................................553D Y/C MODULE PW BOARD ASS’Y ..................................................................................................................56

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTS LIST (RM-C301G-2A) ..............................................................................56

PACKING / PACKING PARTS LIST ......................................................................................................... 57

Page 104: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 39

MAIN PW BOARD SAC-1542A-M2 SAC-1547A-M2DAF PW BOARD SAC-2605A-M2CRT SOCKET PW BOARD SAC-3513A-M2FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD SAC-8507A-M2POWER SW PW BOARD SAC-8601A-M2LF PW BOARD SAC-9506A-M2PIP PW BOARD — SAC0P501A-M2AV SELECTOR PW BOARD SAC0S511A-M2 SAC0S505A-M23D Y/C MODULE PW BOARD — SAC-0Y501AREMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-C303G-1A RM-C301G-2A

USING P.W. BOARD & REMOTE CONTROL UNITAV-36F702 AV-36F802P.W.B ASS’Y

Model

Page 105: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

40 No. 51907B

EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

! L01 QQW0122-001 DEG COIL! T1502 QQH0110-001 FBT Within MAIN PWB! V01 A90AJZ90X02 CRT Inc. DY! 1 QMPD200-200-JC POWER CORD CN90PW Within LF PWB

2 LC30191-003A-A REMOCON WINDOW3 LC41193-001A-C JVC MARK4 LC20217-004B-A CONTROL KNOB5 A48457-4-S SPRING

6 WJY0016-003A BRAIDED WIRE7 WJY0013-002A BRAIDED WIRE(SUB) (x2)8 LC20629-001B-A S.P HOLDER (x2)9 LC41029-001A-A TAPPING SCREW (x4)10 LC40226-002A-A SPACER (x4)

! 11 CEBSS12D-04KJ2 SPEAKER (x2) SP01, SP0212 QYSBSB4012Z TAPPING SCREW (x4)

! 13 LC10883-001C-A CHASSIS BASE

! 14 LC20626-002C-A TERMINAL BOARD (AV-36F702)! 14 LC20626-001D-A TERMINAL BOARD (AV-36F802)

15 QYSBSB3010Z TAPPING SCREW (x4) [AV-36F702], (x6) [AV-36F802]16 CHGY0031-0C ANT CABLE ASSY (Only for AV-36F802)

! 17 LC11155-001C-A REAR COVER18 QYSBSFG4016Z TAPPING SCREW (x12)

! 19 GQ30032-001A-A RATING LABEL

! 20 LC20106-001D-A CORD CLAMP! 100 LC11153-001C-A FRONT CABI ASSY Inc. No. 101-104

101 LC20628-001B-A DOOR102 CM48229-00A-C DOOR LATCH103 LC31237-001A-A POWER KNOB104 CM36481-002A-A SPRING

Page 106: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 41

EXPLODED VIEW

13

16

15

20

1

14

17

10

12

5

2

6

7

7

4

11

8

10

9

19

18

18

3

DAF PWB

MAIN PWB

LF PWB

AV SELECTORPWB

PIP PWB (Only forAV-36F802)

POWER SW PWB

FRONT CONTROL PWB

CRT SOCKET PWB

3D Y/C MODULE(Only for AV-36F802)

T1502

V01

L01

100

104

103

101102

Page 107: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F702

42 No. 51907B

PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST(AV-36F702)MAIN PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-1542A-M2)

RESISTORR1001 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1002-04 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1011 NRSA63J-820X MG R 82Ø 1/16W JR1012 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1013 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1014 QRE121J-101Y C R 100Ø 1/2W JR1015 NRSA63J-180X MG R 18Ø 1/16W JR1016 NRSA63J-270X MG R 27Ø 1/16W J

R1018 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1020 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1021 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1022 NRSA63J-151X MG R 150Ø 1/16W JR1023 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1024 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1025 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1026 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J

R1028 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR1029 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1030 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1038 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1039 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1041 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1042-43 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1044-46 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R1047 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1048 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1101-02 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1111 NRSA63J-105X MG R 1MØ 1/16W JR1131 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1132 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1133 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1134 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W J

R1135-39 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1140 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1201 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1231 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1237 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1238 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1241 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1243 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W J

R1281 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1282 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1283 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR1286 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1287 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1288 NRSA02J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/10W JR1289 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1290 NRSA02J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/10W J

R1292 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1293 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1301-03 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1304-06 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1318 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1319 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1354-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1356 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W J

R1359 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1360 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1401 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1403 QRX01GJ-1R0 MF R 1.0Ø 1W JR1404 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1405 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1407 NRSA02J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/10W JR1411-12 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1414 QRL029J-151 OM R 150Ø 2W JR1417 QRE121J-180Y C R 18Ø 1/2W JR1431 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1432 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1433 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1434 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1435 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1440 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

RESISTOR

R1441 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1502 NRSA63J-271X MG R 270Ø 1/16W JR1503 QRE121J-103Y C R 10kØ 1/2W JR1504 QRL039J-122 OM R 1.2kØ 3W JR1505 QRL039J-152 OM R 1.5kØ 3W JR1507 QRF074J-2R0 UNF R 2.0Ø 7W JR1511 QRE121J-220Y C R 22Ø 1/2W J

R1512 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1513 QRL039J-273 OM R 27kØ 3W JR1515 QRE141J-0R0Y C R 0.0Ø 1/4W J

! R1523 QRJ146J-333X C R 33kØ 1/4W J! R1525 QRZ9011-470 F R 47Ø 1/2W J

R1526 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1527 QRE121J-154Y C R 150kØ 1/2W JR1528 QRE121J-124Y C R 120kØ 1/2W J

R1529 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J! R1531 QRJ146J-391X C R 390Ø 1/4W J

R1532 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1533-34 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W J

! R1535 NRSA02D-242X MG R 2.4kØ 1/10W! R1537 NRVA02D-752X MF R 7.5kØ 1/10W

R1538 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1543 QRE121J-122Y C R 1.2kØ 1/2W J

R1544 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1545 QRE121J-822Y C R 8.2kØ 1/2W JR1546 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1547 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1548 QRE121J-821Y C R 820Ø 1/2W JR1553 QRL039J-390 OM R 39Ø 3W JR1581 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1582 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W J

R1583 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1584 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR1585 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1586 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1587 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1588 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1589 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1590 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W J

R1591 QRJ149J-220 C R 22Ø 1/4W JR1592 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR1593 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1594 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1595 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1601-03 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR1610-12 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1700-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R1704-05 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1706-07 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1708-09 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1715 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1718 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1721-24 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1726-28 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1729 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W J

R1731-32 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1733-34 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1737 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1738 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1739 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1740 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1741 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1742-43 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1745 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1748 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1749-51 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1752 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1753 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1754 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1755 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1756 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

Page 108: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702

No. 51907B 43

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

36F

702

RESISTOR

R1763 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1764-68 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1769-70 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1772 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1774 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1775 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1776 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1777 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1778 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1784 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1786 NRSA63J-393X MG R 39kØ 1/16W JR1788 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1790 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1791 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1792 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1793-95 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J

R1798-99 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1800 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1801-04 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1806 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1807 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1810 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1811 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1812 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R1814 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1815 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1816 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1817 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1818 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1821 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1824 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1827 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R1857 QRG029J-470 OM R 47Ø 2W JR1858 QRG029J-270 OM R 27Ø 2W JR1860 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1901 QRF074K-R47 UNF R 0.47Ø 7W KR1909 QRG01GJ-470 OM R 47Ø 1W JR1911 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1912 QRT029J-R18 MF R 0.18Ø 2W JR1913 QRT029J-R15 MF R 0.15Ø 2W J

! R1914 QRK126J-681X C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1915 QRE121J-270Y C R 27Ø 1/2W J

! R1917 QRK126J-332X C R 3.3kØ 1/2W JR1918 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1919 QRE121J-684Y C R 680kØ 1/2W JR1924 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1930 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1939 QRT039J-2R2 MF R 2.2Ø 3W J

R1940 QRE121J-181Y C R 180Ø 1/2W JR1941 QRL029J-183 OM R 18kØ 2W JR1943 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1944 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR1951 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1952 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1953 QRE121J-151Y C R 150Ø 1/2W JR1972 NRVA02D-102X MF R 1kØ 1/10W±0.5%

R1973 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1975 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1977 QRE121J-473Y C R 47kØ 1/2W JR1978 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W J

CAPACITORC1001 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1002 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1003 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1011-12 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1014 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1015-16 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1021 QFV71HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1023 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M

CAPACITORC1024 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1025 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1026 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1027 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1028 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1029 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1030 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1034 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C1036 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1037 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1038 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1041-42 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1043-44 NDC31HJ-470X C CAP. 47pF 50V JC1045 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1046 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1047 NDC21HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V J

C1048 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1111 QETN0JM-228Z E CAP. 2200µF 6.3V MC1112 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1113 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1114 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1115 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1116 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1131-32 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V J

C1133 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V JC1134 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1135 NDC31HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V JC1136 QENC1CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 16V MC1151 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1152 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1201 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1202 QETN1HM-224Z E CAP. 0.22µF 50V M

C1203 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1233 NDC31HJ-560X C CAP. 56pF 50V JC1237 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1281 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V JC1282 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1283 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1284 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC1285 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C1286 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1287 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1288 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1302 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1352 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1354 QFV71HJ-154Z MF CAP. 0.15µF 50V JC1391 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1392 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C1393-95 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1401 NDC21HJ-152X C CAP. 1500pF 50V JC1403 NCB21HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1404 QEHR1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1405 QCS32HJ-100Z CH C CAP. 10µF 500V JC1407 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V JC1410 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V JC1411 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

C1415 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1421 QEHQ1VM-108 E CAP. 1000µF 35V MC1431 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1432 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1501 QCB32HK-151Z C CAP. 150pF 500V KC1502 QCB32HK-331Z C CAP. 330pF 500V KC1503 QETN2CM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 160V MC1504 QEZ0203-107 E CAP. 100µF 160V M

C1505 QENC2AM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 100V MC1507 QEZ0195-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1510 QFZ0196-272 MPP CAP. 2700pF 1.5kVH ±3%C1513 QFZ0198-153 MPP CAP. 0.015µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1514 QFP32JJ-223 PP CAP. 0.022µF 630V JC1515 QFZ0197-474 MPP CAP. 0.47µF 250V ZC1516 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1521 QETN2EM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 250V M

Page 109: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F702

44 No. 51907B

CAPACITORC1523 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1524 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1525 QETN1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1526 QFV21HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1527 QFLC2AJ-103Z M CAP. 0.01µF 100V J

! C1531 QCB32HK-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 500V K! C1533 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

C1551-52 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V J

C1553 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1601-03 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1609-11 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1612 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1700 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1703 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC1706 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1707 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M

C1710 NCB21EK-683X C CAP. 0.068µF 25V KC1712 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1714 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1721 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1722-23 NDC31HJ-390X C CAP. 39pF 50V JC1724 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF 50V JC1726 NDC21HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC1800 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M

C1801 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1802 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1803 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1804 NDC31HJ-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V JC1805 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1806-07 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1810 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1811 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

C1813 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1816 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1851 QETN1EM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 25V MC1852 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1853-54 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1856 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1857 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V M

! C1904-06 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z

! C1907 QEZ0169-477 E CAP. 470µF 200V M! C1908 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z

C1912 QCZ0340-332 C CAP. 3300pFC1913 QFLC1HJ-471Z M CAP. 470pF 50V JC1914 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1916 NDC31HJ-331X C CAP. 330pF 50V JC1917 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1918 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V K

C1919 QFP32GJ-103 PP CAP. 0.01µF 400V JC1925 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC1931 QEZ0203-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V MC1932 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1933 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V MC1934-35 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1937 QCZ0340-102 C CAP. 1000pFC1938 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V M

C1939-40 QCB32HK-152Z C CAP. 1500pF 500V KC1942 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1943 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1948 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1951 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1971 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1972 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1973 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

! C1998-99 QCZ9074-103 C CAP. 0.01µF 125V M

TRANSFORMERT1501 CE42034-002 H.DRIVE TRANSF.

! T1502 QQH0110-001 FBT! T1921 QQS0090-001 SWITCH.TRANSF.! T1951 QQT0315-001 POWER TRANSF.

COILL1001 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1012 QQLZ014-R39 PEAKING COILL1021 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1022 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1027 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1041 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1042 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1101 QQL244K-470Z COIL 47µH K

L1232 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1511 CE41029-00A LINEARITY COILL1512 QQLZ027-821 CHOKE COIL 820µHL1521 QQLZ018-760 HEATER CHOKE 76µHL1700 QQL244K-4R7Z COIL 4.7µH KL1810 QQL244J-100Z COIL 10µH JL1931 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH KL1933-34 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K

L1937 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K

DIODED1010 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1101-02 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1305-10 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1352 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1353 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1401 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1431 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1432 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

! D1501 RH3G-F1 SI.DIODE! D1502 RU3AM-LFC4 SI.DIODE

D1507 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1521 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODED1523-24 EL1Z-T3 SI.DIODED1525-26 1SS81-T5 SI.DIODED1527 1SR124-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1529 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODE

! D1531 MA4068N/Z1/-T2 ZENER DIODED1535 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1537 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1601 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1603 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1606 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1700 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1701-02 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

D1706-10 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1711 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODED1712-15 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1721-22 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1723-24 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1800 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODED1801 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1810 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODE

D1811 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE! D1901 RBV-406M BRIDGE DIODE

D1910 MA700A-T2 SI.DIODE! D1911-13 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODE

D1914 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1915 SARS01-T2 SI.DIODED1917 MTZJ30A-T2 ZENER DIODED1918 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODE

D1920 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE! D1930 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODE

D1931 RU30A-F1 SI.DIODED1933 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1935 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1937 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1941 MTZJ33A-T2 ZENER DIODED1945 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

Page 110: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702

No. 51907B 45

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

36F

702

DIODED1952-53 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1954-57 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1972 MTZJ15C-T2 ZENER DIODED1973 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

TRANSISTORQ1011 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1021 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1024 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1025 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1041 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1131-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1232-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1352 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1431 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1440 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1501 2SC4212/Z1/ SI.TRANSISTOR

! Q1511 2SD2645-YD TRANSISTOR! Q1531 2SC2785/JH/-T SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1532 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1541-42 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

! Q1543 2SD1408/OY/-LB SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1551 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1552 2SA966/OY/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1700 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1701 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1703 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1705 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1706 DTC363TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1711 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR

Q1810 DTC144EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1941 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1951 2SD1383K/AB/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1971 2SA1123/R/Z1-T SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC1101 TB1253AN I.C(M)IC1401 LA7841 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1501 LA6515 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1701 MN1876478JL1 I.C(MICRO-COMP)IC1702 AT24C04-F802Y I.C(MEMORY-OTH) (SERVICE)IC1703 MM1437AF-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1851 AN7812F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1852 AN7809F I.C(MONO-ANA)

IC1853 AN7805F I.C(MONO-ANA)! IC1911 STR-F6626/F3 I.C(HYBRID)! IC1921 SE135N I.C(HYBRID)

OTHERSCF1001 QAX0349-001 CERAMIC FILTERCF1021 QAX0639-001Z CERAMIC FILTERCF1041 QAX0642-001Z CERAMIC FILTER

! CP1932 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1933 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1934 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1936 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! F1905 QMFZ034-5R0Z-J1 FUSE

! FR1521 QRK126J-150X C R 15Ø 1/2W J! FR1523-24 QRX029J-3R3 MF R 3.3Ø 2W J! FR1525 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7 Ø1/4W

J1601 QNN0349-002 PIN JACKJ1810 QNS0001-001 JACKK1401 QQR0621-002Z BEADS COREK1912 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1916-17 QQR0582-001Z BEADS CORE

OTHERSK1920 QQR0872-002 FERRITE BEADSK1931-33 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1935 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1937 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1939 QQR0621-002Z BEADS CORELC1601-03 NQR0169-001X EMI FILTER

! PC1921 TLP621(B) I.C(PH.COUPLER)! RY1941 QSK0120-001 RELAY

! RY1951 QSK0113-001 RELAYSF1011 QAX0324-002 SAW FILTER

! TH1901 CEKP007-002 P.THERMISTOR! TU1001 QAU0176-001 TUNER

W1106 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1111 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1113 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1140 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1162 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1195 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1202 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1206 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1212-14 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1250 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1254-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1265 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1267 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1269 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1274 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1291 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1298 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1310-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1313 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1330-31 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1381 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1385 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1404 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1408 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1413 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1434-35 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1437-38 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1440 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1442-43 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1447-48 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1454-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1464 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1478 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1487-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1492-96 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1498 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1508 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1510-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1514-16 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1524-28 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1536 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1540 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1542 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1546 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1548-49 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1557-59 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1564 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1567-69 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1572 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1575-79 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1581 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1584-85 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1587 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1590-91 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1604 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1612 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JX1201 CE40668-001Z CRYSTALX1700 QAX0307-001 CER.RESONATOR

Page 111: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F702

46 No. 51907B

OTHERSY1002-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1150 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1154-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1652-54 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1701 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1703-05 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1714 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1800 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

Y1902-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-2605A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

RESISTORR2701 QRG01GJ-220 OM R 22Ø 1W JR2702 QRE121J-123Y C R 12kØ 1/2W JR2703 QRZ0056-103Z COMP.R 10kØ 1/2W KR2751 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR2752 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR2753 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR2754 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR2755 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W J

R2756 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR2757 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR2758 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR2761-65 QRE121J-184Y C R 180kØ 1/2W JR2771 QRL039J-223 OM R 22kØ 3W J

CAPACITORC2701 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC2751 QFLC1HJ-333Z M CAP. 0.033µF 50V JC2752 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC2753 QFZ0122-103 MPP CAP. 0.01µF 1.8kVH ±3%C2761 QFZ0122-682 MPP CAP. 6800pF 1.8kVH ±3%C2771 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

TRANSFORMERT2701 QQR1153-001 DEF.TRANSF.

COILL2701 QQLZ028-272 CHOKE COIL 2.7mH

DIODED2761-62 ES1F-LFG2 SI.DIODED2771 MTZJ33A-T2 ZENER DIODE

TRANSISTORQ2751-52 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ2753 2SC4632 SI.TRANSISTOR

CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-3513A-M2)

RESISTORR3108 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR3111 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W J

! R3114 QRJ146J-100X C R 10Ø 1/4W JR3115-16 NRSA63J-470X MG R 47Ø 1/16W JR3117 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3119 NRSA63J-121X MG R 120Ø 1/16W J

! R3122 QRZ9021-561 F R 560Ø 1W JR3123 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W J

R3124 NRSA63J-390X MG R 39Ø 1/16W JR3125 NRSA63J-5R6X MG R 5.6Ø 1/16W JR3126-27 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR3128 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR3129 NRSA63J-5R6X MG R 5.6Ø 1/16W JR3130 NRSA63J-390X MG R 39Ø 1/16W JR3131 NRSA63J-121X MG R 120Ø 1/16W JR3132 QRL029J-391 OM R 390Ø 2W J

R3134 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR3136 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR3139 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR3142 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR3143 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR3145-46 NRSA63J-5R6X MG R 5.6Ø 1/16W JR3151 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR3152-53 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W J

R3154 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR3301-06 NRSA63J-151X MG R 150Ø 1/16W JR3307-09 NRSA63J-100X MG R 10Ø 1/16W JR3310-12 QRG029J-153 OM R 15kØ 2W JR3313-15 QRG029J-183 OM R 18kØ 2W JR3316-18 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR3325-27 QRC121K-102Z COMP. R 1kØ 1/2W KR3331-33 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W J

R3334 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR3335 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR3336-38 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR3351-53 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3354 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR3355 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR3361 QRC121K-105Z COMP. R 1MØ 1/2W KR3362 QRC121K-102Z COMP. R 1kØ 1/2W K

R3363 QRC121K-474Z COMP. R 470kØ 1/2W K

CAPACITORC3101 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC3109 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC3110-11 NDC31HJ-221X C CAP. 220pF 50V JC3113 QETN2CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 160V MC3114-15 QCB32HK-472Z C CAP. 4700pF 500V KC3117 QETN2CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 160V MC3118 QETN0JM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 6.3V MC3119 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V M

C3120 QETN1AM-337Z E CAP. 330µF 10V MC3121 QCS32HJ-151Z CH C CAP. 150µF 500V JC3122 NDC31HJ-5R0X C CAP. 5.0pF 50V JC3125 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC3151-52 NCB21EK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 25V KC3301-03 NDC31HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC3321-22 QETN2EM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 250V MC3323 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V M

C3351 QETN1CM-337Z E CAP. 330µF 16V MC3361 QETN2EM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 250V MC3363 QCZ0324-102 C CAP. 1000pF 3000V P

COILL3301-03 QQL244K-180Z COIL 18µH KL3304-06 QQL244K-470Z COIL 47µH K

DIODED3101 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3105 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODED3106 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODE

Page 112: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702

No. 51907B 47

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

36F

702

POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8601A-M2)

DIODED3301 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3302 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3303 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3304 1SS82-T2 SI.DIODED3305 1SS82-T2 SI.DIODED3306 1SS82-T2 SI.DIODED3331 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3351 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

D3361 RM2C-LFA1 SI.DIODE

TRANSISTORQ3103 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3105 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3106 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3107 2SA1964/DE/ SI.TRANSISTORQ3108 2SC5248/DE/ SI.TRANSISTORQ3109 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3151 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3152 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTOR

Q3301-03 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3304-06 2SC5147/CDE/F43 SI.TRANSISTORQ3351 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTOR

OTHERSK3102-05 CE41492-001Z CHOKE COIL

! SK3001 CE42670-001 C.R.T.SOCKETW3024 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW3031-32 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW3035 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW3038-39 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8507A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

RESISTORR8401 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR8402-03 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR8404-05 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR8406 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR8702 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR8703 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR8705 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR8706 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W J

CAPACITORC8442-43 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC8444-45 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC8446 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

DIODED8402-06 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODE

OTHERSJ8401 QNZ0453-001 JACKK8401 QQR0621-002Z BEADS CORELC8401-02 NQR0169-001X EMI FILTERS8702 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH MENUS8703 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH CH-S8704 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH CH+S8705 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH VOL-S8706 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH VOL+

RESISTORR8101 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR8107 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR8108 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W J

CAPACITORC8102 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V M

DIODED8101 SLR-342VR3F L.E.D.

TRANSISTORQ8101-02 DTA124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC8101 GP1U281Q IFR DETECT UNIT

OTHERSLC30190-001B-A L.E.D.HOLDER

S8701 QSW0847-001 TACT SWITCH (POWER)

LF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-9506A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

RESISTORR9997 QRE121J-5R6Y C R 5.6Ø 1/2W J

! R9998 QRZ9041-275 C R 2.7MØ 1/2W KR9999 QRE121J-121Y C R 120Ø 1/2W J

CAPACITOR! C9901 QFZ9067-104 MM CAP. 0.1µF! C9902 QFZ9067-473 MM CAP. 0.047µF! C9903 QFZ9067-104 MM CAP. 0.1µF! C9904 QCZ9052-102 C CAP. 1000pF 125V

OTHERS! CN90PW QMPD200-200-JC POWER CORD! F9901 QMF0007-5R0J1 FUSE! FC9901 CEMG002-001Z FUSE CLIP! LF9901 QQR0527-004 LINE FILTER! LF9902 QQR1159-001 LINE FILTER! VA9901 ERZV10V621CS VARISTOR

Page 113: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F702

48 No. 51907B

AV SELECTOR PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC0S511A-M2)

RESISTORR0081 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0082 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0083 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR0084 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR0085 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR0086 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0087 NRVA02D-153X MF R 15kØ 1/10W±0.5%R0088 NRVA02D-152X MF R 1.5kØ 1/10W±0.5%

R0089 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR0090 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR0151-54 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0155 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0157 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0159 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0202 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0210 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R0211 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR0212 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0213 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0214 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W JR0215 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR0216 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR0217 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0218 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J

R0223 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0229 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR0230 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0231 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0232 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0233 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR0234 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0235-36 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R0238 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR0239 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR0241 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR0242 NRSA63J-474X MG R 470kØ 1/16W JR0243-44 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0247 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0251 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR0253 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W J

R0254 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR0255 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR0258 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0259 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0261 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0262 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0263 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR0265 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R0269 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR0270 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0301-02 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0303-04 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0305-06 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0331-34 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0371-74 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0375-76 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W J

R0377-78 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR0381 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0382 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0384-87 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0391-92 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0393-94 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR0395-96 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0401 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W J

R0402 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0458 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0459 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR0501-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0503 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0504-05 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0507-08 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0509 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W J

RESISTOR

R0518 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0519-21 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR0522-23 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0527 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR0528-29 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0532-33 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0558-61 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0564-65 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R0566-67 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR0568 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0571 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0573 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR0574 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0906 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

CAPACITORC0081 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0082 QENC1HM-475Z BP E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0083 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0084 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0085 NCB21HK-473X C CAP. 0.047µF 50V KC0086 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0087-88 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0089 QBTC1CK-335Z TAN.CAP. 3.3µF 16V K

C0090 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0091 QBTC1CK-106Z TAN.CAP. 10µF 16V KC0092-93 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0094 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0095 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0151-52 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0153-54 NCB31HK-332X C CAP. 3300pF 50V KC0155-56 NCB21HK-333X C CAP. 0.033µF 50V K

C0157-58 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0159 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0160 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0205 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC0206 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0211 QENC1EM-106Z BP E CAP. 10µF 25V MC0212 NDC31HJ-101X C CAP. 100pF 50V JC0213 NDC31HJ-470X C CAP. 47pF 50V J

C0214 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC0215 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0223 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0226 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0231-33 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0234 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0235 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0236 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C0237 NCB31HK-472X C CAP. 4700pF 50V KC0238-39 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0241-45 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0246 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC0247-49 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0251 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC0252 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0255 NDC31HJ-390X C CAP. 39pF 50V J

C0263 NDC31HJ-150X C CAP. 15pF 50V JC0264 QENC1HM-474Z BP E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0265 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0309-10 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC0311-12 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC0331 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0332 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0333 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V M

C0334 NCB21HK-273X C CAP. 0.027µF 50V KC0335 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0336 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0337 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0338 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0339 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0340 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0343 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

Page 114: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702

No. 51907B 49

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

36F

702

CAPACITOR

C0344-45 QENC1HM-225Z BP E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0371-72 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0373 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0391-92 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0401 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0402-03 NCF21CZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 16V ZC0404 QFV71HJ-224Z MF CAP. 0.22µF 50V JC0407 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V M

C0410-11 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC0412-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0501-02 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0503 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MC0504 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0505 QENC1HM-474Z BP E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0508 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0509 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C0511 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0512-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0517 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0520-21 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0531-32 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0538-39 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

COILL0202 QQL244K-150Z COIL 15µH KL0211 QQL244K-4R7Z COIL 4.7µH KL0261 QQL244K-150Z COIL 15µH K

DIODED0391-92 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0501-05 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0507-09 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0511 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0515-19 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0521 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODE

TRANSISTORQ0211-12 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0218 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0219 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0251 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0252 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0253 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0261-62 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0263 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

Q0301-02 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0381-82 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0384-87 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0453 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0454 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0509 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC0001 UPC1851BCU I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0151 NJM2150AD I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0201 TC90A53N I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC0371 BA15218N I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0381 TC4066BP/N/ I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC0401 LA4485 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0501 CXA2089Q-X I.C(MONO-ANA)

OTHERSJ0501 QNZ0454-001 PIN JACKJ0502 QNN0349-001 PIN JACKJ0503 QNN0348-001 PIN JACKW0003 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0011 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0031-33 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0050 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0060 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W0085-87 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0099 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0105 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0109 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0115-17 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0131 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0142 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0148 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W0151 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0158 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0162-65 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0169-72 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0174 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0176-80 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0184 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W0186-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTSLIST (RM-C303G-1A)! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

UR52EC1286C BATTERY COVER

Page 115: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F802

50 No. 51907B

PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST(AV-36F802)MAIN PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-1547A-M2)

RESISTORR1001 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1002-04 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1011 NRSA63J-820X MG R 82Ø 1/16W JR1012 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1013 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1014 QRE121J-101Y C R 100Ø 1/2W JR1015 NRSA63J-180X MG R 18Ø 1/16W JR1016 NRSA63J-270X MG R 27Ø 1/16W J

R1018 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1020 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1021 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1022 NRSA63J-151X MG R 150Ø 1/16W JR1023 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1024 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1025 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1026 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J

R1028 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR1029 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1030 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1038 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1039 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1041 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1042-43 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1044-46 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R1047 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1048 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1101-02 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1111 NRSA63J-105X MG R 1MØ 1/16W JR1131 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1132 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1133 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1134 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W J

R1135-39 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1140 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1155 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1156 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1201 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1231 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1237 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1238 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J

R1241 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1243 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR1281 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1282 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1283 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR1286 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1287 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1288 NRSA02J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/10W J

R1289 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1290 NRSA02J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/10W JR1292 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1293 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1301-03 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1304-06 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1318 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1319 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R1354-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1356 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1359 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1360 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1401 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1403 QRX01GJ-1R0 MF R 1.0Ø 1W JR1404 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1405 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1407 NRSA02J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/10W JR1411-12 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1414 QRL029J-151 OM R 150Ø 2W JR1417 QRE121J-180Y C R 18Ø 1/2W JR1431 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1432 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1433 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1434 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W J

RESISTOR

R1435 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1440 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1441 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1502 NRSA63J-271X MG R 270Ø 1/16W JR1503 QRE121J-103Y C R 10kØ 1/2W JR1504 QRL039J-122 OM R 1.2kØ 3W JR1505 QRL039J-152 OM R 1.5kØ 3W J

R1507 QRF074J-2R0 UNF R 2.0Ø 7W JR1511 QRE121J-220Y C R 22Ø 1/2W JR1512 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1513 QRL039J-273 OM R 27kØ 3W JR1515 QRE141J-0R0Y C R 0.0Ø 1/4W J

! R1523 QRJ146J-333X C R 33kØ 1/4W J! R1525 QRZ9011-470 F R 47Ø 1/2W J

R1526 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W J

R1527 QRE121J-154Y C R 150kØ 1/2W JR1528 QRE121J-124Y C R 120kØ 1/2W JR1529 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J

! R1531 QRJ146J-391X C R 390Ø 1/4W JR1532 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1533-34 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W J

! R1535 NRSA02D-242X MG R 2.4kØ 2W D! R1537 NRVA02D-752X MF R 7.5kØ 2W D

R1538 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1543 QRE121J-122Y C R 1.2kØ 1/2W JR1544 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1545 QRE121J-822Y C R 8.2kØ 1/2W JR1546 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1547 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1548 QRE121J-821Y C R 820Ø 1/2W JR1553 QRL039J-390 OM R 39Ø 3W J

R1581 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1582 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1583 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1584 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR1585 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1586 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1587 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1588 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W J

R1589 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1590 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1591 QRJ149J-220 C R 22Ø 1/4W JR1592 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR1593 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1594 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1595 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1601-06 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W J

R1607-09 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1651-52 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1700-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1704-05 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1706-07 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1708-09 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1714 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1715 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1718 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1721-28 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1729 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1731-32 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1733-34 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1737 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1738 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1739 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W J

R1740 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1741 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1742-43 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1745 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1748 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1749-51 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1752 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1753 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

Page 116: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F802

No. 51907B 51

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

36F

802

RESISTORR1754 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1755 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1756 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1762 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1763 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1764-68 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1769-70 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1772 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1774 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1775 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1776 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1777 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1778 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1784 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1786 NRSA63J-393X MG R 39kØ 1/16W JR1788 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W J

R1790 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1791 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1792 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1793-95 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1798-99 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1800 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1806 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1807 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R1810 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1811 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1812 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1814 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1815 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1816 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1817 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1818 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R1821 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1824 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1827 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1857 QRG029J-330 OM R 33Ø 2W JR1858 QRG029J-180 OM R 18Ø 2W JR1860 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1901 QRF074K-R47 UNF R 0.47Ø 7W KR1909 QRG01GJ-470 OM R 47Ø 1W J

R1911 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1912 QRT029J-R18 MF R 0.18Ø 2W JR1913 QRT029J-R15 MF R 0.15Ø 2W J

! R1914 QRK126J-681X C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1915 QRE121J-270Y C R 27Ø 1/2W J

! R1917 QRK126J-332X C R 3.3kØ 1/2W JR1918 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1919 QRE121J-684Y C R 680kØ 1/2W J

R1924 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1930 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1939 QRT039J-2R2 MF R 2.2Ø 3W JR1940 QRE121J-181Y C R 180Ø 1/2W JR1941 QRL029J-183 OM R 18kØ 2W JR1943 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1944 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR1951 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J

R1952 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1953 QRE121J-151Y C R 150Ø 1/2W JR1972 NRVA02D-102X MF R 1kØ 1/10W±0.5%R1973 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1975 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1977 QRE121J-473Y C R 47kØ 1/2W JR1978 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W J

CAPACITORC1001 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1002 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1003 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1011-12 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1014 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1015-16 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1021 QFV71HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1023 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M

CAPACITOR

C1024 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1025 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1026 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1027 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1028 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1029 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1030 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1034 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C1036 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1037 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1038 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1041-42 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1043-44 NDC31HJ-470X C CAP. 47pF 50V JC1045 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1046 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1047 NDC21HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V J

C1048 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1111 QETN0JM-228Z E CAP. 2200µF 6.3V MC1112 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1113 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1114 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1115 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1116 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1131 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V J

C1132 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1133 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V JC1134 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1135 NDC31HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V JC1136 QENC1CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 16V MC1150 NCF21CZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 16V ZC1151 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1152 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

C1201 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1202 QETN1HM-224Z E CAP. 0.22µF 50V MC1203 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1233 NDC31HJ-560X C CAP. 56pF 50V JC1237 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1281 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V JC1282 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1283 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C1284 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC1285 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1286 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1287 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1288 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1302 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1352 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1354 QFV71HJ-154Z MF CAP. 0.15µF 50V J

C1391 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1392 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1393-95 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1401 NDC21HJ-152X C CAP. 1500pF 50V JC1403 NCB21HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1404 QEHR1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1405 QCS32HJ-100Z CH C CAP. 10µF 500V JC1407 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V J

C1410 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V JC1411 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1415 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1421 QEHQ1VM-108 E CAP. 1000µF 35V MC1431 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1432 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1501 QCB32HK-151Z C CAP. 150pF 500V KC1502 QCB32HK-331Z C CAP. 330pF 500V K

C1503 QETN2CM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 160V MC1504 QEZ0203-107 E CAP. 100µF 160V MC1505 QENC2AM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 100V MC1507 QEZ0195-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1510 QFZ0196-272 MPP CAP. 2700pF 1.5kVH ±3%C1513 QFZ0198-153 MPP CAP. 0.015µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1514 QFP32JJ-223 PP CAP. 0.022µF 630V JC1515 QFZ0197-474 MPP CAP. 0.47µF 250V Z

Page 117: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F802

52 No. 51907B

CAPACITORC1516 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1521 QETN2EM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 250V MC1523 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1524 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1525 QETN1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1526 QFV21HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1527 QFLC2AJ-103Z M CAP. 0.01µF 100V J

! C1531 QCB32HK-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 500V K

! C1533 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1551-52 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V JC1553 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1601-06 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1607 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1608 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1609-11 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1612 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

C1663-64 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1700 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1703 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC1706 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1707 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1710 NCB21EK-683X C CAP. 0.068µF 25V KC1712 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1714 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

C1721 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1722-23 NDC31HJ-390X C CAP. 39pF 50V JC1724 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF 50V JC1726 NDC21HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC1800 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1801 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1802 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1803 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

C1804 NDC31HJ-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V JC1805 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1806-07 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1810 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1811 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1813 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1816 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1851 QETN1EM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 25V M

C1852 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1853-54 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1856 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1857 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V M

! C1904-06 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z! C1907 QEZ0169-477 E CAP. 470µF 200V M! C1908 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z

C1912 QCZ0340-332 C CAP. 3300pF

C1913 QFLC1HJ-471Z M CAP. 470pF 50V JC1914 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1916 NDC31HJ-331X C CAP. 330pF 50V JC1917 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1918 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1919 QFP32GJ-103 PP CAP. 0.01µF 400V JC1925 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC1931 QEZ0203-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V M

C1932 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1933 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V MC1934-35 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1937 QCZ0340-102 C CAP. 1000pFC1938 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V MC1939-40 QCB32HK-152Z C CAP. 1500pF 500V KC1942 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1943 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V M

C1948 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1951 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1971 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1972 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1973 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

! C1998-99 QCZ9074-103 C CAP. 0.01µF 250V M

TRANSFORMERT1501 CE42034-002 H.DRIVE TRANSF.

! T1502 QQH0110-001 FBT! T1921 QQS0090-001 SWITCH.TRANSF.! T1951 QQT0315-001 POWER TRANSF.

COILL1001 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1012 QQLZ014-R39 PEAKING COIL 0.39µHL1021 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1022 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1027 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1041 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1042 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1101 QQL244K-470Z COIL 47µH K

L1232 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1511 CE41029-00A LINEARITY COILL1512 QQLZ027-821 CHOKE COIL 820µHL1521 QQLZ018-760 HEATER CHOKE 76µHL1700 QQL244K-4R7Z COIL 4.7µH KL1810 QQL244J-100Z COIL 10µH JL1931 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH KL1933-34 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K

L1937 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K

DIODED1010 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1101-02 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1305-10 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1352 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1353 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1401 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1431 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1432 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

! D1501 RH3G-F1 SI.DIODE! D1502 RU3AM-LFC4 SI.DIODE

D1507 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1521 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODED1523-24 EL1Z-T3 SI.DIODED1525-26 1SS81-T5 SI.DIODED1527 1SR124-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1529 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODE

! D1531 MA4068N/Z1/-T2 ZENER DIODED1535 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1537 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1601-06 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1700 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1701-02 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1706-10 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1711-15 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODE

D1721-22 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1723-24 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1800 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODED1801 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1810 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1811 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

! D1901 RBV-406M BRIDGE DIODED1910 MA700A-T2 SI.DIODE

! D1911-13 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1914 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1915 SARS01-T2 SI.DIODED1917 MTZJ30A-T2 ZENER DIODED1918 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1920 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

! D1930 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1931 RU30A-F1 SI.DIODE

Page 118: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F802

No. 51907B 53

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

36F

802

DIODE

D1933 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1935 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1937 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1941 MTZJ33A-T2 ZENER DIODED1945 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1952-53 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1954-57 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1972 MTZJ15C-T2 ZENER DIODE

D1973 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

TRANSISTORQ1011 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1021 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1024 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1025 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1041 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1131-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1153-54 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1232-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1352 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1431 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1440 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1501 2SC4212/Z1/ SI.TRANSISTORQ1511 2SD2645-YD TRANSISTOR

! Q1531 2SC2785/JH/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1532 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1541-42 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

! Q1543 2SD1408/OY/-LB SI.TRANSISTORQ1551 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1552 2SA966/OY/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1700 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1701 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1703 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1705 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1706 DTC363TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR

Q1711 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1810 DTC144EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1941 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1951 2SD1383K/AB/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1971 2SA1123/R/Z1-T SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC1101 TB1253AN I.C(M)IC1151 TC4066BF/N/-XE I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC1401 LA7841 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1501 LA6515 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1601 M52055FP-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1651 PQ3RD13 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1701 MN1876478JL1 I.C(MICRO-COMP)IC1702 AT24C04-F802Y I.C(MEMORY-OTH) (SERVICE)

IC1703 MM1437AF-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1851 AN7812F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1852 AN7809F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1853 AN7805F I.C(MONO-ANA)

! IC1911 STR-F6626/F3 I.C(HYBRID)! IC1921 SE135N I.C(HYBRID)

OTHERSCF1001 QAX0349-001 CERAMIC FILTERCF1021 QAX0639-001Z CERAMIC FILTERCF1041 QAX0642-001Z CERAMIC FILTER

! CP1932-34 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1936 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! F1905 QMFZ034-5R0Z-J1 FUSE! FR1521 QRK126J-150X C R 15Ø 1/2W J! FR1523-24 QRX029J-3R3 MF R 3.3Ø 2W J

OTHERS! FR1525 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7Ø 1/4W J

J1601-02 QNN0349-002 PIN JACKJ1810 QNS0001-001 JACKK1401 QQR0621-002Z BEADS COREK1912 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1916-17 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1920 QQR0872-002 FERRITE BEADSK1931-33 QQR0582-001Z BEADS CORE

K1935 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1937 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1939 QQR0621-002Z BEADS CORELC1601-06 NQR0169-001X EMI FILTER

! PC1921 TLP621(B) I.C(PH.COUPLER)! RY1941 QSK0120-001 RELAY! RY1951 QSK0113-001 RELAY

SF1011 QAX0324-002 SAW FILTER

! TH1901 CEKP007-002 P.THERMISTOR! TU1001 QAU0234-001 TUNER

W1106 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1111 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1113 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1131 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1140 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1162 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1195 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1202 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1206 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1212-14 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1250 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1254-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1265 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1267 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1269 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1274 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1291 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1298 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1310-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1313 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1330-31 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1381 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1385 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1404 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1408 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1413 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1416 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1434-35 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1437-38 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1440 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1442-43 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1447-48 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1454-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1464 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1478 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1487-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1492-96 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1498 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1503 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1508 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1510-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1514-16 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1523-28 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1536 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W1540 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1542 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1546 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1548-49 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1557-59 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1564 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1567-69 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1572 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

Page 119: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F802

54 No. 51907B

OTHERSW1575-81 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1584-85 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1587 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1590-91 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1600 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1604 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1612 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JX1201 CE40668-001Z CRYSTAL

X1700 QAX0307-001 CER.RESONATORY1002-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1150 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1152 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1156 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1652-54 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1701 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1703 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

Y1712 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1714 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1800 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1902-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1911 NDC31HJ-101X C CAP. 100pF 50V J

DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-2605A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

Refer to PARTS LIST in page 46 for this PW BOARD.

CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-3513A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

Refer to PARTS LIST in page 46 for this PW BOARD.

FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8507A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

Refer to PARTS LIST in page 47 for this PW BOARD.

POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8601A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

Refer to PARTS LIST in page 47 for this PW BOARD.

LF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-9506A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

Refer to PARTS LIST in page 47 for this PW BOARD.

RESISTORR0001-02 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0003-04 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0005 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0011 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0121 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0301 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR0303 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0304 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J

R0306 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0307-08 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR0309 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0311 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0313 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0314 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0316 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR0317 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R0331 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0337 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0343 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

CAPACITORC0003-04 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0006 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0008 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0301-02 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC0312-13 NDC31HJ-270X C CAP. 27pF 50V JC0314 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0315 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0316-18 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V K

C0319 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0320 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0321 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0322 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0323 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0324-25 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0326 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0327 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V M

C0328 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0329 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0330 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0331 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0333 NDC31HJ-680X C CAP. 68pF 50V J

COILL0302-04 QQL244J-6R8Z COIL 6.8µH J

DIODED0301 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

TRANSISTORQ0301-03 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC0001 AN7805F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0301 SDA9389X-X I.C(DIGI-MOS)

OTHERS! TU0001 QAU0206-001 TUNER

W0047 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0066 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JX0301 QAX0521-001Z CRYSTALY0301-02 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY0331-33 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

PIP PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC0P501A-M2)

Page 120: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F802

No. 51907B 55

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

36F

802

RESISTORR0081 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0082 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0083 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR0084 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR0085 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR0086 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0087 NRVA02D-153X MF R 15kØ 1/10W±0.5%R0088 NRVA02D-152X MF R 1.5kØ 1/10W±0.5%

R0089 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR0090 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR0151-54 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0155 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0157 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0159 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0202 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0301-02 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J

R0303-04 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0305-06 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0331-34 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0371-74 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0375-76 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0377-78 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR0381 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0382 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W J

R0384-87 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0391-92 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0393-94 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR0395-96 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0401 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR0402 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0458 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0459 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W J

R0501-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0503 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0504-05 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0507-08 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0509 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0510-11 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0518 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0519-21 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W J

R0522-23 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0527 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR0528-29 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0532-35 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0558-61 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0564-65 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0566-67 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR0568 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R0571 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0573 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR0901 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0906 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

CAPACITORC0081 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0082 QENC1HM-475Z BP E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0083 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0084 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0085 NCB21HK-473X C CAP. 0.047µF 50V KC0086 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0087-88 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0089 QBTC1CK-335Z TAN.CAP. 3.3µF 16V K

C0090 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0091 QBTC1CK-106Z TAN.CAP. 10µF 16V KC0092-93 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0094 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0095 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0151-52 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0153-54 NCB31HK-332X C CAP. 3300pF 50V KC0155-56 NCB21HK-333X C CAP. 0.033µF 50V K

AV SELECTOR PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC0S505A-M2)

CAPACITORC0157-58 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0159 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0160 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0309-10 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC0311-12 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC0331 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0332 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0333 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V M

C0334 NCB21HK-273X C CAP. 0.027µF 50V KC0335 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0336 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0337 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0338 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0339 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0340 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0343 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

C0344-45 QENC1HM-225Z BP E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0371-72 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0373 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0391-92 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0401 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0402-03 NCF21CZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 16V ZC0404 QFV71HJ-224Z MF CAP. 0.22µF 50V JC0407 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V M

C0410-11 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC0412-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0501-02 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0503 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MC0504 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0505 QENC1HM-474Z BP E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0508 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0509 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C0511 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0512-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0517 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0520-23 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0533-34 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0538-39 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

DIODED0391-92 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0501-05 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0507-09 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0511 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0515-19 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0521 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0527-28 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODE

TRANSISTORQ0301-02 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0381-82 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0384-87 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0453 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0454 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0509 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC0001 UPC1851BCU I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0151 NJM2150AD I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0371 BA15218N I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0381 TC4066BP/N/ I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC0401 LA4485 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0501 CXA2089Q-X I.C(MONO-ANA)

Page 121: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-36F802

56 No. 51907B

OTHERSJ0501 QNZ0454-001 PIN JACKJ0502 QNN0349-001 PIN JACKJ0503-04 QNN0348-001 PIN JACKW0003 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0011 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0031-33 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0050 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0085-87 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W0099 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0109 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0115 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0117 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0142 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0148 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0151 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

W0158 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0162-64 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0170 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0172 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0176-80 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0184 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0186-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

3D Y/C MODULE PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-0Y501A)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

OTHERSSAC-0Y501A 3D Y/C MODILE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTSLIST (RM-C301G-2A)! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

UR52EC1286C BATTERY COVER

Page 122: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 57

PACKING PARTS LIST! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

1 CP30055-A02-A TOP COVER2 CP30056-004-A POLY BAG3 RM-C301G-2A RC HAND UNIT (AV-36F702)3 RM-C303G-1A RC HAND UNIT (AV-36F802)4 LC11157-002A-A CUSHION ASSY 4pcs in 1set5 LC10181-030A-A PACKING CASE

! 6 LCT0821-001E-A INST BOOK [ENGLISH]7 CM36616-001-A CORNER LABEL 2pcs in 1set

8 BT-51028-1Q REGIST CARD9 BT-52004-1Q WARRANTY CARD10 QPA02503505 POLY BAG

PACKING

7

75

1

4

2

10

3 6

8 9

4

4

Page 123: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

COLOR TELEVISIONUSER'S GUIDE

For models:AV-36F802AV-36F702AV-32F802AV-32F702AV-27F802AV-27F702

Illustration of AV-27F802 and RM-C301G

IMPORTANT NOTE TO THE CUSTOMERIn the spaces below, enter the model and serial number of your television (locat-ed at the rear of the television cabinet). Staple your sales receipt or invoice tothe inside cover of this guide. Keep this user's guide in a convenient place for

future reference. Keep the carton and original packaging for future use.

Model NumberSerial Number

LCT0821-001E-A0901-TN-FAA-JIM

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 1

Page 124: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOTEXPOSE THIS TV SET TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION: TO INSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THEFOLLOWING RULES REGARDING THE USE OFTHIS UNIT.

1.Operate only from the power source specified on the unit.2. Avoid damaging the AC plug and power cord.3. Avoid Improper installation and never position the unit where good venti-

lation is unattainable.4. Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.5.In the event of trouble, unplug the unit and call a service technician.Do

not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.

Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the warranty.

* When you don’t use this TV set for a long period of time, be sure to dis-connect both the power plug from the AC outlet and antenna for yoursafety.

* To prevent electric shock do not use this polarized plug with an extensioncord, receptacle or other outlet unless the blades can be fully inserted toprevent blade exposure.

CAUTION:To reduce the risk of electric shock.Do not remove cover (or back).

No user serviceable parts inside.Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, with-in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert theuser to the presence of uninsulated “dangerousvoltage” within the product’s enclosure that maybe of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk ofelectric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral trian-gle is intended to alert the user to the presenceof important operating and maintenance (servic-ing) instructions in the literature accompanyingthe appliance.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCKDO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 2

Page 125: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

CAUTION:

Please read and retain for your safety.Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This TV set has been engineered andmanufactured to assure your personal safety. But improper use can result in potential electricalshock or fire hazards. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this TVset,observe the following basic rules for its installation, use and servicing.And also follow all warnings and instructions marked on your TV set.

INSTALLATION1 Your TV set is equipped with a polarized AC line plug (one blade of the plug is wider than the

other).

This safety feature allows the plug to fit into the power outlet only one way. Should you beunable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug.Should it still fail to fit, contact your electrician.

2 Operate the TVset only from a power source as indicated on the TV set or refer to the oper-ating instructions for this information. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to yourhome, consult your TV set dealer or local power company.For battery operation, refer to theoperating instructions.

3 Overloaded AC outlets and extension cords are dangerous, and so are frayed power cordsand broken plugs. They may result in a shock or fire hazard. Call your service technician forreplacement.

4 Do not allow anything to rest on or roll over the power cord, and do not place the TV setwhere power cord is subject to traffic or abuse. This may result in a shock or fire hazard.

5 Do not use this TV set near water — for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, orlaundry tub, in a wet basement, or near swimming pool, etc.

6 If an outside antenna is connected to the TV set, be sure the antenna system is grounded soas to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section810 of the National Electrical Code provides information with respect to proper grounding ofthe mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna dischargeunit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection require-ments for the grounding electrode.

(POLARIZED-TYPE)

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 3

Page 126: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

7 An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines orother electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits.When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep fromtouching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.

8 TV sets are provided with ventilation openings in the cabinet to allow heat generated duringoperation to be released.Therefore:— Never block the bottom ventilation slots of a portable TV set by placing it on a bed, sofa,

rug, etc.— Never place a TV set in a “built-in” enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided.— Never cover the openings with a cloth or other material.— Never place the TV set near or over a radiator or heat register.

9 To avoid personal injury:— Do not place a TV set on a sloping shelf unless properly secured.— Use only a cart or stand recommended by the TVset manufacturer.— Do not try to roll a cart with small casters across thresholds or deep pile carpets.—Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting kit approved by the manufacturer.

USE10 Caution children about dropping or pushing objects into the TV set through cabinet open-

ings. Some internal parts carry hazardous voltages and contact can result in a fire or elec-trical shock.

11 Unplug the TV set from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or an aerosolcleaner.

12 Never add accessories to a TV set that has not been designed for this purpose. Such addi-tions may result in a hazard.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDINGAS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 4

Page 127: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

13 For added protection of the TV set during a lightning storm or when the TV set is to be leftunattended for an extended period of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect theantenna.This will prevent damage to product due to lightning storms or power line surges.

14 A TVset and cart combination should be moved withcare. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven sur-faces may cause the TV set and cart combination tooverturn.

SERVICE15 Unplug this TV set from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:A.When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.B. If liquid has been spilled into the TV set.C. If the TV set has been exposed to rain or water.D. If the TV set does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust

only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions as improper adjustmentof other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali-fied technician to restore the TV set to normal operation.

E.If the TV set has been dropped or damaged in any way.F.When the TV set exhibits a distinct change in performance — this indicates a need for

service.

16 Do not attempt to service this TV set yourself as opening or removing covers may exposeyou to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service person-nel.

17 When replacement parts are required, have the service technician verify in writing that thereplacement parts he uses have the same safety characteristics as the original parts. Useof manufacturer’s specified replacement parts can prevent fire, shock, or other hazards.

18 Upon completion of any service or repairs to this TV set, please ask the service technicianto perform the safety check described in the manufacturer’s service literature.

19 When a TV set reaches the end of its useful life, improper disposal could result in a picturetube implosion.Ask a qualified service technician to dispose of the TV set.

20 Note to CATV system installer.This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 ofthe NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that thecable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to thepoint of cable entry as practical.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 5

Page 128: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

PICTURE SETTINGS . . . . . . . 34Tint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Bright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Noise Muting . . . . . . . . . . . 35Set Video Status . . . . . . . . . . 35

SOUND SETTINGS . . . . . . . 36Bass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6Treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36MTS (Multi-channel Sound) . . . . 36

GENERAL ITEMS . . . . . . . . 37Purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . 37TV Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38V4 Component-In/V2 Component-In . . . . . . . . . 39Closed Caption . . . . . . . . . . 39

BUTTON FUNCTIONS . . . . . . 40Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Exit and PIP Off . . . . . . . . . 40Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Video Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Sleep Timer . . . . . . . . . . . 41Hyper Surround . . . . . . . . . 41Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41BBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42100+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Return+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42VCR Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 43DV D Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 4 3TV/CATV Switch . . . . . . . . . . 43VCR/DVD Switch . . . . . . . . . 43Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

PIP (Picture-In-Picture) . . . . . 44Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . 44On/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Channel +/– . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . .46Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 46Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Authorized Service Centers . . 49Search Codes . . . . . . . . . . 50Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .51

Table of ContentsUNPACKING YOUR TV . . . . . 7

QUICK SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . 8Getting Started . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Control . . . . . . . . . 8Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . 8Making Basic Connections . . . 9Plug In Menu . . . . . . . . . . 10

CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . 11Cable and VCR Connections . . . . . . . 11Connecting to a DVD Player . . . . . . . . 14Connecting to an External Amplifier . . . . 15Connecting to a Camcorder . . . . . . . . 15Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link . . . . 6

REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . 17Remote Control Basics . . . . . 17Changing the Batteries . . . . . 17

REMOTE PROGRAMMING . . . 18CATV and Satellite Codes . . . 18VCR Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 19DVD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 20

ONSCREEN MENUS . . . . . . 21Using the Guide . . . . . . . . 21The Onscreen Menus . . . . . . 21

PLUG IN MENU . . . . . . . . . 22Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . 22Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Auto Tuner Setup . . . . . . . . 22Auto Clock Set . . . . . . . . . 23Manual Clock Set . . . . . . . . 24Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CHANNEL SUMMARY . . . . . 25Channel Summary . . . . . . . 25

V–CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26US V–Chip Ratings . . . . . . . 27Setting US V–Chip Ratings . . . 28Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Set Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . 29Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . 30Directions for Movie Settings . 30Canadian V–Chip Ratings . . . 31Canadian V–Chip Directions . . 31Unrated Programs . . . . . . . 32Set Lock Code . . . . . . . . . 33

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 6

Page 129: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Two AA Batteries1 Television

1 Remote Control

Thank you for your purchase of a JVC Color Television. Before you begin setting up your newtelevision, please check to make sure you have all of the following items. In addition to thisguide, your television box should include:

Once you have unpacked your television, the next step is to connect it to your antenna/cableor satellite system and to connect the audio/video devices you want to use with your televi-sion. To make these connections you will use plugs like the ones illustrated below.

A/V Input PlugRF ConnectorsUsed to connect acoaxial cable from anexternal antenna or CableTV system.

A matching TV stand is also available(optional).

Used to make video con-nections with VCRs,DVDs, Camcorders, etc(optional).

Used to connect JVC AVCompu Link capable components foran automated home the-ater.

Used to connectaudio/video devices likeVCRs, DVD players, stereoamplifiers, game consoles,etc.

S-Video Plug

AV Compu Link Cable

We recommend that before you start using your new television, you read your entire User’sGuide so you can learn about your new television’s many great features. But if you’re anxiousto start using your television right away, a quick setup guide follows on the next three pages.

Unpacking Your Television

7

Note: Your remote control may differ fromthe example illustratedhere.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 7

Page 130: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

8

Slide the cover on the back of the remote down towards the bottom of the remote control.Insert two batteries (included) carefully noting the “+”and “–” markings, placing the “–”end inthe unit first. Slide the cover back into place.

Getting StartedThese quick setup pages will provide you, in three easy steps, with the basic information youneed to begin using your new television right away. This information includes basic instructionson operating your remote control, making a simple cable/antenna and optional VCR connectionand, finally, information on programming your television's Auto Tuner.

If you have questions, or for more detailed information on any of these steps, please consultother sections of this manual.

Step One - The Remote ControlThe remote control is the key to operating your television's many great features. Before youcan operate your remote control, you first need to install the batteries (included).

Basic OperationTurn the television on and off by pressing the POWER button at the top right corner of theremote.

The four key feature buttons at the center of the remote can be used for basic operation of the television.The top and bottom buttons will scan forward and back through the available chan-nels. The right and left buttons will turn the volume up or down.These buttons are also markedwith four arrows and are also used with JVC's onscreen menu system. You will need to usethese buttons later in the Quick Setup.

The next step is to connect your television to an antenna or cable.

Power Button Key Feature Buttons

+Proceed to Step Two

Quick Setup 1

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 8

Page 131: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

9

Cable/RF connector

Step Two - Making Basic ConnectionsNext you will need to connect your television to an antenna or cable system. The most basic antenna/cable connection is shown below. For more detailed connections, such as ones wherea cable box is required, see pages 11 to 13.

1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video input.

2) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.

3) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.

Finally, once you have finished your connections, plug the power cord into the nearest poweroutlet and turn on the television.

1) Connect an RF cable out from the wall outlet in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.

+Proceed to Step Three

Quick Setup 2

Illustration of AV-27F802

You may also wish to connect a VCR at this point. A basic VCR connection is shown below.For detailed instructions on connecting a other components or a home theater system, seepages 14 to 16.

NOTE: A VCRis not required to operate your television.

Illustration of AV-27F802

AV Cables/Plugs

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 9

Page 132: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

10

Press the buttons to move to AUTO TUNER SETUPPress the buttons to begin AUTO TUNER SETUP

To choose CABLE (if you are connected to a cable system) or AIR (if you use an antenna)To move to STARTTo start Auto Tuner Setup

The Auto Tuner will now memorize all of the clear, active channels your television canreceive. This will take one or two minutes.

NOW PROGRAMMING!

48

TUNER MODE : CABLE AIR

START

Step Three - The Plug In MenuWhen you turn your television on for the first time the Plug In Menu will appear. This menusets some of the basic settings for your television. A complete description of the Plug In Menucan be found starting on page 22. We recommend you complete the Plug In Menu itemsbefore you start using your television. But to begin watching your television right away you onlyneed to run the Auto Tuner Setup. This lets your television learn the channels it is able toreceive. To run the Auto Tuner Setup follow the steps below.

The Auto Tuner is finished when the message PROGRAMMING OVER! appears onscreen.

Your Quick Setup is now complete. You can now begin watching your television, or you cancontinue on in this guide for more information on connecting audio/video devices, programmingyour remote control, or using the JVC onscreen menu system to customize your televisionviewing experience.

PLUG IN MENU

LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK

FINISH

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY

EXIT

The Quick Setup is complete

Quick Setup 3

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 10

Page 133: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.

2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RF Outputs on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the back of the VCR.

3) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on theback of the TV.

4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Inputjack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.

5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input Jack.

6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.

• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio Input.

• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.

There are three basic types of antenna or cable connections:• If you have an antenna or have a cable system that does not require you use a cable box

to select channels, please refer to Diagram #1.• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access all the chan-

nels, please refer to Diagram #2. If you cannot operate your Picture-In-Picture function using Diagram #2, try the connection shown in Diagram #3. It is possible yocable box allows the signal of only one channel at a time to be sent to your television.

• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access certain premium channels, but not “basic”cable channels, please refer to Diagram #3.

• For your convenience, connection to a VCR is also shown in the following diagrams. AVCR is not necessary for operation of the television or Picture-In-Picture (PIP) function.You may omit the VCR from your connections if you wish.

• For instructions on connecting a VCR only, please see the Quick Setup on page 9.• For information on using PIP, please see page 44.

• The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 and AV-27F802 only.

Cable and VCR Connections

11

Illustration of AV-27F802

Diagram #1

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 11

Page 134: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

12

1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RFInput of the cablebox.

2) Connect an RF cable from the RFOutput of the cable box, in to the RFInput on the back of the VCR.

3) Connect an RF cable from the RF Output of the VCR, in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.

4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.

5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.

6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.

• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s

Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.

Cable and VCR Connections - Continued

Illustration of AV-27F802

Diagram #2

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 12

Page 135: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

13

The connection diagrams are intended to show some basic general connections.Some cable companies may require special connections to properly use your televi-sion or 2-tuner PIP function. If you follow these diagrams and either the television orPIPdoes not work properly, contact your local cable operator for more connectioninformation. Please see page 44 for more information on the PIP feature.

Cable and VCR Connections - Continued

1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.

2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RFOutputs on the splitter, in to the cable box RFInput.

3) Connect an RF cable from the Cable Box Output, in to the VCR RF Input.4) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the

back of the TV.5) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input

jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Videoinput.

6) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input jack.

7) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.

• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the

TV’s Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.

Illustration of AV-27F802

Diagram #3

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 13

Page 136: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

14

1) Connect Green cable out from DVD player “Y”Component Output, in to TV“Y” ComponentInput.

2) Connect Blue cable out from DVDplayer “PB” Component Output, in to TV “PB” ComponentInput.

3) Connect Red cable out from DVD Player “PR” Component Output, in to TV “PR” ComponentInput.

4) Connect White Audio cable out from DVDLeft Audio Output, in to TV Left Audio Input 2.

5) Connect Red Audio cable out from DVDRight Audio Output, in to TVRight Audio Input 2.

• Green, blue and red are the most common colors for DVD cables . Some models may varycolors. Please consult the user’s manual for your DVD Player for more information.

• Be careful not to confuse the red DVD cable with the red audio cable. It is best to completeone set of connections (DVDor Audio Output) before starting the other to avoid accidentallyswitching the cables.

• See page 20 for instructions on programming your remote control to operate the basic func-tions of your DVD player.

• AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802: You may also connect the DVD player to Input 4. Ifyou use Input 4 for the DVD connection, you must set the V4 COMPONENT-IN on the initialSetup Menu to “YES” for proper display of the DVD signal.

• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702: If you use Input 2 (Component-In) for the DVDcon-nection, you must set the V2 COMPONENT-IN on the initial Setup Menu to “YES” for prop-er display of the DVD signal.

NOTE: Progressive DVDPlayers (players with an output scan of 31.5 KHz) will not work prop-erly with this television.

Connecting to a DVD player

Illustration of AV-27F802

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 14

Page 137: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the Camcorder’s Video Output, in to the TV’s VideoInput jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the Camcorder’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video Input.

2) Connect the white audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’sLeft Audio Input jack.

3) Connect the red audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’sRight Audio Input jack.

• If your Camcorder is a mono sound model it will have only one audio jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio jack.

Connecting to an External Amplifier

Connecting to a Camcorder

1) Connect the white audio cable from the TV’s Left Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s LeftAudio Input jack.

2) Connect the red audio cable from the TV’s Right Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s RightAudio Input jack.

• See also “TV Speaker” and “Audio Out”on page 38 for more information on using externalspeakers.

You may connect a camcorder to your television by using the front Input Jacks (Input 3)located under the front panel door. To access, press lightly on the door to open it. You mayalso connect a game console or other equipment using these jacks. Camcorders may alsobe connected to the television’s rear input jacks.

Illustration of AV-27F802

Illustration of AV-27F802

15

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 15

Page 138: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connections

16

To Connect: Plug one end of the AV Compu Link cable into the AV Compu Link input on yourVCR, DVD, or other Compu Link device. Plug the other end of the AV Compu Link cable intothe AV Compu Link input at the rear of the television.

Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link

JVC’s AV Compu Link feature makes playing video tapes or DVDs totally automatic. Simplyinsert a pre-recorded tape into your JVC-brand VCR or DVD into your JVC DVD player andthe device will automatically turn on and begin playback. At the same time, using the AVCompu Link, the VCR or DVD player sends a signal to the television telling it to turn on andswitch to the proper video input.• The AV Compu Link cable may be included with the JVC AV Compu Link accessory you

wish to connect. If it is not, contact an authorized JVCService Center forpart # EWP 805-012.

• AV Compu Link can only be used with JVC-brand products.

NOTE:• In order for the VCR playback to begin automatically, the recording tabs must be remove from

the VHS tape. If the tab is in place, automatic switching will occur when you push the VCR’sPLAY button.

• The AV Compu Link cable has a male 3.5 mm (mono) plug on each end.• If your JVC-brand VCR has “A Code/B Code Remote Control Switching”(see your VCR’s

instruction book), using VCR A Code will switch the TV to input 1.• To connect a JVC HiFi receiver or amplifier for a completely automated home theater, see

the HiFi’s connection instructions for detailed connection information.• AV COMPU LINK EX is compatible with the following receivers:RX-664V, RX-665V,

RX-668VBK, RX-774V, RX-778VBK, RX-884V, RX-888VBK, RX-1024V, RX-1028VBK, andlater receiver models.

Illustration of AV-27F802

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 16

Page 139: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote Control

• Before you can operate the remote control, you must firstinstall the batteries (included). See “Changing theBatteries” at the bottom of this page for instructions. (Foran illustration, please see page 8.)

• Press the POWER button to turn the television on or off.

• Make sure the TV/CATV switch is set to TV. Move theswitch to CATV only if you need to operate a cable box.

• Slide the VCR/DVD selector switch to VCR to control aVCR, slide to DVD to control a DVD player. Please seepages 18 to 20 for instructions on programming yourremote control to operate a Cable box, VCR or DVD player.

• Press the CH+ and CH– buttons to scan through the chan-nels. Tap the CH+ or CH– button to move through thechannels one channel at a time.

• To move rapidly through the channels using JVC’sHyperscan feature, press and hold CH+ or CH–. Thechannels will zip by at a rate of five channels per second.

• Press VOL+ or VOL– to raise or lower the volume. An indi-cator bar will appear onscreen to show you the televisionvolume level.

• The CH+/– and VOL+/– buttons are also used to navigateJVC’s onscreen menu system.

• You can directly access specific channels using the 10-keypad.

• For more information on remote control button features,see pages 40 to 45. For information on using theonscreen menus, see page 21.

Changing the Batteries Push down on the remote’s back cover and slide towards the bottom to remove it.Insert two AA batteries (supplied), carefully noting the "+" and "–" markings on the batteriesand on the remote control. To avoid a potential short circuit, insert the "–" end first. Be sure touse only size AA batteries.When batteries are installed, slide the cover back into place (until it clicks into position).• If the remote control acts erratically, replace the batteries . Typical battery life is six months to

one year. We recommend using alkaline batteries for longer battery life. When you changethe batteries, try to complete the task within three minutes. If you take longer than three min -utes, the remote control codes for your VCR, DVD, and/or Cable Box may have to be reset(see pages 18-20).

Remote Control Basics

NOTE: Remote control model RM-C301G is shown at theleft. A different model remote control may have come withyour television.

17

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 17

Page 140: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote ProgrammingSetting the CATV, VCR and DVD Codes

You can program your remote to operate your cable box, satellite receiver, VCR or DVD player by using the instructions and codes listed below. If the equipment does not respondto any of the codes listed below or to the code search function, use the remote control sup-plied by the manufacturer.

Cable Box or Satellite codesThe remote control is programmed with CATV and/or Satellite codes for power on, power off,channel up, channel down, and 10 key operation.1) Find the CATV/Satellite brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the 2-way selector switch to “CATV”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed using the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the Cable Box/Satellite receiver.

• If your CATVor Satellite box does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If itdoes not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.

18

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 18

Page 141: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote ProgrammingVCR codesThe remote control is programmed with VCR codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, pause, record, channel up, and channel down operation.1) Find the VCR brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the VCR.

• If your VCR does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond toany code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.

• Some manufacturer’s VCR’s may not respond to the TV/VCR button, even if other buttonswork properly.

• To record, hold down the REC button on the remote and press PLAY.

19

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 19

Page 142: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Remote Programming

20

DVD codesThe remote control is programmed with DVD codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, previous chapter, next chapter, tray open/close, and still/pause operation.1) Find the DVD player brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the DVD player.

• If your DVD player does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.

• After you program your remote, some DVD buttons may not work properly. If some buttonsdo not work properly, use the remote control which came with your DVD player.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 20

Page 143: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

To bring up the onscreen menu, press the MENU button on the remote control. The item thatappears in yellow is the one currently selected. If you press the MENU button again, theonscreen display will skip to the next menu screen. If you use the Menu button on the TV’sfront panel instead of the remote, an additional menu screen showing channel number andinput will appear. The “Plug In Menu”will appear the first time the TV is plugged in.NOTE: Menus shown in this book are illustrations, not exact replications of the television’sonscreen displays.

Onscreen Menus

21

Using the Guide

The Onscreen Menus

PLUG IN MENU

LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK

FINISH

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY

EXIT

Certain symbols are used throughout this guide to help you learn about the features of yournew television. The ones you will see most frequently are:

Up and Down arrows mean press the CH+ or CH– buttons. Pressing the CH+ or CH–buttons let you:• Move vertically in a main menu screen• Move through a submenu screen• Move to the next letter, number, or other choice in a submenu• Back up to correct an error• Scan through TVchannels (when not in a menu screen)

Left and right arrows mean press the VOLUME+ or VOLUME– buttons to move left or right to:• Select a highlighted menu item• Select an item in a submenu• Select numbers in certain menu options• Turn the volume up or down (when not in a menu screen)

The “Press Button” icon means you should press the button named on your remote control. (Button names appear in SMALL CAPITAL LETTERS.)

The “Helping Hand”icon points to the highlighted or selected item in a menu.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 21

Page 144: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In MenuIntroduction

Auto Tuner Setup

LanguageYou can choose to view your onscreen menus in three languages:English, French, or Spanish.

Press the MENU button

To LANGUAGE

To choose a language

In Auto Tuner Setup, the TV automatically scans through all available channels, memorizing theactive ones and skipping over blank ones or channels with weak signals. This means when youscan (using the CHANNEL +/– buttons) you will receive only clear, active channels.

Press the MENU button

To AUTO TUNER SETUP

To operate

To choose CABLEor AIR

To move to START

To start Auto Tuner Setup

• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup.• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

NOW PROGRAMMING !

PROGRAMMING OVER!

48

Programming will take approximately 1 to 2 minutes.

• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

The Plug In Menu comes up automatically when you first turn on the TV after plugging it in.The Plug In Menu helps you to get your TV ready to use by letting you set your preferences for:

• The Language in which you want the onscreen menus to appear,• The Auto Tuner Setup of which channels you wish to receive,• Setting the TV’s clock to the correct time so your timer functions will work properly.

Descriptions of each of the Plug In Menu features appear on this page and the next. We rec-ommend you complete the Plug In Menu setup first so your TV is set up just the way you want,right away.

22

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 22

Page 145: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In Menu

23

Auto Clock SetBefore you use any of your TV’s timer functions, you must first set the clock. You may preciselyset your clock using the XDS time signal broadcast by most Public Broadcastingstations.Toset the clock using the XDS signal:

Enter the channel number of your local PBS station

Press MENU

To SETCLOCK

To operate

To AUTO

ToTIME ZONE

To select your time zone

To move to Daylight Savings Time (D.S.T.)

To turn D.S.T. ON or OFF

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• If you do not have a PBS station in your local area, you will have to set the clock manually.See ‘Manual Clock Set’on the next page for instructions.

• The Daylight Savings Time feature automatically adjusts your TV’s clock for Daylight Savings.The clock will move forward one hour at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April.The clock willmove back one hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October.

• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

MODE AUTO MANUAL

TIME ZONE EASTERND.S.T. ON OFF

FINISH

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 23

Page 146: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In Menu

24

Once you have the items in the Plug In Menu set to your personal preferences, move to theFinish option to save your settings.

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• You can change the preferences you set in the Plug In Menu at any time using the regularJVC onscreen menu system.

Manual Clock Set

Finish

NOTE:

You will have to reset the clock after a power interruption. You must set the clock before operat-ing any timer functions.

To set your clock manually (without using the XDS signal), choose MANUAL from the Set Clockmenu and follow the steps below.

To SET CLOCK

To operate

To MANUAL

To move to the hour

To set the hour

To move to minutes

To set the minutes

To move to START CLOCK

To start clock and exit

MODE AUTO MANUAL

TIME --:-- --

START CLOCK

THANK YOU !!

• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 24

Page 147: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Channel SummaryChannel SummaryChannel Summary allows you to customize the line-up of channels received by your TV. Youcan add or delete channels from the line-up or prevent any unauthorized viewers from watchingany or all 181 channels .

Press the MENU button

To CHANNEL SUMMARY

To operate

The Channel Summary screen (above) will now be displayed with the channels set to scanmarked with an "ü". You can delete channels from the scan by removing the "ü". If any chan-nels were missed during Auto Tuner Setup and you wish to add them, you may by placing an"ü" next to the channel number.

To the SCAN column

To include or delete from scan

EXIT when finished

You can block access to a channel by activating the Channel Lock.

To CHANNELSUMMARY

To operate

To the Lock Column

ZERO to lock or unlock that channel

EXIT when finished

Channel Guard Message

When a viewer attempts to watch a guarded channel, the following message appears:

To watch a channel that you have locked,enter the Lock Code using the 10 key pad.If the wrong code is entered, the message“INVALIDLOCK CODE!”will flash on thescreen:

The channel cannot be accessed until the correct code is entered.

• Once a channel has been unlocked, it will remain unlocked until the television is turned off.• See also “Set Lock Code”, page 33.

C H NO. S C A N C H NO. SCAN

0 1 06 ü

0 2 ü 07

0 3 ü 08

0 4 ü 09 ü

0 5 ü 10 ü

THIS CHANNEL IS LOCKED BYCHANNEL GUARD. PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.

NO. - - - -

25

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 25

Page 148: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

26

V-ChipYour TV is equipped with V-Chip technology which enables TV Parental Guidelines (for UnitedStates and Canada) and Movie (MPAA) Guideline controls. V-Chip technology allows you toprogram your TV to receive, or not to receive, programs based on content according to theguidelines. Programs which exceed the ratings limits you set will be blocked. When a viewerattempts to watch a blocked channel, this message appears:

The channel will remain blocked until the correct lock code is entered (see page 33 for informa-tion on setting your lock code).

You can customize the V-Chip settings of your television to match your personal tastes. TheV-Chip menu below is the starting point for your V-Chip settings.

You can use US V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from the United States), Canadian V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from Canada), and movie ratings. You may useany or all of the settings (US V-Chip, Canada V-Chip, Movie ratings). Descriptions for settingeach of the three V-Chip formats appear in the next seven pages along with descriptions of therating categories.

To access the rating categories:

THIS PROGRAMMING EXCEEDSYOUR RATING LIMITS.PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.

NO. - - - -

V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK

FINISH

Special Note about Ratings

Some programs are not broadcast with a ratings signal. Therefore, even if you setup V-Chip ratings limits, these programs will not be blocked. Parents are cautioned to preview the con-

tents of these programs or movies.

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)

Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu

To turn V-Chip ON or OFF (V-Chip must be turned ON for rating settings to operate)

To move to SET US TV RATINGS, SETMOVIE RATINGS, or SET CANADIANRATINGS (see following pages for descriptions of each item)

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 26

Page 149: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

27

V-ChipUS V-Chip Ratings U.S.PARENTAL RATING SYSTEMSPrograms with the following ratings are appropriate for children. TV Y is Appropriate for All Children.

Programs are created for very young viewers and should be suitable for all ages, includingchildren ages 2 - 6.

TV Y7 is for Older Children.Most parents would find such programs suitable for children 7 and above. These programsmay contain some mild fantasy violence or comedic violence, which children should be ableto discern from reality.

Programs with the following ratings are designed for the entire audience. TV G stands for General Audience.

Most parents would find these programs suitable for all age groups. They contain little or noviolence, no strong language, and little or no sexual dialog or situations.

TV PG Parental Guidance Suggested.May contain some, but not much, strong language, limited violence, and some suggestivesexual dialog or situations. It is recommended that parents watch these programs first, orwith their children.

TV 14 Parents Strongly Cautioned.Programs contain some material that may be unsuitable for children under the age of 14including possible intense violence, sexual situations, strong coarse language, or intenselysuggestive dialog. Parents are cautioned against unattended viewing by children under 14.

TV MA Mature Audiences Only.These programs are specifically for adults and may be unsuitable for anyone under 17 yearsof age. TV MA programs may have extensiveV, S, L, or D.

Viewing Guidelines

In addition to the ratings categories explained above, information on specific kinds of contentare also supplied with the V-Chip rating. These types of content may also be blocked.Thecontent types are:

• V/FV is for VIOLENCE/FANTASY VIOLENCE • S stands for SEXUALCONTENT• L stands for strong LANGUAGE• D stands for suggestive DIALOG

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 27

Page 150: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

28

Line up the cursor in the column (TV PG, TV G, etc.) with the content row (V/FV, S, etc.) and

press the or to move the cursor to the correct location. Press or to turn the lockingfeature on or off. An item is locked if the icon appears instead of a “—”.

For example: To block viewing of all TV 14 shows, move the cursor to the top row of thatcolumn and add a lock icon. Once you've put a lock on the top row, everything in that columnis automatically locked.

To the TV 14 ColumnTo turn on the lock

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• If you want to change the setup, move the cursor to the top column and change the lock icon

to “—” by pressing or again. You may then select individual categories to block.

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)

Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu

To turnV-Chip ON or OFF

To move to SET US TV RATINGS

To operate

V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK

FINISH

Setting US V-Chip Ratings

Directions to set US V-Chip Ratings:

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 28

Page 151: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

29

Setting ratings with the V-Chip button

Example 2:

If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above a current setting such asTV PG-V (with violence):

Press ZERO when TV-PG - V is displayed

To access Rating information about a certain program, press the V-CHIP button while viewingthat program. A display like this will appear :

If you decide you want to block this category of viewing, press "0" while the above screen isvisible, and all programs from that category will be blocked.

Example 1:

If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above TV PG:

• For Children's programming you can block TV-Y and Y7 programs by Pressing “0” when Y isdisplayed during a program. Programming for audiences other than children’s audiences willnot be affected.

PROGRAM IS RATED :TV-PG - V

All Programming above TV PG will be blocked.

Press ZERO when TV-PG is displayed

All Programming above TV PG - V (with Violence) will be blocked.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 29

Page 152: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

NR – Not Rated.This is a film which has no rating. In many cases these films were imported from countrieswhich do not use the MPAA ratings system. Other NR films may be from amateur producerswho didn’t intend to have their film widely released.NR (Not Rated) Programming may contain all types of programming including children's programming, foreign programs, or adult material.

G – General Audience .In the opinion of the review board, these films contain nothing in the way of sexual content, violence, or language that would be unsuitable for audiences of any age.

PG – Parental Guidance .Parental Guidance means the movie may contain some contents such as mild violence,some brief nudity, and strong language. The contents are not deemed intense.

PG-13 – Parents Strongly Cautioned.Parents with children under 13 are cautioned that the content of movies with this rating mayinclude more explicit sexual, language, and violence content than movies rated PG.

R - Restricted.These films contain material that is explicit in nature and is not recommended forunsupervised children under the age of 17.

NC-17 - No One Under 17.These movies contain content which most parents would feel is too adult for their children toview. Content can consist of strong language, nudity, violence, and suggestive or explicitsubject matter.

X - No One under 18.Inappropriate material for anyone under 18.

Movie Ratings

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)

Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options

To SET MOVIE RATINGSTo enter movies menu

For example, to block viewing of X and NC-17 rated from shows:

To the X ColumnTo turn on the lock

To the NC-17 Column

To turn on the lock

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

Directions to set Movie (MPAA) Ratings:

30

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 30

Page 153: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

E – Exempt.Exempt programming includes:news, sports, documentaries and other informationprogramming, talk shows, music videos, and variety programming.

C – Programming Intended for Children.Violence Guidelines:There will be no realistic scenes of violence. Depictions of aggressivebehavior will be infrequent and limited to portrayals that are clearly imaginar y, comedic or unrealistic in nature.

C8+ – Programming Intended for Children 8 and Over .Violence Guidelines: Any realistic depictions of violence will be infrequent, discreet, of lowintensity and will show the consequences of the acts. There will be no offensive language,nudity or sexual content.

G – General Audience .Programming will contain little violence and will be sensitive to themes which could affect younger children.

PG - Parental Guidance.Programming intended for a general audience, but which may not be suitable for youngerchildren. Parents may consider some content not appropriate for children aged 8-13.

14+ - 14 Years and Older.Parents are strongly cautioned to exercise discretion in permitting viewing by pre-teens andearly teens. Programming may contain mature themes and scenes of intense violence.

18+ - Adult.Material intended for mature audiences only.

Canadian V-Chip Ratings

Directions to set Canadian V-Chip Ratings:Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)

Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options

To SET CANADIAN RATINGS ENG (for English)To enter ratings menu

For example, to block viewing of programming rated 14+ and 18+:

To the 18+ Column

To turn on the lock

To the 14+ Column

To turn on the lock

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

• For instructions on “Set Canadian Ratings FRE (in French)”, please see page 31 in theFrench side of this user’s guide.

31

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 31

Page 154: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

32

V-ChipUnrated ProgramsNotes About Unrated Programs:

Unrated programming refers to any programming which does not contain a rating signal.Programming on television stations which do not broadcast rating signals will be placed in the“Unrated Programming" category.

Examples of Unrated programs:

Emergency BulletinsLocally Originated ProgrammingNewsPolitical ProgramsPublic Service AnnouncementsReligious ProgramsSportsWeatherSome Commercials

• TV programs or movies that do not have rating signals will be blocked if the Unrated

Category is set to BLOCK.

Directions to Block Unrated Programs:

You can block programs that are not rated.

Press the MENU button

ToV-CHIP

To operate (The lock icon appears)

Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options

To UNRATED

To VIEW or BLOCKPress EXIT when done

UNRATED VIEW BLOCK

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 32

Page 155: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-ChipSet Lock CodeChannel Guard and V-Chip settings are protected by a four-digit Lock Code. Your TV comespre-set with a Lock Code of "0000". You may change the code to any four-digit number youwish. To change the Lock Code, follow the steps below.

Press the MENU button

To SETLOCK CODE

To operate

The lock icon appears.

Press ZERO to access the Lock Code

The first digit will be highlighted

To select the number

To move to the next digit

Continue to follow these directions for all four numbers.

To FINISH

To save settings and exit

Your Lock Code is now set..

LOCK CODE 0 0 0 0

FINISH

0

• After a power interruption you must reset the Lock Code.• Write your Lock Code number down and keep it hidden from potential viewers.• If you forget the Lock Code, a new code may be set using the steps listed above.

NOTE:

33

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 33

Page 156: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Picture Settings

34

Tint

Color

Picture

Bright

Detail

Tint allows you to adjust the levels of red and green in your TV picture.

Press the MENU button

To TINT

To increase the levels of green

To increase the levels of redTo move to the next setting

The color function lets you make all the colors in the TV picture appear either more vivid orsubtle.

Press the MENU button

To COLORTo make the colors more vivid

To make the colors more subduedTo move to the next setting

Picture allows you to adjust the levels of black and white on the TV screen, giving you a darkeror brighter picture overall.

Press the MENU button

To PICTURETo increase the level of contrast

To decrease the level of contrastTo move to the next setting

You can adjust the overall brightness of the TV picture with the Bright control.

Press the MENU button

To BRIGHT

To lighten the picture

To darken the pictureTo move to the next setting

The Detail feature adjusts the level of fine detail displayed in the picture.

Press the MENU button

To DETAIL

To make the picture sharper (more details)

To make the picture smoother (less detail)To move to the next setting

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 34

Page 157: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Picture Settings

35

Noise Muting

Set Video StatusWith Set Video Status, you can save your own set of picture quality adjustments as “Choice”and have access to them at the touch of a button.

Press the MENU button

To SETVIDEO STATUS

To operate

To set the TINT levels

To move to the next option

Repeat these steps until all levels are set.

To SAVEAS CHOICE

To save settings and exit

• You must use SAVE AS CHOICE to exit the Set Video Status menu, otherwise your prefer -ences will not be saved.

• You can access your “Choice”settings at any time by pressing the VIDEO STATUS button onthe remote control.

TINT -------------|-------------COLOR -------------|-------------PICTURE -------------|-------------BRIGHT -------------|-------------DETAIL -------------|-------------

SAVE AS CHOICE

The setting screen will disappear if you do not make any adjustments or move to the next set-ting in approximately three seconds. Any changes you have made to picture settings up to thatpoint will be stored. You can exit the Picture Settings menu at any time by pressing the EXIT

button on the remote control.

NOTE:

This feature inserts a blank blue screen over channels which are not broadcasting or are tooweak to be received clearly.

Press the MENU button

To NOISE MUTING

To turn Noise Muting ON or OFF

• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup or when you operate Channel Summary.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 35

Page 158: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Sound Settings

You can increase or decrease the level of low-frequency sound in the TV’s audio with the Bassadjustment.

Press the MENU button

To BASS

To increase the bass

To decrease the bass

To move to the next setting

Use Treble to adjust the level of high-frequency sound in your TV’s audio.

Press the ME N U bu t t o n

To TREBLE

To increase the treble

To decrease the treble

To move to the next setting

Adjust the level of sound between the TV’s two speakers with the Balance setting.

Press the MENU button

To BALANCE

To shift the balance towards the right speaker

To shift the balance towards the left speaker

To move to the next setting

MTS technology allows several audio signals to be broadcast at once, giving you a choice inwhat you wish to hear with a TV program. In addition to mono or stereo sound, an MTS broad-cast may also include a Second Audio Program (SAP).

Press the MENU button

To MTS

Select the mode

(The ON AIR arrow tells you if a broadcast is in Stereo and/or contains an SAP).

• Keep the TV in STEREO mode to get the best sound quality. The sound will work inSTEREO mode even if a certain broadcast is in MONO sound only.

• Choose the MONO setting to reduce excessive noise on a certain channel or broadcast.• Selecting SAP will allow you to hear an alternative soundtrack, if one is available.

MTS (Multi-Channel Television Sound)

Treble

Balance

Bass

You can leave the Sound Settings menu at any time by pressing the EX I T button on theremote control.

NOTE:

36

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 36

Page 159: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

General Items

The On/Off timer lets you program your television to turn itself on or off. You can use it as analarm to wake up, to help you remember important programs, or as a decoy when you're nothome.

Press the MENU button

To ON/OFFTIMER

To operate (begins with ON TIME)

To set the hour (AM/PM) you want the TV to turn on

To move to minutes

To set the minutes

To accept ON TIME and move to OFF TIME (the time the TV will turn off). Set the OFF TIMEthe same way as ON TIME

To accept OFFTIME and move to CHANNEL

To select channel

To move to MODE

Choose ONCE or EVERYDAY

To ON/OFFTIMER

Choose YES to accept the timer setting, choose NOif you don't wish to accept

To FINISH

To save settings

On/Off Timer

On/Off Timer Note for PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) only.

• The On/Off time cannot be set to locked or guarded channels.• In order for the On/Off timer to work, the clock must be set.• After a power interruption, the Timer settings must be reset.

NOTE:

If the television is on when a timed event is about to start a Timer Preview window will appear.The Timer Preview window will appear in the lower right corner of the screen seven secondsbefore the timer is programmed to begin. When the timer activates, the Preview picture willbecome the main picture.

37

PurityThis helps clean up the picture so that it may not contain any “snow”.

Press the MENU button

To PURITY

To enter

To adjust purity

N S -------------|-------------

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 37

Page 160: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

General Items

38

If your TV is connected to a stereo system, you can turn off the TV speakers and listen to theaudio through your stereo.

Press the MENU button

To TVSPEAKER

To turn the TV's speakers ONor OFF

EXIT when finished

• Before you turn the TV Speaker setting from OFF to ON, make sure that the TV volumelevel is low! If the TV volume is set too high, the sound level will be extremely loud.

• After a power interruption, the TVSpeaker settings will return to “ON”.

TV Speaker

• External Speakers: When using external speakers or amplifiers, shut off the TV Speakers(see ‘TV Speaker’) above.

NOTE:

If your television is connected to an external speaker source, Audio Out gives you the option of controlling the volume level with your TV’s remote control.

Press the MENU button

To AUDIO OUT

ToVARI or FIX

EXIT when finished

VARI: Lets you adjust the volume of the external speakers using the VOLUME +/– buttons onyour TV’s remote control.FIX: The volume of the external speakers is adjusted using the audio device’s remote control.

Audio Out

TV SPEAKER ON OFF

AUDIO OUT VARI FIX

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 38

Page 161: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

General Items

Get the best quality video from your DVD player by using this setting and the DVD inputs at therear of the television. Set either to YES for component input (for DVD) or to NO for compositevideo input (for a regular VCR).

Press the MENU button

ToV4 COMPONENT-IN (or V2 COMPONENT-IN for models AV-36F702, AV-32F702and AV-27F702)

To turn the input ON or OFF

EXIT when finished

• This option should be used with DVD players only. For information on connecting VCR’s see page 11. For more information on connecting a DVD player, see page 14.

• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 note: These models do not have Input 4.

V4 Component-In (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) / V2 Component-In (AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702)

V4 COMPONENT-IN YES NO

Many broadcasts now include an onscreen display of dialog called Closed Captions. Somebroadcasts may also include displays of additional information in text form. Your television canaccess and display this information using the Closed Caption feature.To activate the ClosedCaption feature, follow the steps below.

Press the MENU button

To CLOSED CAPTION

To operate

To select CAPTION (for Closed Captions), TEXT (for text display), or OFF (for no display)

To move to CAPTION or TEXT

To select a caption (CC1 to CC4) or text channel (T1 to T4)

To accept that selection and move to FINISH

To save settings and exit

MODE : CAPTION

CAPTION : CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4TEXT : T1 T2 T3 T4

FINISH

Closed Caption

• Closed Caption subtitles are usually found on closed caption channel CC1. Some programsmay include additional text information which is usually found on text channel T1. The otherchannels are available for future use.

• Closed captioning may not work correctly if the signal being received is weak or if you areplaying a video tape.

• Most broadcasts containing Closed Captioning will display a notice at the start of theprogram.

NOTE:

39

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 39

Page 162: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions

The MENU button allows you to access JVC’s onscreen menu system. Press MENU to activatethe onscreen menu system.

• See individual topics (like “Sound Settings”) for specific information on using menus.

Press the EXIT button to leave a menu screen. On the RM-C301G this button is also labeled“PIP OFF”. Press EXIT/PIP OFF to turn off the Picture-in-Picture function (please see page 44for more information on the PIP feature).• PIP is available only on AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802.

Menu

Exit and PIP Off

Display

• Please note that if the Clock, Sleep Timer or On/Off Timer are not set, the Display screen willshow:"CLOCK NOT SET", "SLEEP TIMER OFF", and "ON/OFF TIMER OFF" respectively.

NOTE:

The Display screen shows the current status of timers and inputs.

Press the DISPLAY button

The screen above shows the following information:

• The current channel or AV input (Channel 07)

• The current time (12:20 pm)• Sleep Timer status/minutes remaining (The Sleep Timer is off)• On/Off Timer status (Set to turn on everyday at 7:00 PM, off at 10:00 PM)• Each Press of the DISPLAY button changes the display mode:

Display – Full screen shown above

Time – Shows the current time only

Channel – Shows the current channel

Off –Turns Display off

• You may also turn off the Display at any step by pressing EXIT.

07NOW 12:20 PMSLEEP TIMER OFFON/OFF TIMER EVERYDAY

ON TIME 7:00 PMOFF TIME 10:00 PM

40

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 40

Page 163: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button FunctionsVideo Status

Muting

The VIDEO STATUS button gives you a choice of three TV picture display settings, including a display of your own preferences.

Standard – Resets the picture display to the factory settings.

Choice – Displays the setting levels you specified on the "Set Video Status"Menu(see page 35).

Theater – Gives a rich, film-like look to video.

Press the VIDEO STATUS button

The Sleep Timer can turn the TV off for you after you fall asleep. Program it to work in intervalsof 15 minutes, for a total time of up to 180 minutes.

Sleep Timer Message

20 seconds before the automatic shutoff, this message will appear:

GOOD NIGHT!!

PUSH SLEEP TIMER BUTTON

TO EXTEND.

Creates a deep, three-dimensional sound effect by channeling the audio through the TV's front-firing speakers. Press the HYPER SURROUND button to turn the effect on or off.

The MUTING button instantly turns the volume down completely when you press it. PressMUTING and the volume level will instantly go to zero. To restore the volume to its previouslevel, press MUTING again.

HYPER SURROUND ON OFF

Hyper Surround

Sleep Timer

41

Press the SLEEP TIMER button

You then have 20 seconds to press the Sleep Timer button to delay the shutoff for another

15 minutes.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 41

Page 164: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions

Use the 100+ button to directly access channels above Channel 99. For example to move tochannel 124, press100+, 2 (two), 4 (four).

100+ Button

Return+

InputSelects the signal input source for the television:TV (for Antenna or Cable) or Video-1, 2, 3, or 4for video devices like VCR’s, DVD players, or camcorders.

IN P U T

BBEBBE high definition audio adds natural, clear and extraordinary sound quality to any program.Turn BBE On or Off using the BBE button.

BBE ON OFF

The RETURN+ button has two functions:

Return – Returns to the channel viewed just before the channel currently onscreen.

Return+ – Lets you program a specific channel to return to while scanning through the chan-nels using the CH+ and CH– buttons.

RETURN+ and hold for three seconds

The channel currently active has been programmed as your Return+ channel. Now scanthrough the channels using the CHANNEL+/– buttons

RETURN+

You will return to your programmed channel.

• To cancel your Return+ channel, press and hold the RETURN+ button for three seconds. Themessage “RETURN CHANNEL CANCELLED!”will appear.

• Return+ works only with the CHANNEL+/– buttons. Pressing any number key will cancelReturn+.

• Return+ does not affect the PIPchannel (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only).

RETURN CHANNEL PROGRAMMED !

• BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc. For U.S., licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.under USP 4638258, 4482866 and 5510572. For Canada, licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc.

NOTE:

• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 do not have a Video-4 input.

42

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 42

Page 165: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions

43

LightYour remote control includes illuminated buttons for key features like CHANNEL +/– andVOLUME +/–. Press the LIGHT button to turn the illumination on.

DVD Buttons

VCR Buttons

TV/CATV Switch

VCR/DVD Switch

You can also use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your DVD player. These functions include:play, rewind, fast-forward, stop, still/pause, previous/next, tray open/close,power on, and power off.

Move the selector switch to DVD to operate.

• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand DVD players.For any other manufacturer’s brand DVD player, please see the code chart and instructions on page 20.

Use either the television’s own tuner or a cable box to select channels. Set this switch to TV tooperate the television’s built-in tuner. Move the switch to CATV to operate a cable box.

• See page 18 for information on programming your remote for cable box operation.

You can control a VCR or DVDplayer with the buttons on the lower part of the remote control.Use the VCR/DVD selector switch to choose either VCR or DVD operation.

• See pages 19 and 20 for information on programming your remote with VCR and DVD oper-ating codes.

You can use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your VCR. These functionsinclude:play, record, rewind, fast-forward, stop, pause, channel scan, TV/VCR, power on, andpower off.

Move the selector switch to VCR to operate.

• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand VCR’s. For any other manufac-turer’s brand VCR, please see the code chart and instructions on page 19.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 43

Page 166: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions - PIPPIP displays two separate pictures on screen. Your television has 2-Tuner PIP, meaning youcan view pictures from two different channels simultaneously. A special set of PIP control but-tons are located on the upper part of the remote control. Descriptions of each button appearon this page.

The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only.

On/MoveTurn PIP on by pressing the ON/MOVE button.

02

07

Cable Box NoteThe 2-Tuner PIP function may not operate when used with certain cable boxes. This isbecause while some models of cable box may receive up to 181 channels, they may only sendthe signal from one channel to your television (please also see diagram on page 11). For thePIPtuner to operate correctly, it must have access to all available channels. Since the televi-sion is receiving the signal of only one channel from the cable box, it is impossible for the 2-Tuner PIP to display a second, different channel.

Because there are many different models of cable boxes in use today, if you are having prob-lems operating your PIP feature with your cable box, we recommend you contact your localcable company for connection advice.

44

PIP OFF to turn PIP off

(PIP) ON/MOVE

NOTE:• Each press of ON/MOVE will shift the PIP window to a different corner.

ON/MOVE

Once PIP is turned on, you can move the PIP window to any of the TV’s main picture’sfour corners with the ON/MOVE button

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 44

Page 167: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Button Functions - PIPFreeze

Swap

Channel +/– for PIP

Source

Use the FREEZE button to lock a single, still image onto the PIP window.

• If PIP is off when FREEZE is pressed, a snapshot of the main screen is taken and placed inthe PIP window.

• If PIP is on when FREEZE is pressed, the image in the window when the button was pressedis held.

You can exchange the channel displayed on the main screen for the one shown in the PIP win-dow by pressing SWAP.

Like the main CHANNEL +/– buttons, CHANNEL +/– for PIP lets you scan through the channels inthe PIP window.

• Direct channel selection with the 10 key pad for PIPis not possible.

You can select the signal source for the PIP window image.

• If the PIP does not have a signal, the window will be blue.• If you connect a DVD to Video-2 or Video-4, the PIP window will be blue.

• The PIP window is 1/9 the size of the full screen.

• PIP will not display blocked channels or programs. A blue screen will display instead.

NOTE:

45

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 45

Page 168: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Troubleshooting

46

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 46

Page 169: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

47

WarrantyFor Canadian model televisions, see the separate sheet for Canadian

Warranty information.

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forthbelow ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVEMATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP from the date of original retail purchase for the period shownbelow (the “Warranty Period”) (PICTURE TUBE is covered for Two (2) years.)

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY (50) UNITED STATES, THEDISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.

WHAT WE WILL DO:If this product is found to be defective within the warranty period,JVC will repair orreplace defective parts at no charge to the original owner. Such repair and replacementservices shall be rendered by JVC during regular business hours at JVCauthorizedservice centers. Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of thisWarranty Period. All products and parts thereof may be brought to a JVCauthorizedservice center on a carry-in basis. Televisions with a screen size of 25 inches and largermay be covered on an in-home basis where such service is available.

WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:To determine if in-home service is ava i l a ble in your area, either contact the selling dealer (retail-er) or call 1-800-537-5722 to locate the nearest JVC authori zed service center. S e rvice loca-tions can also be obtained from our website h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m.In-home serv i c e, if ava i l-a bl e, will require clear access to the Te l evision by the service representative s.If in-home serv i c eis not ava i l a bl e, carry in service will be prov i d e d .

If service is not locally available, box the product carefully, preferably in its original car-ton, and ship, insured, with a copy of your bill of sale plus a letter of explanation of theproblem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the name and location which will begiven to you by the toll free number.

If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our CustomerRelations Department.

WHAT IS NOT COVERED:This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:1) Products which have been subject to abuse , accident,alteration,modification,tam-

pering,negligence, misuse, faulty installation,lack of reasonable care, or if repairedor serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by JVC to render suchservice, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products,or if the modelor serial number has been altered, tampered with,defaced or removed;

2) Initial installation, installation and removal from "built-in" entertainment centers andother mounting systems;3) Operational adjustments covered in the Owner’s Manual, normal maintenance , videoand audio head cleaning;4) Damage that occurs in shipment, due to an act of God,and cosmetic damage;5) Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;6) Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus (Needle) are covered for 90days from the date of purchase;

Parts Labor

1 YEAR1 YEAR

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 47

Page 170: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

48

Warranty

REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPA R ATE WA R R A N T Y. THIS WA R R A N T YDOES NOT APPLY FOR DETAILS OF REFURBISHED PRODUCT WA R R A N T Y.PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATIONPACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.

For customer use:Enter below the Model No. and Serial No.which is located either on the rear, bottom orside of the cabinet.Retain this information for future reference.

Model No.: Serial No.:Purchase Date: Name Of Dealer:

7) Accessories;8) Batteries (except that Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from date of pur-

chase.)

There are no express warranties except as listed above.

THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTYOF MERCHANTABILTY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTYHEREIN.

JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE,OR ANY OTHER DA M AG E S , WHETHER DIRECT, I N C I D E N TAL OR CONSEQU E N T I A L(INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULT-ING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WAR-RANTY, ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THEWARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limita-tions on how long the warranty lasts,so these exclusions or limitations may not apply toyou.This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rightswhich vary state to state.

JVCCOMPANYOF AMERICA 1700 Valley RoadDIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP. Wayne, New Jersey 07470

h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 48

Page 171: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

49

Authorized Service Centers

QUALITY SERVICE

TOLL FREE: 1 (800) 537-5722http://www.jvc.com

HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER

Dear Customer,

In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, please read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In the event that repairs are neces-sary, or for the address nearest your location within the Continental UnitedStates, please call 1 (800) 537-5722 for your nearest authorized servicer or visitour website at www.JVC.com.

Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.

CautionTo prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.There are no user serviceableparts inside. Please refer to qualified service personnel for repairs.

AccessoriesTo purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may contact your local JVCDealer. From the 48 Continental United States call toll free: 1 (800) 882-2345 or onthe web at www.JVC.com

For service in CanadaTo locate your local JVC service center or dealer in Canada please call:

Or visit us on the web at www.JVC.ca

Do not service the television yourself

In Eastern Canada:1 (416) 293-1311

In Western Canada:1 (604) 270-1311

En Français (Montréal):1 (514) 871-1311

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 49

Page 172: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

50

Search CodesCable/Satellite Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-Way Mode Selector switch to CATV.2) Press the TV POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press TV POWER, see if the CATV or Satellite box responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no

response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 52 times without a response, use theremote control which came with the equipment.

5) Press RETURN+ to exit.

VCR Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.2) Press the VCR POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press VCR POWER, see if the VCR responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no

response, repeat Step 3. If you repeat Step 3 a total of 80 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the VCR.

5) Press RETURN+ to exit.

DVD Player Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.2) Press the DVD POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press DVD POWER, see if the DVDplayer responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set. If there was no

response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 30 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the DVDplayer.

5) Press RETURN+ to exit.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 50

Page 173: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Specifications

51

Specifications subject to change without notice.

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 51

Page 174: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICADivision of JVC Americas Corp.

1700 Valley RoadWayne, New Jersey, 07470

JVC CANADA, INC.21 Finchdene SquareScarborough, Ontario

Canada, M1X 1A7

AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 52

Page 175: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONSPOUR TÉLÉVISEUREN COULEURS

Pour le modèles:AV-36F802AV-36F702AV-32F802AV-32F702AV-27F802AV-27F702

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802 et RM-C301G

REMARQUE :Veuillez inscrire dans les espaces ci-dessous le modèle et le numero de série de votre téléviseur (situés à l’arrière du téléviseur). Agrafez votre reçu ou votre fac-ture à la page intérieure de ce guide. Rangez ce manuel dans un lieu où vous le retrouverez rapidment pour vous y référer. Gardez le carton et l’emballage

d’origine pour une utilisation ultérieure.

Numéro de sérieLCT0821-001E-A0901-TN-FAA-JIM

Numéro de modèle

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 1

Page 176: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

ATTENTION

ATTENTION: AFIN DE DIMINUER LES RISQUES D’ÉLECTRO-CUTION, NE RETIREZ PAS LE CAPOT OU LE PANNEAU

ARRIÈRE. AUCUNE PIÈCE À L’INTÉRIEUR N’EST RÉPARABLEPAR L’UTILISATEUR.ADRESSEZ-VOUS À UN RÉPARATEUR

QUALIFIÉ POUR LA MAINTENANCE.

Le symbole de l’éclair fléché dans un triangleéquilatéral prévient l’utilisateur de la présence detensions dangereuses non protégées, à l’in-térieur de l’appareil, suffisamment élevées pourconstituer un risque d’électrocution.

Le symbole du point d’exclamation dans un trian-gle équilatéral prévient l’utilisateur de laprésence d’importantes instructions d’utilisationet d’entretien dans la documentation accompag-nant cet appareil.

RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTIONNE PAS OUVRIR

IMPORTANTES PRÉCAUTIONSDE SÉCURITÉ

ATTENTION! POUR ÉVITER UN INCENDIE OU UNE ÉLECTROCUTION,N’EXPOSEZ PAS CE TÉLÉVISEUR À LA PLUIE OU À L’HUMIDITÉ.

AVERTISSEMENT! AFIN D’ASSURER LA SÉCURITÉ DES PERSONNES,OBSERVEZ LES RÈGLES SUIVANTES CONCERNANT L’UTILISATION DECET APPAREIL.

1) Faites fonctionner cet appareil avec la tension secteur spécifiée sur cet appareil.2) Évitez d’endommager la prise et le cordon secteur.3) Installez correctement l’appareil et placez-le dans un lieu correctement ventilé.4) Ne laissez aucun objet ou liquide pénétrer à l’intérieur de l’appareil.5) En cas de problème, débranchez l’appareil et appelez un technicien qualifié.

N’essayez pas de réparer vous-même ou de retirer le panneau arrière.

Les modifications ou changements non approuvés par JVC peuvent annuler la garantie.

* Pour votre sécurité, quand vous n’utilisez pas ce téléviseur pendant une longue péri-ode, déconnectez-le du secteur et débranchez l’antenne.

* Pour éviter une électrocution, n’utilisez pas cette fiche polarisée avec un prolongateur,avec une prise ou toute autre alimentation, sauf si les lames peuvent être entièrementinsérées sans être visibles.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 2

Page 177: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

IMPORTANTES RÈGLES DE SÉCURITÉ

AVERTISSEMENT:

Veuillez lire et retenir ce qui suit pour votre sécurité.

L’énergie électrique autorise de nombreuses applications utiles. Ce téléviseur a été conçu etfabriqué pour assurer la sécurité de l’utilisateur. Mais une utilisation incorrecte peut produireune électrocution ou un incendie . Afin de ne pas aller à l’encontre des sécurités incluses dansce téléviseur, conformez-vous aux règles de base de son installation, de son utilisation et deson entretien.

Conformez-vous aussi aux avertissements et aux instructions inscrites sur votre téléviseur.

INSTALLATION

1 Le téléviseur est équipé d’une fiche secteur polarisée (une lame de la fiche est plus largeque l’autre).

Cette sécurité permet à la fiche de pénétrer dans une prise secteur seulement dans un sens.Si la fiche ne peut pas être insérée entièrement dans la prise, insérez-la dans l’autre sens. Sivous ne pouvez toujours pas l’insérer, appelez un électricien.

2 Utilisez votre téléviseur en l’alimentant avec la tension indiquée sur le téléviseur ou reportez-vous aux instructions d’utilisation pour vous en assurer. Si vous n’êtes pas certain de la ten-sion utilisée chez vous, consultez votre revendeur ou la compagnie d’électricité. Pour unfonctionnement sur piles, reportez-vous aux instructions d’utilisation.

3 Surcharger les prises de courant et utiliser des prolongateurs représentent un danger aumême titre que des cordons usagés et des prises cassées. Elles sont à l’origine d’incendieset d’électrocutions. Appelez un technicien qualifié pour opérer les remplacements.

4 Ne laissez aucun objet sur le cordon ou rouler dessus. Ne placez pas le téléviseur là où lecordon d’alimentation se trouve sur un passage fréquenté ou pouvant être abîmé afin d’éviterun risque d’électrocution ou d’incendie .

5 N’utilisez pas le téléviseur près de l’eau, d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier, d'unecuvette, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d’une piscine, par exemple.

6 Si une antenne extérieure est reliée au téléviseur, assurez-vous de la bonne mise à la terrede celle-ci afin de fournir une protection contre les surtensions et l’électricité statique. La sec-tion 810 du NEC fournit les informations nécessaires à une bonne mise à la terre du tubed’antenne et de son support ainsi que de la descente du câble qui doit transiter par un dis-positif de décharge, de la taille des conducteurs de mise à la terre, de l’emplacement du dis-positif de décharge et sur les impératifs liés aux prises de terre.

(TYPE POLARISE)

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 3

Page 178: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

7 Une antenne extérieure ne doit pas se trouver à proximité d’une ligne électrique, de poteauxd’éclairage public ou autres circuits électriques ou encore à un endroit où elle peut tombersur de telles lignes ou de tels circuits.Au cours de l’installation d’une antenne extérieure,faites particulièrement attention à ne pas entrer en contact avec ces lignes car un tel contactest mortel.

8 Les téléviseurs sont équipés avec des ouvertures de ventilation afin d’évacuer la chaleurgénérée pendant leur utilisation.

ll ne faut :

— jamais obstruer les ouvertures de ventilation sous le téléviseur portatif en le plaçant surun lit, un canapé, un tapis ;

— jamais placer le téléviseur dans une enceinte encastrée et sans ventilation suffisante ;

— jamais obturer les ouvertures avec un vêtement ou tout autre matériel ;

— jamais placer le téléviseur sur un radiateur ou à proximité d’une source de chaleur.

9 Pour éviter de blesser quelqu’un :

— ne placez jamais le téléviseur sur une étagère en pente sans l’avoir parfaitement arrimé ;

— utilisez seulement une table roulante recommandée par le fabricant du téléviseur ;

— ne faites pas passer la table roulante sur un seuil de porte ou sur une moquette épaisse;

— une installation sur un mur ou sur une étagère doit prendre en compte les instructions dufabricant et doit utiliser un kit de montage approuvé par ce dernier.

UTILISATION10 Prévenez les enfants de ne rien introduire dans le téléviseur par les ouvertures de ventila-

tion.Certains composants à l’intérieur sont sous tension et un contact peut provoquer unincendie ou une électrocution.

11 Débranchez la fiche secteur du téléviseur avant tout nettoyage. N’utilisez aucun nettoyantliquide ou en aérosol.

12 N’ajoutez aucun accessoire au téléviseur qui n’ait pas été conçu pour cet usage. Certainsajouts peuvent être dangereux.

EXEMPLE DE MISE À LA TERRE D’UNEANTENNE SELON LES PRESCRIPTIONS DU NEC

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 4

Page 179: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

13 Pour encore mieux protéger votre téléviseur pendant un orage ou si vous ne l’utilisez paspendant une longue période de temps, débranchez la prise secteur et déconnectez l’an-tenne.Vous évitez ainsi d’endommager le téléviseur en cas de foudre oude surtensions.

14 Un téléviseur sur meuble roulant doit être déplacé avec précautions. Desarrêts soudains, une force excessive ou une surface irrégulière peuventrenverser le téléviseur et son meuble roulant.

ENTRETIEN15 Débranchez le téléviseur de la prise secteur et faites appel à un réparateur qualifié pour un

dépannage dans les conditions suivantes :

A Quand le cordon ou la fiche sont endommagés ou usés.

B. Si un liquide a pénétré à l’intérieur du téléviseur.

C. Si le téléviseur a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’eau.

D. Si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas normalement en respectant les instructions dumanuel.Procédez seulement aux réglages des commandes décrites dans le manuel. Eneffet, si vous déréglez d’autres commandes, des dommages peuvent se produire quidemanderont de longues réparations à un technicien qualifié pour refaire fonctionnernormalement l’appareil.

E.Si le téléviseur est tombé ou a été endommagé.

F.Quand les performances du téléviseur sont détériorées en permanence, ce qui indiquequ’il a besoin d’être réparé.

16 N’essayez pas de réparer vous-même en ouvrant le téléviseur ou en le retirant du boîtier,vous vous exposez à des tensions dangereuses.Faites réparer par un technicien agréé.

17 S’il est nécessaire de remplacer des composants, vérifiez avec le technicien qu’il utilise despièces détachées ayant les mêmes caractéristiques de sécurité que celles d’origine.Vouséviterez ainsi un incendie, une électrocution ou tout autre problème.

18 Après une réparation ou une maintenance, demandez au technicien de réaliser un test desécurité tel qu’il est décrit dans le manuel d’instructions.

19 Quant un téléviseur atteint la fin de sa vie utile, il faut vous en débarrasser sans faireimploser le tube cathodique. Demandez à un technicien de faire jeter le téléviseur.

20 Remarque pour l’installateur du système de télévision par câble (CATV):

Ce rappel a pour but d’attirer l’attention de l’installateur du système de télévision par câblesur l’article 820-40 du NEC qui fournit les indications pour une mise à la terre correcte et quispécifie en particulier que le câble de terre doit être connecté au système de mise à la terredu bâtiment aussi près que possible du point d’entrée du câble.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 5

Page 180: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Table des MatièresDÉBALLAGE DE VOTRETÉLÉVISEUR . . . . . . . . . . 7

CONFIGURATION RAPIDE . . . 8Pour débuter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Première étape – La télécommande . . . . . 8Piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Fonctionnement de base . . . . . . . . . . . 8Réalisation des connexiones de base . . . . 9Le Plug In Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

CONNEXIONS . . . . . . . . . 11Connexions de câble et magnétoscope . . . 11Connexion à un lecteur de DVD . . . . . . . 14Connexion à un amplificateur extérieur . . . 15Connexion à un Caméscope . . . . . . . . . 15Connexions au liaisoninformatique AV de JVC . . . . . . . . . . . 16

TÉLÉCOMMANDE . . . . . . . 17Télécommande bases . . . . . . . . . . . 17Changement des Piles . . . . . . . . . . 17

PROGRAMMATION DE LATÉLÉCOMMANDE . . . . . . . 18Codes de boîte de câble oud’antenne parabolique . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Codes de magnétoscope . . . . . . . . . . . 19Codes de Lecteur DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Les Menus à l’Écran . . . 21Utilisation de ce Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Les Menus à l’Écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

PLUG IN MENU . . . . . . . . . 22I n t r o d u c t i o n. . . . . . . . . . 2 2L a n g u e. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2Régler Auto Tune . . . . . . . . . 22Régler Horloge Automatique . . . 23Régler Horloge Manuel . . . . . . 24Te rm i n e r. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4

Sommaire Canaux . . . . . . . 25Sommaire Canaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

V–Chip . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Régler Code Verrouiller . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

RÉGLAGES DE I’IMAGE . . . . . 34Teinte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Couleur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34I m a g e. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4Clarté . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Détail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Bruit réduit . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Régler statut vidéo . . . . . . . . 35

RÉGLAGES DU SON . . . . . . . 36Basse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Aigu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36MTS(Son multi canaux) . . . . . . 36

ÉLÉMENTS GÉNÉRAUX . . . . . 37Purete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Minuterie On/Off . . . . . . . . . . 37Haut-parleur TV . . . . . . . . . . . 38Sans Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Entrée de Composant . . . . . . . . 39Sous–titres . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

FONCTIONS DES BOUTONS . . 40Menu (Bouton Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Exit (Sortie) et PIP Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Display (Affichage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Video Status (Statut Vidéo) . . . . . . . . . . . 41Sleep Timer (Minuterie Sommeil) . . . . . . . 41Hyper Surround (Hyper Quadrosound) . . . . . 41Muting (Mise en sourdine du son) . . . . . . . 41BBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42100+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42R e t u rn +. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2I n p u t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2Boutons Magnétoscope . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Boutons DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Interrupteur TV/CATV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Interrupteur VCR/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Light (Eclairage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

PIP (Image-sur-Image) . . . . . . 44I n t r o d u c t i o n . . . . . . . . . . 4 4O n / M ove . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45S wa p. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5Channel +/– . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Guide de dépannage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Garantie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Centres de réparations agréés . . . . . . . . 49Codes de Recherche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50S p é c i f i c a t i o n s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 6

Page 181: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Deux PilesAA

1 Téléviseur 1 Télécommande

Merci d’avoir acheté un téléviseur en couleur JVC. Avant de commencer l’installation de votrenouveau téléviseur, assurez-vous d’avoir les pièces suivantes. Outre ce guide, le carton devotre téléviseur doit comprendre :

Lorsque vous aurez déballé votre téléviseur, l’étape suivante consiste à le raccorder à votreantenne, câble ou antenne parabolique, et à raccorder les appareils audio/vidéo que vousdésirez utiliser avec votre téléviseur. Pour réaliser ces connexions, vous utiliserez des fichestelles que celles illustrées ci-après.

Fiche d’entrée A VConnecteurs HFServent à raccorder un câblecoaxial provenant d’une antenneexterne ou d’un système de câblovision.

Un support de téléviseurest également offert(vendu séparément).

Sert à réaliser les connexionsvidéo avec certains magnéto-scopes, lecteurs de DVD,caméscopes, etc.

Sert à raccorder les appareilsaudio/vidéo tels que magnéto-scopes, lecteurs de DVD, amplifica-teurs stéréophoniques, consoles dejeux, etc.

Fiche S-Vidéo

Sert à raccorder les composants per-mettant la liaison informatique AVJVC en vue d’un cinéma automatiséen famille.

Câble de lien A Vinformatique

Avant de commencer à utiliser votre nouveau téléviseur, nous vous recommandons de lire ceguide en entier pour apprendre à connaître les nombreuses fonctions utiles de votre nouveautéléviseur. Toutefois, si vous êtes impatient de commencer à utiliser votre téléviseur immédi-atement, un guide de configuration rapide suit sur les trois prochaines pages.

Déballa ge de votre téléviseur

7

Remarque :IIse peutqu’une télécommandede modèle différent aitété fournie avec votretéléviseur.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 7

Page 182: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

8

Faites glisser le couvercle à l’arrière de la télécommande vers le bas de la télécommande.Insérez deux piles en notant soigneusement les marquages « + » et « – » et en plaçant l’ex-trémité « – » dans l’appareil en premier. Remettez le couvercle en place.

Pour débuterCes pages de configuration rapide vous donneront, en trois étapes faciles, les informations debase dont vous avez besoin pour commencer à utiliser immédiatement votre nouveautéléviseur. Ces informations comprennent des instructions de base sur l’utilisation de votretélécommande, la réalisation d’une connexion simple à votre câble/antenne et d’une connexionfacultative à un magnétoscope, et, enfin, des informations sur la programmation du sélecteurAuto Tuner de votre téléviseur. Si vous avez des questions, ou pour obtenir des informationsplus détaillées sur l’une quelconque de ces étapes, veuillez consulter d’autres sections de ceguide.

Première étape – La télécommandeLa télécommande est essentielle à l’utilisation des nombreuses fonctions utiles de votretéléviseur. Avant de pouvoir utiliser votre télécommande, vous devez d’abord poser les piles(fournies).

Fonctionnement de baseMettez le téléviseur en marche et à l’arrêt en appuyant sur le bouton POWER situé dans le coinsupérieur droit de la télécommande.

Vous pouvez utiliser les quatre boutons des fonctions principales au centre de la télécom-mande pour le fonctionnement de base du téléviseur. Les boutons supérieur et inférieur ferontun balayage vers l’avant et vers l’arrière à travers les canaux disponibles. Les boutons droit etgauche augmenteront ou baisseront le volume. Ces boutons sont également marqués de qua-tre flèches et ils s’utilisent également avec le système JVC de menus à l’écran. Vous devrezutiliser ces boutons plus tard dans la Section de configuration rapide.

L’étape suivante consiste à raccorder votre téléviseur à une antenne ou à un câble.

Bouton marche/arrêtsur la télécommande

Bouton des fonctions principales sur la télécommande

+Procédez à la deuxième étape

Configuration rapide 1

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 8

Page 183: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

9

Câble/connecteur HF

Câbles/Fiches AV

Deuxième étape – Réalisation des connexiones de baseVous devrez ensuite raccorder votre téléviseur à une antenne ou à un système de câblovision.La connexion la plus simple à une antenne ou à un système de câblovision est illustrée ci-après.Pour des connexions plus détaillées, telles que celles faisant appel à une boîte de câble,reportez-vous aux pages 11 et 13.

Il vous sera peut-être opportun de raccorder également un magnétoscope à ce stade. Uneconnexion de base est illustrée ci-après pour un magnétoscope. Reportez-vous aux pages 14à 16 pour des instructions détaillées sur le raccordement d’autres composants ou d’un systèmede cinéma en famille.

Remarque : Vous n’avez pas besoin de magnétoscope pour utiliser votre téléviseur.

1) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune sortant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope dans le jackd’entrée vidéo du téléviseur, OU raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo dumagnétoscope dans l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.

2) Raccordez le câble audio blanc sortant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscope dans lejack d’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.

3) Raccordez le câble audio rouge sortant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope dans lejack d’entrée audio droit du téléviseur.

Enfin, lorsque vous aurez terminé vos connexions, branchez le cordon dans la prise de courantla plus proche et mettez le téléviseur en marche.

1) Raccordez un câble HF depuis la sortie murale jusqu’à l’entrée HF à l’arrière du téléviseur.

+Procédez à la troisème étape

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

Configuration rapide 2

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 9

Page 184: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

10

Troisième étape - Le Plug In Men u

La Configuration rapideest maintenant terminée.

Appuyez sur les boutons et faites défiler jusqu’à RÉGLER AUTO TUNERAppuyez sur les boutons pour commencer RÉGLER AUTO TUNER

Pour choisir CÂBLE (si vous êtes raccordé à un système de câblovision) ou ANT. (sivous utilisez une antenne)Pour passer à la position COMMENCER

Pour commencer configuration automatique du sélecteur

L’Auto Tuner mettra maintenant en mémoire tous les canaux actifs et clairs que votre téléviseurpeut recevoir. Ceci prendra une ou deux minutes.

PROGRAMMATION EN COURS

48

MODE TUNER : CÂBLE ANT.

COMMENCER

Le Plug In Menu apparaît lorsque vous mettez votre téléviseur en marche pour la première fois.Ce menu permet d’effectuer quelques-uns des réglages de base de votre téléviseur. Voustrouverez, à compter de la page 22, une description complète du Plug In Menu. Nous vousrecommandons d’effectuer les sélections du Plug In Menu avant de commencer à utiliser votretéléviseur. Toutefois, pour commencer à utiliser immédiatement votre téléviseur, il vous suffitd’effectuer la configuration du sélecteur Auto Tuner. Votre téléviseur pourra ainsi apprendre lescanaux qu’il peut recevoir. Reportez-vous aux étapes ci-après pour configurer le sélecteurAuto Tuner.

La configuration du sélecteur Auto Tuner est terminée lorsque le message PROGRAMMATIONTERMINÉE apparaît à l’écran.

Votre Configuration rapide est maintenant terminée. Vous pouvez commencer à regarder latélévision, ou vous pouvez poursuivre la lecture de ce guide pour plus de renseignements surle raccordement des appareils audio/vidéo, la programmation de votre télécommande ou l’utili -sation du système JVC de menus à l’écran pour particulariser votre expérience d’écoute.

PLUG IN MENU

LANGUE ANG. FRAN. ESP.RÉGLER AUTO TUNERRÉGLER HORLOGE

TERMINER

CHOIX PAROPÈRE PAR

SORTIRPAR

EXIT

Configuration rapide 3

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 10

Page 185: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

ConnexionsConnexions de câble et magnétoscope

Schéma No. 1

Il existe trois types de base de connexion d’antenne ou de câble:

• Si vous avez une antenne ou un système de câble qui ne vous oblige pas à utiliser uneboîte de câble pour sélectionner les canaux, veuillez vous reporter au schéma No. 1.

• Si vous avez un système de câble qui nécessite l’utilisation d’une boîte de câble pouraccéder à l’ensemble des canaux, veuillez vous reporter au schéma No. 2. Si vous nepouvez utiliser votre fonction PIP (image sur image) en vous reportant au schéma No. 2,essayez la connexion illustrée dans le schéma No. 3. Il se peut que votre boîte de câblepermette la transmission, à votre téléviseur, du signal d’un seul canal à la fois.

• Si vous avez un système de câble qui nécessite l’utilisation d’une boîte de câble pouraccéder à certains canaux de premier choix, mais non aux canaux de câble de base,veuillez vous reporter au schéma No. 3.

• Pour votre commodité, la connexion à un magnétoscope est également illustrée dans lesschémas suivants. Un magnétoscope n’est pas nécessaire à l’utilisation du téléviseur nide la fonction PIP. Vous pouvez omettre le magnétoscope de vos connexions si vous ledésirez.

• Pour obtenir des instructions sur le raccordement d’un magnétoscope seulement, veuillezvous reporter au Guide de configuration rapide, à la page 9.

• Pour obtenir des instructions sur l’utilisation de l’image sur image (PIP), veuillez vousreporter à la page 44.

• La fonction PIP est disponible uniquement sur les modèles A V-36F802, AV-32F802 etAV-27F802.

Illustration du modèleAV-27F802

1) Raccordez le fil de câblovision ou d’antenne provenant de la sortie murale dans l’entrée HFdu répartiteur à deux voies.

2) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’une des sorties HF du répartiteur dans l’entrée HF àl’arrière du magnétoscope.

3) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’autre sortie HF du répartiteur dans l’entrée HF à l’ar-rière du téléviseur.

4) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope dans le jackd’entrée vidéo du téléviseur, ou raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo dumagnétoscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.

5) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscopedans le jack d’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.

6) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope dansle jack d’entrée audio droit du téléviseur.

• Si votre magnétoscope est un appareil monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack de sortie audio.Raccordez le à l’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.

11

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 11

Page 186: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connexions

12

Connexions de câble et magnétoscope – suiteSchéma No. 2

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

1) Raccordez le fil de câblovision ou d’antenne provenant de la sortie murale dans l’entrée HFde la boîte de câble.

2) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de la sortie HF de la boîte de câble dans l’entrée HF à l’arrière du magnétoscope.

3) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de la sortie HF à l’arrière du magnétoscope dans l’entréeHF à l’arrière du téléviseur.

4) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope dans le jackd’entrée vidéo du téléviseur, ou raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo dumagnétoscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.

5) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscope dansle jack d’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.

6) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope dansle jack d’entrée audio droit du TV.

• Reportez-vous à la page 44 pour obtenir des info rmations surutiliser le fonction PIP avec unboîte de câbl e.

• Si votre magnétoscope est un appareil monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack de sortie audio.Raccordez-le à l’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.

• Pour plus de renseignements sur son fonctionnement, veuillez vous reporter au manueld’instructions du magnétoscope.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 12

Page 187: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connexions

13

Les schémas de connexion ont pour but de montrer quelques connexions généralesde base. Certaines compagnies de câble peuvent exiger des connexions particulièresen vue d’une utilisation appropriée de votre téléviseur . Si vous suivez ces schémaset que le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas adéquatement,contactez votre compagnie decâble locale pour plus de renseignements concernant les connexions.

Connexions de câble et magnétoscope – suiteSchéma No.3

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

1) Raccordez le fil de câblovision ou d’antenne provenant de la sortie murale dans l’entrée HFdu répartiteur à deux voies.

2) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’une des sorties HF du répartiteur à l’entrée HF de laboîte de câble.

3) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de la sortie de la boîte de câble dans l’entrée HF dumagnétoscope.

4) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’autre sortie HF du répartiteur à l’entrée HF à l’arrièredu téléviseur.

5) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope au jack d’en-trée vidéo du téléviseur, ou raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo du magné-toscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.

6) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscope aujack d’entrée audio gauche du TV.

7) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope aujack d’entrée audio droit du téléviseur.

• Reportez-vous à la page 44 pour obtenir des info rmations surutiliser le fonction PIP avec unboîte de câbl e.

• Si votre magnétoscope est un appareil monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack de sortie audio.Raccordez-le à l’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.

• Pour plus de renseignements sur son fonctionnement, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’instructions du magnétoscope.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 13

Page 188: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connexions

14

Connexion à un Lecteur de DVD

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

1) Raccordez le câble vert provenant de la sortie composant « Y » du lecteur de DVD à l’en-trée du composant « Y » du téléviseur.

2) Raccordez le câble bleu provenant de la sortie composant « PB » du lecteur de DVD à l’en-trée du composant « PB » du téléviseur.

3) Raccordez le câble rouge provenant de la sortie composant « PR » du lecteur de DVD àl’entrée du composant « PR » du téléviseur.

4) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du lecteur de DVD à l’entrée audio gauche 2 du téléviseur.

5) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du lecteur de DVD àl’entrée audio droite 2 du téléviseur.

• Le vert, le bleu et le rouge sont les couleurs les plus répandues pour les câbles de DVD. Lescouleurs peuvent différer sur certains modèles ; veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’instruc -tions pour de plus amples renseignements sur votre lecteur de DVD.

• Veillez à ne pas confondre le câble DVD rouge avec le câble audio rouge. Il est préférablede terminer une série de connexions (sortie audio ou DVD) avant de commencer l’autre afind’éviter de changer accidentellement les câbles.

• Reportez-vous à la page 20 pour des instructions sur le façon de programmer votre télécom-mande pour utiliser les fonctions de base de votre lecteur de DVD.

• AV-36F802, AV-32F802 et AV-27F802 : Vous pouvez également raccorder le lecteur de DVDà l’entrée 4.Si vous utilisez l’entrée 4 pour la connexion DVD, vous devez mettre le V4 COM-PONENT-IN sur le Menu de configuration initiale à la position « OUI » pour un affichageapproprié du signal DVD.

• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 et AV-27F702 : Si vous utilisez l’entrée 2 (Component-In) pour laconnexion DVD, vous devez mettre le V2 COMPONENT-IN sur le Menu de configuration ini-tiale à la position « OUI » pour un affichage approprié du signal DVD.

• Remarque : Les lecteurs de DVD progressifs (lecteurs avec un balayage de sortie de31,50 KHz) ne fonctionneront pas adéquatement avec ce téléviseur.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 14

Page 189: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connexions

1) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du caméscope au jack d’entréevidéo du téléviseur, OU raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo duCaméscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.

2) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du caméscope au jackd’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.

3) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du caméscope au jackd’en trée audio droit du téléviseur.

• Si votre caméscope est un modèle monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack audio. Raccordez-leau jack audio gauche du téléviseur.

Connexion à un Amplificateur Extérieur

Connexion à un Caméscope

1) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant du jack de sortie audio gauche du téléviseur aujack d’entrée audio gauche de l’amplificateur.

2) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant du jack de sortie audio droit du téléviseur aujack d’entrée audio droit de l’amplificateur.

• Reportez-vous également à « H. Parleur TV » et « Sans audio » à la page 38 pour de plusamples renseignements sur l’utilisation des haut-parleurs externes.

Vous pouvez raccorder un caméscope à votre téléviseur en utilisant les jacks d’entrée avant(entrée 3) situés sous la porte du panneau avant. Pour y avoir accès, appuyez doucementsur la porte pour l’ouvrir. Vous pouvez également raccorder une console de jeu ou un autreappareil à l’aide de ces jacks. On peut également raccorder les caméscopes aux jacks d’en-trée arrière du téléviseur.

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

15

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 15

Page 190: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Connexions

Pour raccorder : Branchez une extrémité du câble de la liaison informatique AV dans l’entréede liaison informatique AV de votre magnétoscope ou lecteur DVD à liaison informatique.Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble de la liaison informatique AV dans l’entrée de la liaisoninformatique AV à l’arrière du téléviseur.

Connexions au Liaison informatique AV de JVC

Le Lien AV informatique JVC automatise entièrement la lecteur des bandes vidéo ou desDVD. Il vous suffit d’insérer une bande pré-enregistrée dans votre magnétoscope de mar-que JVC ou un DVDdans votre lecteur de DVD JVC et l’appareil se mettra automatiquementen marche et commencera la lecteur. Au même moment, grâce au Lien AV informatique, lemagnétoscope ou le lecteur de DVD envoie un signal au téléviseur lui disant de se mettreen marche et de passer à l’entrée vidéo appropriée.• Il se peut que le câble de la liaison informatique AV soit inclus avec l’accessoire de la liai -

son informatique AV JVC que vous désirez raccorder. Sinon, contactez un centre de serv-ice JVC agréé pour vous procurer la pièce No. EWP 805-012.

• La liaison informatique AV ne peut être utilisée qu’avec les produits de marque JVC.

REMARQUE :

• La lecture de la bande vidéo ne pourra commencer automatiquement que si les languettesd’enregistrement ont été retirées de la bande VHS. Si la languette est en place, il y auracommutation automatique lorsque vous appuierez sur le bouton PLAY du magnétoscope.

• Le câble de la liaison informatique AV possède une fiche mâle (mono) de 3,5 mm à chaqueextrémité.

• Si votre magnétoscope de marque JVC présente une commutation « A Code/B CodeRemote Control Switching » (commutation de télécommande code A/code B) (reportez-vousau manuel d’instructions de votre magnétoscope), l’utilisation du Code A magnétoscopecommutera le téléviseur à l’entrée 1.

• Si vous utilisez l’entrée 1 pour l’entrée vidéo de votre boîte de câble, utilisez le Code B mag-nétoscope pour sélectionner l’entrée 2 vidéo TV.

• Pour raccorder un amplificateur ou un récepteur haute fidélité JVC en vue de l’obtention d’uncinéma domestique entièrement automatisé, reportez-vous aux consignes de raccordementde l’appareil haute fidélité pour plus de renseignements sur le raccordement.

• AV COMPU LINK EX est compatible avec les récepteurs suivants:RX-664V, RX-665V,RX-668VBK, RX-774V, RX-778VBK, RX-884V, RX-888VBK, RX-1024V, RX-1028VBK et lesmodèles subséquents de récepteur.

Illustration du modèle AV-27F802

16

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 16

Page 191: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Changement des PilesAppuyez sur le couvercle arrière de la télécommande et faites-le glisser vers le bas pour leretirer. Installez avec précaution les deux piles AA fournies en repérant les marques « + »et « – » des piles et de la télécommande. Pour éviter un court-circuit, insérez le « – » en pre-mier.Une fois les piles posées, enclenchez le couvercle en place.• Si la télécommande se comporte de façon anormale, remplacez les piles. Les piles durent

de six mois à un an. Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser des piles alcalines qui durent pluslongtemps.

Lorsque vous remplacez les piles, tâchez de le faire en moins de trois minutes. Si l’opérationde changement des piles dure plus de trois minutes, vous devrez peut-être réintroduire lescodes de la télécommande pour votre magnétoscope, lecteur de DVD et/ou votre boîte decâble (pages 18-20).

TélécommandeFonctiones de base de la télécommande• Avant de pouvoir utiliser la télécommande, vous devez d’abord

poser les piles (fournies). Reportez-vous à la section« Changement des piles » au bas de cette page pour instruc-tions. (Vous trouverez une illustration à la page 8.)

• Appuyez sur le bouton POWER pour mettre la télévision enmarche ou à l’arrêt.

• Assurez-vous que le commutateur TV/CATV se trouve sur laposition TV. Mettez le commutateur sur la position CATVseulement si vous devez utiliser une boîte de câble.

• Faites glisser le sélecteur VCR/DVD à la position VCR pourcommander un magnétoscope, faites glisser à la position DVDpour commander un lecteur de DVD. Veuillez vous reporteraux pages 18 à 20 pour instructions sur la programmation devotre télécommande en vue de l’utilisation d’une boîte decâble, d’un magnétoscope ou d’un lecteur de DVD.

• Appuyez sur les boutons CH+ et CH– pour balayer à traversles canaux. Tapez sur le bouton CH+ ou CH– pour passer àtravers les canaux un à la fois.

• Pour passer rapidement à travers les canaux à l’aide de lafonction Hyperscan de JVC, enfoncez et tenez les boutonsCH+ ou CH–. Les canaux défileront au rythme de cinq parseconde.

• Appuyez sur VOL+ ou VOL– pour augmenter ou baisser le vol-ume. Une barre indicatrice apparaîtra à l’écran pour vous mon-trer le niveau du volume de la télévision.

• Les boutons CH+/– et VOL +/– servent également à la naviga-tion dans le système JVC de menus à l’écran.

• Vous pouvez accéder directement à des canaux particuliers àl’aide du pavé à 10 touches.

• Pour plus de renseignements sur les fonctions des boutons dela télécommande, reportez-vous aux pages 40 à 45. Pour desinformations sur l’utilisation des menus à l’écran, reportez-vous à la page 21.

Remarque : La télécommande modèle RM-C301G est illustrée àgauche. Il se peut qu’une télécommande de modèle différent aitété fournie avec votre téléviseur.

17

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 17

Page 192: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Programmation de laTélécommandeR é g l a ge des Codes CAT V, M ag n é t o s c o p e , et lecteur DV D

Vous pouvez programmer votre télécommande de manière à actionner votre boîte de câbl e,récepteur satellite, magnétoscope ou lecteur de DVD en vous reportant aux instructions et auxcodes apparaissant ci-après. Si l’appareil ne répond à aucun des codes énumérés ci-après ouà la fonction de recherche de codes, utilisez la télécommande fo u rnie par le fa b ri c a n t .

Codes de Boîte de Câble ou d’Antenne ParaboliqueLa télécommande est programmée avec les codes CATV et/ou antenne parabolique pour lamise en marche et à l’arrêt, le balayage de canaux vers le haut et vers le bas et le clavier à 10touches.1) Repérez la marque CATV/antenne parabolique à même la liste des codes apparaissant ci-après.2) Faites glissez l’interrupteur/sélecteur de mode à deux voies à la position CATV.3) Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY et tenez-le enfoncé.4) Introduisez le premier numéro de code indiqué au clavier à 10 touches tout en continuant à

appuyer sur le bouton DISPLAY.5) Relâchez le bouton DISPLAY.6) Assurez-vous que la boîte de câble/le récepteur d’antenne parabolique fonctionne.• Si votre boîte CATV ou d’antenne parabolique ne répond pas au premier code, essayez les

autres codes apparaissant sur la liste. Si elle ne répond à aucun code, essayez la fonctiondes codes de recherche décrite à la page 50.

18

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 18

Page 193: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Programmation de laTélécommande

Codes de MagnétoscopeLa télécommande est programmée avec les codes magnétoscope pour la mise en marche et àl’arrêt, la lecture, l’arrêt, l’avance rapide, le rembobinage et le balayage de canaux vers le hautet vers le bas.

1) Repérez la marque magnétoscope à même la liste des codes apparaissant ci-après.2) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre

interrupteur/ sélecteur à deux voies à la position « VCR ».3) Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY et tenez-le enfoncé.4) Introduisez le premier numéro de code indiqué au clavier à 10 touches tout en continuant à

appuyer sur le bouton DISPLAY.5) Relâchez le bouton DISPLAY.6) Assurez-vous que le magnétoscope fonctionne.• Si votre magnétoscope ne répond pas au premier code, essayez les autres codes apparais-

sant sur la liste. Si elle ne répond à aucun code, essayez la fonction des codes derecherche décrite à la page 50.

• Il se peut que les magnétoscopes de certains fabricants ne répondent pas au boutonTV/VCRmême si d’autres boutons fonctionnent correctement.

• Pour enregistrer, tenez le bouton REC de la télécommande enfoncé et appuyez sur PLAY.

19

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 19

Page 194: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Programmation de laTélécommande

20

La télécommande est programmée avec les codes DVD pour la mise en marche et à l’arrêt, lalecture, l’arrêt, l’avance rapide, le rembobinage, chapitre précédent, chapitre suivant,l’overture/la fermeture du plateau, et l’image fixe/la pause.

1) Repérez la marque de lecteur DVD à même la liste des codes apparaissant ci-après.2) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre

interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « DVD ».3) Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY et tenez-le enfoncé.4) Introduisez le premier numéro de code indiqué au clavier à 10 touches tout en continuant à

appuyer sur le bouton DISPLAY.5) Relâchez le bouton DISPLAY.6) Assurez-vous que le lecteur DVD fonctionne.

• Si votre lecteur DVD ne répond pas au premier code, essayez les autres codes apparaissantsur la liste. Si elle ne répond à aucun code, essayez la fonction des codes de recherchedécrite à la page 50.

• Après que vous ayez programmé votre télécommande, il se peut que certains boutons DVDne fonctionnent pas adéquatement. Si certains boutons ne fonctionnent pas adéquatement,utilisez la télécommande qui était fournie avec votre lecteur DVD.

Codes de lecteur DVD

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 20

Page 195: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Les Menus à l’Écran

21

Utilisation de ce Guide

Les Menus à l’Écran :

Les flèches montante et descendante signifient d’appuyer sur les boutons Channel Up ouChannel Down. Une pression des boutons de flèche montante ou descendante vous permetde :

Les flèches montante et descendante signifient d’appuyer sur les boutons Channel Upou Channel Down. Une pression des boutons de flèche montante ou descendante vouspermet de :• vous déplacer verticalement dans l’écran du menu principal• vous déplacer à travers un sous-menu• passer à la lettre ou au nombre suivant, ou autre choix dans un sous-menu• revenir en arrière afin de corriger une erreur• balayer les canaux de télévision (lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans un menu)

Les flèches gauche et droite signifient d’appuyer sur le bouton Volume Left ou VolumeRight pour :• sélectionner l’élément mis en relief dans un menu• sélectionner les options d’un sous-menu• sélectionner les numéros de certaines options de menu• monter ou baisser le volume (lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans un écran de menu)Appuyez sur le bouton « Appuyez » signifie qu’il faut appuyer sur ce bouton de la télé-commande.La « main d’aide »est dirigée vers l’élément en surbrillance ou sélectionné dans unmenu.

Pour faire remonter le menu à l’écran , appuyez sur le bouton MENU de la télécommande.L’élément qui apparaît en jaune est l’élément sélectionné. Si vous appuyez à nouveau sur lebouton MENU, l’affichage à l’écran passera à l’écran de menu suivant. Le « Plug In Menu »apparaîtra la première fois que le téléviseur sera branché.

Remarque : Les menus apparaissant dans ce manuel sont des illustrations et non des repro-ductions exactes des affichages à l’écran du téléviseur.

PLUG IN MENU

LANGUE ANG. FRAN. ESP.RÉGLER AUTO TUNERRÉGLER HORLOGE

TERMINER

CHOIX PAROPÈRE PAR

SORTIRPAR

EXIT

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 21

Page 196: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In Menu

22

Introduction

Régler Auto Tuner

LangueFaites votre choix entre l’anglais, le français ou l’espagnol pour les écrans des menus et desaffichages.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour LANGUE

Pour choisir une langue

Au cours de la configuration automatique du sélecteur, le téléviseur analyse automatiquementtous les canaux disponibles, met en mémoire ceux qui sont actifs et saute les canaux vides ouceux dont le signal est faible. Ceci signifie que, lorsque vous balayez (à l’aide des boutonsCHANNEL +/–), vous ne recevez que des canaux clairs et actifs.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour RÉGLER AUTO TUNER

Pour exécuter

Pour choisir CÂBLEou ANT.

Pour passer à la position COMMENCER

Pour commencer configuration automatique du sélecteur

• Bruit réduit est hors service au cours de la configuration automatique du sélcteur.• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis le

Plug In Menu.

PROGRAMMATIONEN COURS

PROGRAMMATION TERMINÉE

48

La programmation durera 1 à 2 minutes.

• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis lePlug In Menu.

Le Plug In Menu remonte automatiquement lorsque vous mettez le téléviseur en marche lapremière fois après l’avoir branché. Le Plug In Menu vous aide à préparer votre téléviseur àl’utilisation en vous permettant de fixer vos choix pour :

• la langue dans laquelle vous voulez que les menus à l’écran apparaissent,• la configuration automatique du sélecteur des canaux que vous désirez recevoir,• le réglage de l’horloge TV à la bonne heure de manière à ce que vos fonctions de minuterie

fonctionnent adéquatement.

Des descriptions de chacune des fonctions du Plug In Menu apparaissent sur cette page et surla page suivante. Nous vous recommandons de terminer la configuration du Plug In Menu enpremier de manière à ce que votre téléviseur soit immédiatement configuré de la manière dontvous le désirez.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 22

Page 197: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In Menu

23

Régler Horloge AutomatiqueVous devez d’abord régler l’horloge avant d’utiliser l’une quelconque des fonctions de minuteriede votre téléviseur. Vous pouvez régler votre horloge avec précision à l’aide du signal horaireXDS diffusé par la plupart des stations PBS. Pour régler l’horloge à l’aide du signal XDS :

Introduisez le numéro de canal de votre station PBS locale

Appuyez sur MENU

Pour RÉGLERHORLOGE

Pour exécuter

Pour AUTO.

Vers TIME ZONE

Pour sélectionner votre fuseau horaire

Pour passer à l’heure avancée (D.S.T.)

Pour activer ou inhiber l’heure avancée

Pour TERMINER

Pour quitter et mettre les réglages en mémoire

• Si vous n’avez pas de poste PBS dans votre région, vous devrez régler l’horloge manuelle-ment.Reportez-vous à « Régler Horloge Manuel » en haut de la colonne suivante pourinstructions.

• La fonction heure avancée ajuste automatiquement l’horloge de votre téléviseur pour l’heureavancée. L’horloge avancera d’une heure à 2 heures du matin le premier dimanche d’avril.L’horloge reculera d’une heure à 2 heures du matin le dernier dimanche d’octobre.

MODE AUTO. MANUEL

TIME ZONE PACIFIQUED.S.T. ON OFF

TERMINER

• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis lePlug In Menu.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 23

Page 198: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Plug In Menu

24

Pour régler votre horloge manuellement (sans utiliser le signal XDS), choisissez MANUELdepuis le menu Régler horloge et suivez les étapes ci-après.

Pour RÉGLERHORLOGE

Pour exécuter

Pour MANUEL

Pour passer à l’heure

Pour régler l’heure

Pour passer aux minutes

Pour régler les minutes

Pour PARTIR HORLOGE

Pour démarrer l’horloge et quitter

MODE AUTO. MANUEL

HEURE --:-- --

PARTIR HORLOGE

MERCI !!

Régler Horloge Manuel

REMARQUE :Vous devrez remettre l’horloge à l’heure après une panne secteur. Vous devez régler l’horlogeavant d’utiliser l’une quelconque des fonctions de minuterie.

Lorsque les éléments du Plug In Menu sont réglés à vos choix personnels, passez à l’optionFinish pour mettre vos réglages en mémoire.

Pour TERMINER

Pour mettre les réglages en mémoire et quitter

• Vous pouvez modifier les choix que vous avez définis dans le Plug In Menu à tout moment àl’aide du système de menus à l’écran JVC.

Terminer

• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis lePlug In Menu.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 24

Page 199: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Sommaire CanauxSommaire Canaux

Sommaire canaux vous permet de particulariser l’éventail de canaux reçus par votre téléviseur.Vous pouvez ajouter ou éliminer des canaux de la liste de balayage ou les verrouiller afin d’em-pêcher des spectateurs non autorisés de regarder un ou plusieurs parmi ces canaux (jusqu’à181).

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour SOMMAIRE CANAUXPour exécuter

L’écran Sommaire canaux (au-dessus) affichera maintenant les canaux à balayer marqués d’un« ü ». Vous pouvez supprimer des canaux du balayage en retirant le « ü ». Si des canaux ontété manqués durant la configuration automatique du sélecteur et que vous désirez les ajouter,vous pouvez le faire en plaçant un « ü » à côté du numéro du canal.

Pour accéder à la colonne BALAYAGE

Pour inclure ou éliminer de la liste de balayage

EXIT lorsque vous avez terminé

Vous pouvez bloquer accés à canal avec Channel Guard.

Pour SOMMAIRE CANAUX

Pour exécuter

Pour accéder à la colonne de verrouillage

Appuyez sur le code d’accès ZÉRO (0) pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller ce canal

Appuyez pour quitter une fois terminé

Message d’un canal réservé

Ce message apparaît quand un spectateur tente de regarder un canal réservé :

Pour regarder un canal que vous avez verrouillé,entrez le code de verrouillage en utilisant le pavénumérique à 10 touches.

Si un code erroné est entré, le message suivantapparaît : CODED’ACCÈS INVALIDE

Il est impossible d’accéder à ce canal jusqu’à ceque le code correct soit introduit.

• Une fois un canal déverrouillé, il demeurera déverrouillé jusq’à ce que le téléviseur soit mis àl’arrêt.

• Reportez-vous « Régler Code Verrouiller », page 33.

C A N º . BA L AYA . CANº. BA L AYA.

0 1 06 ü

0 2 ü 07

0 3 ü 08

0 4 ü 09 ü

0 5 ü 10 ü

CE CANAL EST VERROUILLÉ PAR CODE ENTRER CODE DE CONTRÔLE AU CLAVIER DE 10 CHIFFRES

POUR LE LIBÉRERNO - - - -

25

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 25

Page 200: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

26

Votre téléviseur est pourvu de la technologie puce V, ce qui permet aux parents d’imposer desDirectives parentales pour la télévision (aux États-Unis et au Canada) et les films (MPAA). Latechnologie de la puce V vous permet de programmer votre téléviseur de manière à recevoir, ou àne pas recevoir, certains programmes sur la base de leur contenu conformément aux directives.Les programmes qui dépassent les limites de cotes que vous imposez seront bloqués. Lorsqu’unspectateur tente de voir un canal bloqué, le message suivant apparaît :

Le canal demeurera bloqué jusqu’à l’introduction du code de verrouillage approprié (reportez-vousà la page 33 pour obtenir des informations sur le réglage de votre code de verrouillage).

Vous pouvez adapter les réglages de la puce V de votre téléviseur à vos goûts personnels. LemenuV-Chip ci-après est le point de départ de vos réglages de puce V.

Vous pouvez utiliser les réglages américains de puce V (pour les programmes diffusés depuis lesÉtats-Unis), les réglages canadiens de puce V (pour les programmes diffusés depuis le Canada)et les cotes de film. Vous pouvez utiliser l’un quelconque des réglages ou tous les réglages (puceV US, puce V Canada, cotes de film). Des descriptions pour le réglage de chacun des trois for-mats de puce V apparaissent dans les sept pages qui suivent, accompagnées de descriptions descatégories de cotes.

Pour accéder aux catégories de cotes :

CE PROGRAMME DÉPASSE VOSLIMITES DE COTE.ENTRER CODE BLOCAGEPAR LE CLAVIER 10 TOUCHESPOUR DÉVERROUILLER

NO - - - -

V-CHIP ON OFFFIXER COTES TÉlÉVISEURFIXER COTES FILMSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN ANGSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN FRANONCOTÉ VISUALISER BLOC

TERMINER

Remarque spéciale au sujet des cotes

Certains programes ne possèdent pas de signal de cote. Par conséquent, même si vous configurez la puce V, ces programmes ne seront pas verrouillés. Les parents sont avisés de

regarder préalablement le contenu de ces programmes ou de ces films.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Vers V-CHIPPour exécuter (l’icône de verrouillage aparaît)

Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder au menu Puce V

Pour activer (ON) ou inhiber (OFF) la puce V (la puce V doit être activée pour queles réglages de cotes fonctionnent).

Pour passer à FIXER COTES TÉLÉVISEUR, FIXER COTES FILM ou SYST CLASSIFI-CATCAN (reportez-vous aux pages suivantes pour des descriptions de chaque option).

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 26

Page 201: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

27

Fixer Cotes Téléviseur (Systèmes Américains) SYSTÈMES AMÉRICAINS DE COTES PARENTALESLes programmes possèdant les cotes suivantes sont appropriés pour les enfants. TV Y est approprié pour tous les enfants.

Les programmes sont réalisés pour de très jeunes spectateurs et ils devraient convenir àtous les âges, y compris les enfants âgés de 2 à 6 ans.

TV Y7 est destiné aux enfants plus âges.La plupart des parents trouveraient ces programmes convenables pour les enfants âgés de7 ans et plus. On peut y trouver une certaine violence de comédie ou de fantaisie peusévère. Les enfants devraient pouvoir distinguer la réalité de la fantaisie.

Les programmes possèdant les cotes suivantes sont appropriés pour l’ensemble desspectateurs.

TV G signifie Audience Générale .La plupart des parents trouveraient ces programmes convenables pour tous les groupesd’âge. Ils contiennent peu de violence, voire même aucune, aucun langage choquant, etpeu de dialogue ou de situations sexuels, voire même aucun.

TV PG Direction parentale suggérée .Peut contenir un certain langage choquant, mais pas beaucoup, une violence limitée, et uncertain dialogue ou certaines suggestions à teneur sexuelle suggestive. Il est recommandéaux parents de regarder ces programmes en premier, ou de les regarder avec leurs enfants.

TV 14 Parents fortement mis en garde.Les programmes contiennent un matériel qui peut ne pas convenir aux enfants de moins de14 ans, notamment une possibilité de violence intense, de situations sexuelles, de langagegrossier et choquant, ou de dialogue fortement suggestif. Les parents sont mis en gardecontre l’écoute sans surveillance par des enfants de moins de 14 ans.

TV MA Audiences adultes seulement.Ces programmes sont destinés spécifiquement aux adultes, et il se peut qu’ils neconviennent pas à une personne âgée de moins de 17 ans. Les programmes TV MApeuvent présenter un important contenuV, S, L ou D.

Directives d’écouteOutre les catégories de cotes expliquées ci-dessus, des informations sont égalementfournies avec la cote puce V sur des types précis de contenu. Ces types de contenupeuvent également être bloqués. Les types de contenu sont les suivants :

• V/FV signifie VIOLENCE/VIOLENCE FANTAISIE • S signifie CONTENU SEXUEL• L signifie LANGAGE choquant• D signifie DIALOG suggestif

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 27

Page 202: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

Alignez le curseur de la colonne (TV PG, TV G, etc.) sur la rangée contenu (V/FV, S, etc.) et

appuyez sur or pour déplacer le curseur à l’emplacement correct. Appuyez sur or pour activer ou inhiber la fonction de verrouillage. Un élément est verrouillé si apparaîtl’icône plutôt qu’un « – ».

Exemple. Pour bloquer l’écoute de tous les programmes TV 14, déplacez le curseur à larangée supérieure de cette colonne et ajoutez une icône de verrouillage. Lorsque vous aurezplacé un verrou sur la rangée supérieure, tout ce qui se trouve dans cette colonne seraverrouillé automatiquement.

Vers la colonne TV 14

Pour activer le verrouillage

Pour TERMINER

Pour mettre les réglages en mémoire et quitter

• Si vous désirez modifier la configuration, déplacez le curseur à la colonne supérieure etmodifiez l’icône de verrouillage à « – ». Vous pouvez alors sélectionner des catégoriesindividuelles à bloquer.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Vers V-CHIPPour exécuter (l’icône de verrouillage aparaît)

Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder au menu Puce V

Pour activer (ON) ou inhiber (OFF) la puce V

Pour passer à FIXERCOTES TÉLÉVISEUR

Pour exécuter

V-CHIP ON OFFFIXER COTES TÉlÉVISEURFIXER COTES FILMSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN ANGSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN FRANONCOTÉ VISUALISER BLOC

TERMINER

Fixer Cotes Téléviseur

Pour configurer les cotes de Directives Parentales TV (EU) :

28

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 28

Page 203: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

29

Fixer cotes avec le bouton V-Chip

Exemple 2 :

Si vous voulez configurer vos réglages de la puce V de manière à bloquer toute laprogrammation au-dessus d’un réglage courant tel que TV PG-V (avec violence) :

Appuyez sur ZERO lors de l’affichage de TV PG-V

Toute la programmation au-dessus de TV-PG-V avec violence sera bloquée.

Pour accéder aux informations de cote au sujet d’un programme particulier, appuyez sur lebouton de la puce V tout en regardant ce programme. Le message suivant apparaît :

Si vous décidez que vous voulez bloquer cette catégorie d’écoute, appuyez sur « 0 » pendantque l’écran ci-dessus est visible, et tous les programmes de cette catégorie seront verrouillés.

Exemple 1 :

Si vous voulez définir vos réglages V-Chip (puce V) de manière à bloquer tous les programmesau-dessus de TV PG.

Appuyez sur ZERO lors de l’affichage de TV-PG

Toute la programmation au-dessus de TV-PG sera bloquée.

• En ce qui concerne l’écoute des enfants, vous pouvez bloquer les programmes TV-Y et Y7en appuyant sur « 0 » lorsque Y est affiché durant un programme. Les programmes pourpublics autres que des enfants ne seront pas touchés.

LE PROGRAMME EST COTÉ :TV-PG - V

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 29

Page 204: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

30

NR - Non coté.Il s’agit d’un film non coté. Ces films sont souvent importés de pays qui n’utilisent pas lesystème de cotes MPAA. D’autres films non cotés peuvent être l’oeuvre de réalisateursamateurs qui n’avaient pas l’intention de diffuser leur film dans le grand public.La programmation NR (non coté) peut contenir tous les types de programmation, y comprisdes programmes pour enfants, des programmes étrangers ou du matériel adulte.

G – Audience Générale .Selon le conseil d’étude, ces films ne contiennent rien en fait de contenu sexuel, violence oulangage qui ne conviendrait pas à un public de quelque âge que ce soit.

PG – Direction Parentale .La Direction parentale signifie que le film peut présenter un certain contenu tel que faibleviolence, une brève scène de nudité et un langage fort. Le contenu n’est pas réputéintense.

PG-13 – Parents Fortement Avisés.Les parents ayant des enfants de moins de 13 ans sont avisés que le contenu de films ainsicotés peut comprendre un contenu sexuel et de langage plus explicite et plus de violenceque les films cotés PG.

R - Restreint.Ces films contiennent du matériel de nature explicite, et ils ne sont pas recommandés pourdes enfants de moins de 17 ans sans supervision.

NC-17 - Personne de moins de 17 ans.Ces films sont considérés comme étant ce que la plupart des parents jugeraient trop adultepour l’écoute de leurs enfants, et ils peuvent contenir un langage choquant, des scènes denudité, de la violence et des sujets suggestifs et explicites.

X - Personne de moins 18 ans.Inappropriate material for anyone under 18.

Fixer Cotés Film

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Vers V-CHIPPour exécuter (l’icone de verrouillage apparaît)

Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder aux options de configuration de la puce V

Pour passer à FIXER COTESFILM

Pour accéder au menu des cotesAinsi, pour interdire aux spectateurs les programmes X et NC-17 :

Vers la colonne XPour activer le verrouillage

Vers la colonne NC-17

Pour activer le verrouillage

Pour TERMINER

Pour enregistrer les réglages et quitter

Instructions pour bloquer l’écoute de films :

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 30

Page 205: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

31

E – Exemptées.Les programmes exempts comprennent : les informations, les émissions sportives, lesdocumentaires et autres programmes d’information, les débats, les vidéos de musique, etles programmes de variétes.

G – Général.Directives de violence :il n’y aura aucune scène réaliste de violence. Les descriptions decomportements agressifs seront rares et limitées à des représentations de nature claire-ment fictive, comique ou irréaliste.

8ans+ – Général-Déconseillé aux jeunes enfants.Directives de violence :toute description réaliste de violence sera rare, discrète ou peuintensive, et montrera les conséquences des actes. Il n’y aura ni langage choquant, ninudité, ni contenu sexuel.

13ans+ – Cette émission peut ne pas convenir aux enfants de moins de 13 ans.Programmes destinés à une audience générale, mais qui peuvent ne pas convenir à dejeunes enfants. Les parents peuvent juger que certain contenu ne convient pas à desenfants âgés de 8 à 13 ans.

16ans+ – Cette émission ne convient pas aux moins de 16 ans.Les parents sont fortement avisés d’exercer leur discrétion avant d’autoriser l’écoute par despré-adolescents et des jeunes adolescents. Les programmes peuvent contenir des thèmesmûrs ainsi que des scènes de violence intense.

18ans+ – Cette émission est réservée aux adultes.Matériel destiné uniquement à un public adulte.

Cotes Canadiennes de puce V

Instructions pour configurer les cotes Canadiennes de puce V :Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Vers V-CHIP

Pour exécuter (l’icone de verrouillage apparaît)

Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder aux options de configuration de la puce V

Pour passer à SYST CLASSIFICAT CAN FRA (pour Français)Pour accéder au menu des cotes

Ainsi, pour interdire aux spectateurs les programmes 16ans+ and 18ans+ :

Vers la colonne 18ans+Pour activer le verrouillageVers la colonne 16ans+

Pour activer le verrouillage

Pour TERMINER

Pour enregistrer les réglages et quitter

Pour obtenir des instructions sur « SYST CLASSIFICAT CAN ANG (en anglais) », veuillez vousreporter à la page 31 du côté anglais du présent manuel.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 31

Page 206: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

32

Programmes Non Coté

Remarques au sujet des progranmmes non cotés:La programmation non cotée désigne tout programme qui ne contient pas de signal de cote.Les programmes des postes de télévision qui ne transmettent pas de signaux de cote serontdans la catégorie « Programmation non cotée ».

Exemples de programmes non cotés :

Bulletins d’urgenceProgrammes d’origine localeInformationsProgrammes PolitiquesAnnonces de Sevices PublicsProgrammes ReligeuxSportsMétéoCertaines récames télévisées

• Les films ou les programmes de télévision qui n’ont pas de signal de cote seront bloqués si

la catégorie non cotée est mise à BLOC (Verrouillage).

Instructions pour bloquer les programmes non cotés :

Vous pouvez bloquer des programmes qui ne sont pas cotés.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Vers V-CHIP

Pour exécuter (l’icone de verrouillage apparaît)

Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder aux options de configuration de la puce V

Vers NONCOTÉ

Pour VISUALISER ou BLOC

Appuyez sur EXIT une fois terminé

NONCOTÉ VISUALISER BLOC

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 32

Page 207: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

V-Chip

33

Régler Code Verrouiller

Les réglages de canal réservé et de puce V sont protégés par un code de verrouillage à quatrechiffres. Votre téléviseur est offert préréglé avec un code de verrouillage de 0000. Vouspouvez changer le code à tout numéro à quatre chiffres que vous désirez. Pour changer lecode de verrouillage, suivez les étapes ci-après.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour RÉGLER CODE VERROUILLER

Pour exécuter

L’icône du candenas apparaît

Appuyez sur zéro pour accéder au code de verrouillage

Le premier chiffre sera mis en relief

Pour choisir le nombre

Pour passer au chiffre suivant

Continuez à suivre ces instructions pour entrer les quatre chiffres.

Pour TERMINER

Pour enregistrer les réglages et quitter

Votre code de verrouillage est maintenant défini.

CODE VERROUILLER 0 0 0 0

TERMINER 0

• Après une panne secteur, vous devez introduire un nouveau code de verrouillage.• Écrivez votre numéro de code de verrouillage et cachez-le.• Si vous oubliez le code de verrouillage, vous pouvez en entrer un de la même manière.

REMARQUE :

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 33

Page 208: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Régla ges de l’Ima ge

34

Teinte

Couleur

Image

Clarté

Détail

La teinte vous permet de régler les niveaux de rouge et de vert dans l’image de votretéléviseur.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour TEINTEPour augmenter le vert

Pour augmenter le rouge

Pour passer à l’option suivante

La fonction Couleurs vous permet de rendre toutes les couleurs de l’image du téléviseur plusvives ou plus subtiles.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour COULEURPour rendre les couleurs plus vives

Pour atténeur les couleurs

Pour passer à l’option suivante

Cette fonction vous permet d’ajuster les niveaux de noir et de blanc sur l’écran du téléviseur,afin d’obtenir une image d’ensemble plus sombre ou plus claire.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour IMAGE

Pour augmenter le contraste

Pour diminuer le contraste

Pour passer à l’option suivante

Permet de régler le niveau de luminosité.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour CLARTÉPour éclairer l’image

Pour assombrir l’image

Pour passer à l’option suivante

Le détail permet de régler le niveau des détails dans une image.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour DÉTAIL

Pour rendre l’image plus nette (plus de détails)

Pour rendre l’image plus douce (moins de détails)

Pour passer à l’option suivante

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 34

Page 209: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Régla ges de l’Ima ge

35

Bruit Réduit

Régler Statut Vidéo

Cette fonction insère un écran bleu vide par-dessus les canaux qui ne transmettent pas ou quisont trop faibles pour être reçus clairement.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour BRUITRÉDUIT

Pour activer ou inhibiter le Bruit Réduit

• Bruit Rèduit ne fonctionnera pas durant la configuration automatique du selecteur ni lorsquevous utiliserez le Sommaire Canaux.

Grâce à cette fonction, vous pouvez mettre en mémoire votre propre série de réglages de qual-ité de l’image en tant que « Choix » pour y avoir accès ultérieurement sur simple pression d’unbouton.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour RÉGLER STATUT VIDÉO

Pour exécuter

Pour régler les niveaux de TEINTE

Pour passer à l’option suivante

Répétez les étapes ci-dessus pour régler chaque option.

Pour SAUVER COMME CHOIX

Pour mettre les réglages en mémoire et quitter

• Vous devez utiliser SAUVER COMME CHOIX pour sortir du menu Régler statut vidéo, sinonvos préférences ne seront pas mises en mémoire.

• Vous pouvez avoir accès à vos réglages “Choix” à n’importe quel moment en appuyant sur lebouton VIDEO STATUS de la télécommande.

TEINTE -------------|-------------COULEUR -------------|-------------IMAGE -------------|-------------CLARTÉ -------------|-------------DÉTAIL -------------|-------------

SAUVER COMME CHOIX

L’écran de réglages disparaîtra si vous n’effectuez aucun réglage ou si vous ne passez pas àl’option suivante en environ trois secondes. Tout changement apporté aux réglages de l’imagejusqu’à ce point sera sauvegardé. Pour quitter à tout moment le menu des réglages de l’im-age, appuyez sur le bouton Exit de la télécommande.

REMARQUE :

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 35

Page 210: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Régla ges du Son

36

La fonction de réglage de niveau Basse vous permet de monter ou de réduire le niveau dessons à basse fréquence du téléviseur.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour BASSEPour augmenter le niveau des graves

Pour diminuer le niveau des graves

Pour passer à l’option suivante

La fonction de réglage de niveau Aigu vous permet de monter ou de réduire le niveau des sonsà haute fréquence du téléviseur.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour AIGUPour augmenter le niveau des aigus

Pour dimuner le niveau des aigusPour passer à l’option suivante

La fonction de réglage de la balance vous permet de régler le niveau sonore entre les deuxhaut-parleurs du téléviseur.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour BALANCEPour déplacer la balance vers le haut-parleur droit

Pour déplacer la balance vers le haut-parleur gauchePour passer à l’option suivante

La technologie MTS permet la diffusion simultanée de plusieurs signaux audio, ce qui vousdonne le choix de ce que vous voulez entendre avec un programme de télévision.Outre le sonmonophonique ou stéréophonique, une diffusion MTS peut également comprendre un deux-ième programme audio (SAP).

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour MTSSélectionnez le mode(La flèche EN ONDE vous informe si le signal en cours de transmission contient des informations STÉRÉO ou SAP.)

• Gardez le téléviseur en mode STÉRÉO afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité sonore. Le sonsera diffusé en mode STÉRÉOPHONIQUE même si une certaine diffusion est en sonMONOPHONIQUE seulement.

• Choisissez le réglage MONO afin de réduire le bruit excessif d’un canal ou d’un programme.• SAP vous permet d’écouter une autre piste sonore, si elle est disponible.

MTS (Son Multi Canaux)

Aigu

Balance

Basse

Pour quitter à tout moment le menu des réglages du son, appuyez sur le bouton EXIT de la télécom-mande.

REMARQUE :

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 36

Page 211: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Éléments Généraux

Faites savoir à votre téléviseur quand il doit se mettre en marche ou s’arrêter. Utilisez cettefonction en tant qu’alarme pour vous réveiller, pour vous rappeler l’heure d’un programmeimportant ou encore comme un agent de diversion quand vous êtes en dehors de la maison.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour MINUTERIE ON/OFF

Pour exécuter (commence par HEURE DÉBUT)

Pour régler l’heure (AM/PM) de mise en marche du téléviseur

Pour passer aux minutes

Pour régler les minutes

Pour accepter HEUREDÉBUT et passer à HEURE FIN (l’heure à laquelle letéléviseur se mettra à l’arrêt). Réglez l’HEURE FIN de la même manière quel’HEURE DEBUT

Pour accepter HEURE FIN et passer à CANAL

Pour choisir le canal

Pour passer à MODE

Choisissez UNE FOIS ou PAR JOUR

Pour MINUTERIE ON/OFF

Choisissez OUI pour accepter le réglage de minuterie, choisissez NON si vous nevoulez pas l’accepter

Pour TERMINER

Pour enregistrer les réglages

Minuterie On/Off

• On ne peut régler la minuterie On/Off sur des canaux bloqués ou protégés.• La minuterie On/Off ne peut fonctionner si l’horloge n’est pas réglée.• Les réglages de minuterie doivent être refaits après une panne secteur.

REMARQUE :

Si le téléviseur est en marche lorsqu’un événement programmé est sur le point de commencer,une fenêtre Prévisualisation de minuterie apparaîtra. La fenêtre Prévisualisation de minuterieapparaîtra dans le coin inférieur droit de l’écran sept secondes avant que la minuterie ne doivecommencer. Lorsque la minuterie sera actionnée, l’image Prévisualisation deviendra l’imageprincipale.

Remarque sur la minuterie On/Off pour PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 etAV-27F802) seulement.

37

PureteCeci aide à nettoyer l’image pour y enlever la « neige ».

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour PURETE

Pour introduisez

Pour réglage purete

N S -------------|-------------

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 37

Page 212: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Éléments Généraux

38

Si votre téléviseur est raccordé à une chaîne stéréophonique, vous pouvez mettre les haut-par-leurs du téléviseur hors service et écouter avec les haut-parleurs de votre chaîne.

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour H. PARLEUR TV

Pour mettre en/hors service les haut-parleurs TV

Appuyez sur EX I T une fois terminé

• Avant de remettre en service les haut-parleurs du téléviseur, assurez-vous de diminuer levolume du son ! En cas de volume élevé, le son devient extrêmement fort.

• Après une panne secteur, le réglage haut-parleurs TV revient à la position de marche(« ON »).

H. Parleur TV

Sans Audio

• Haut-parleurs externe : Lorsque vous utilisez des amplificateurs ou haut-parleurs externes,fermez les haut-parleurs TV (voir « haut-parleurs TV ») ci-dessus.

REMARQUE :

H. PARLEUR TV ON OFF

Si votre téléviseur est raccordé à une source de haut-parleur externe, Sans Audio vous permetde contrôler le niveau sonore à l’aide de la télécommande de votre téléviseur.

A p p u yez sur le bouton ME N U

Pour SANS AUDIO

Pour VARI ou RÉGLER

Appuyez sur EX I T une fois terminé

VARI : Vous permet de régler le niveau sonore des haut-parleurs externes à l’aide des

boutons VOLUME +/– de la télécommande de votre téléviseur.

RÉGLER : Le niveau sonore des haut-parleurs externes se règle à l’aide de la télécommandede l’appareil audio.

SANS AUDIO VARI RÉGLER

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 38

Page 213: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Éléments Généraux

Utilisez cette fonction pour afficher le texte des Sous-titres (lorsqu’ils sont compris dans un programme).

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour SOUS-TITRES

Pour exécuter

Pour sélectionner S-TITRE, TEXTE ou OFF (arrêt)

Pour S-TITREou TEXTE

Pour sélectionner un canal de Sous-Titres ou de Texte

Pour TERMINER

Pour conserver les réglages et sortie

MODE : S-TITRE

S-TITRE : CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4TEXTE : T1 T2 T3 T4

TERMINER

Sous-Titres

• Les sous-titres se trouvent habituellement sur le canal de sous-titres CC1. Certains pro-grammes peuvent comprendre des informations de texte supplémentaires qui se trouventhabituellement sur le canal de texte T1. Les autres canaux sont disponibles pour usagefutur.

• Les sous-titres peuvent ne pas fonctionner adéquatement si le signal reçu est faible ou sivous lisez une bande vidéo.

• La plupart des programmes contenant des sous-titres afficheront un avis au début duprogramme.

REMARQUE :

Entrée de ComposantObtenez la meilleure qualité visuelle de votre lecteur de DVD en utilisant ce réglage et lesentrées DVD à l’arrière du téléviseur. Mettez à la position OUI pour entrée de composant (pourDVD) ou NON pour entrée vidéo composée (pour un magnétoscope régulier).

Appuyez sur le bouton MENU

Pour V4 COMPONENT-IN (ou V2 COMPONENT-IN pour AV-36F702, AV-32F702 etAV-27F702)

Pour OUI ou NON

EXIT lorsque vous avez terminé

• Cette option doit être utilisée uniquement avec les lecteurs de DVD. Reportez-vous à lapage 11 pour plus de renseignements sur le raccordement de magnétoscopes. Reportez-vous à la page 14 pour plus de renseignements sur le raccordement d’un lecteur de DVD.

Remarque : Les modèles AV-36F702, AV-32F702 et AV-27F702 n’a pas d’entrée 4.

V4 COMPONENT-IN OUI NON

39

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 39

Page 214: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Fonctions des Boutons

L’écran Affichage indique l’état courant des minuteries et des entrées.

Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY

• Le canal ou l’entrée AV (Canal 07)• L’heure en cours (12:20 pm)

• L’état du Sleep Timer/minutes restantes (le Sleep Timer est inhibé)

• L’état de la minuterie On/Off (tous les jours, marche à 19 heures, arrêt à 22heures)

• Chaque appui sur le bouton DISPLAY change le mode d’affichage :

Affichage – Plein écran montré ci-dessus

Heure – Montre l’heure courante seulement

Canal – Montre le canal courant

Off – Met l’affichage à l’arrêt

• Vous pouvez également inhiber l’affichage à n’importe quelle étape en appuyant sur EXIT.

07MAINTENANT 12:20 PMMINUT. SOMMEIL OFFMINUT. ON/OFF CHAQUE JOUR

HEURE DÉBUT 7:00 PMHEURE FIN 10:00 PM

Le bouton MENU vous permet d’accéder au système de menus à l’écran JVC. Appuyez surMENU pour activer le système de menus à l’écran.

• Reportez-vous aux sections individuelles (telles que « Réglages du son ») pour obtenir desinformations précises sur l’utilisation des menus.

Menu

Exit (Sortie) et PIP Off

Display (Affichage)

Veuillez noter que si l’horloge, la minuterie sommeil ou la minuterie On/Off ne sont pas réglés,l’écran d’affichage montrera, respectivement, :« HORLOGE NON RÉGLÉE », « MINUT. SOM-MEIL OFF » et « MINUT. ON/OFF OFF ».

REMARQUE :

Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter un écran de menu. Sur le RM-C301G, ce bouton estégalement marqué « PIP OFF ». Appuyez sur EXIT/PIP OFF pour inactiver la fonction Image-sur-Image (veuillez vous reporter à la page 44 pour plus de renseignements sur la fonctionPIP).• La fonction PIP est disponible uniquement sur les modèles A V-36F802, AV-32F802 et

AV-27F802.

40

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 40

Page 215: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Fonctions des Boutons

41

Video Status (Statut Vidéo)

Sleep Timer (Minuterie Sommeil)

Hyper Surround (Hyper Quadrosound)

Muting (Mise en sourdine du son)

Le bouton VIDEO STATUS vous permet de sélectionner l’un de trois réglages d’affichage d’image,y compris un affichage de vos propres préférences.

Standard – Réinitialise les réglages de l’image aux niveaux standard usine.

Choix – Correspond aux réglages que vous avez enregistrés dans le menu Régler StatutVidéo en page 35.

Cinéma – Donne à la vidéo un aspect riche, similaire au film.

Appuyez sur le bouton VIDEO STATUS

Cette minuterie met le téléviseur hors tension à votre place en cas d’assoupissement. Vouspouvez programmer cette fonction avec des intervalles de 15 minutes à 180 minutes.

Appuyez sur le bouton SLEEP TIMER

Message de la minuterie sommeil

20 secondes avant l’extinction automatique, ce message apparaît :

Vous avez alors 20 secondes pour appuyer sur le bouton SLEEP TIMER pour reculer la mise hors tension d’encore 15 minutes.

BONNE NUIT !!

PRESSER LE BOUTON MINUT.

SOMMEIL POUR PROLONGER

Crée un effet sonore tridimensionnel profond en utilisant uniquement les haut-parleurs dutéléviseur dirigés vers l’avant. Appuyez sur le bouton Hyper Surround pour activer(ON) ouinhiber (OFF) l’effet.

Le bouton de mise en sourdine interrompt instantanément et totalement le volume quand vousle pressez. Appuyez à nouveau sur MUTING pour rétablir le volume au niveau précédent.

HYPER QUADROSOUND ON OFF

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 41

Page 216: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Fonctions des Boutons

42

Le bouton RETURN+ a deux fonctions :

Return – Retour au canal regardé immédiatement avant le canal maintenant à l’écran.

Return+ –Vous permet de programmer un canal précis auquel revenir après le balayage àtravers les canaux.

RETURN+ et tenez pendant 3 secondes

Balayez à l’aide des boutons CHANNEL+/–.

RETURN+

Vous reviendrez au canal que vous avez programmé.

• Pour annuler votre canal Return+, enfoncez et tenez Return+ pendant trois secondes. Lemessage « RETOUR À UN CANAL ANNULE » apparaîtra.

• Return+ s’emploie uniquement avec CHANNEL +/–. La pression de toute autre touchenumérique annulera RETURN+.

• Return+ n’affecte pas le canal PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 et AV-27F802 seulement).

Le bouton 100+ permet d’accéder directement aux canaux au-dessus de 99. Ainsi, pourpasser au canal 124 ;appuyez sur le 100+, 2 (deux), 4 (quatre).

RETOUR À CANAL PROGRAMMÉ

Bouton 100+

Return+

InputSélectionne la source d’entrée de signal pour la télévision : TV (pour antenne ou câble), ouVidéo 1, 2, 3 ou 4 pour appareils vidéo tels que magnétoscopes ou caméscopes.

IN P U T

BBEL’audio à haute définition BBE ajoute un son naturel, clair et de très haute qualité à tout pro-gramme. Activez ou inhibitez BBE à l’aide du bouton BBE.

BBE ON OFF

REMARQUE :

• Les modèles AV-36F702, AV-32F702 et AV-27F702 n’a pas d’entrée Vidéo 4.

BBE est une marque déposée de BBE Sound, Inc. Pour les États-Unis, sous licence de BBESound, Inc., en vertu des brevets américains 4638258, 4482866 et 5510572. Pour le Canada,sous licence de BBESound, Inc BBE est une marque déposée de BBESound, Inc.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 42

Page 217: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Fonctions des Boutons

43

Boutons DVD

Boutons Magnétoscope

Interrupteur TV/CATV

Interrupteur VCR/DVD

Vous pouvez également utiliser cette télécommande pour activer les fonctions de base de votrelecteur DVD. Ces fonctions comprennent :lecture, rembobinage, avance rapide, arrêt, imagefixe/pause, image précédente/suivante, ouverture/fermeture du plateau, mise en marche etmise à l’arrêt.

Mettez l’interrupteur sélecteur à la position DVD pour activer.

• La télécommande est préréglée avec le code 000 pour commander les lecteurs DVD de mar-que JVC. Pour un lecteur DVD de toute autre marque, reportez-vous à la liste de codes etaux instructions figurant à la page 20.

Utilisez le syntonisateur du téléviseur ou une boîte de câble pour sélectionner les canaux.Mettez cet interrupteur à la position TV pour utiliser le syntonisateur incorporé au téléviseur.Mettez l’interrupteur à la position CATV pour utiliser une boîte de câble.

• Reportez-vous à la page 18 pour obtenir des informations sur la programmation de votretélécommande pour l’utilisation de la boîte de câble.

Vous pouvez commander un magnétoscope ou un lecteur de DVD en utilisant les boutonssitués sur la partie inférieure de la télécommande. Utilisez l’interrupteur sélecteur VCR/DVDpour choisir l’utilisation du magnétoscope ou du DVD.

• Reportez-vous aux pages 19 et 20 pour plus de renseignements sur la programmation devotre télécommanmde à l’aide des codes d’utilisation magnétoscope et DVD.

Light (Eclairage)Votre télécommande comporte des boutons éclairés pour les fonctions principales telles queCHANNEL +/– et VOLUME +/–. Appuyez sur le bouton LIGHT pour illuminer les boutons.

Vous pouvez utiliser cette télécommande pour activer les fonctions de base de votre magnéto-scope. Ces fonctions comprennent :lecture, enregistrement, rembobinage, avance rapide,arrêt, pause, balayage des canaux, TV/magnétoscope, mise en marche et à l’arrêt.

Mettez l’interrupteur sélecteur à la position VCR pour activer.

• La télécommande est préréglée avec le code 000 pour commander les magnétoscopes demarque JVC. Pour un magnétoscope de toute autre marque, reportez-vous à la liste decodes et aux instructions figurant à la page 19.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 43

Page 218: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Fonctions des Boutons - PIP

44

PIP affiche deux images distinctes à l’écran. Votre téléviseur possède la PIP à deux syntonisa-teurs, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez voir, simultanément, les images provenant de deuxcanaux distincts. Une série spéciale de boutons de commande PIP est située sur la partiesupérieure de la télécommande. Des descriptions de chaque bouton sont données sur cettepage.

La fonction PIP est disponible uniquement sur les modèles A V-36F802, AV-32F802 etAV-27F802.

On/MoveActivez PIP en appuyant sur le bouton ON/MOVE.

(PIP) ON/MOVE

PIP OFF pour mettre PIP à l’arrêt

Une fois la fonction PIP activée, vous pouvez déplacer la fenêtre PIP à n’importe lequel desquatre coins de l’image principale du téléviseur à l’aide du bouton ON/MOVE.

ON/MOVE

• Chaque pression du bouton ON/MOVE déplacera la fenêtre PIP à un coin différent.

02

07

Remarque du Boîte de CâbleIl se peut que la fonction PIP à deux syntonisateurs ne fonctionne pas lorsqu’elle est utiliséeavec certaines boîtes de câble. La raison en est que, bien que certains modèles de boîte decâble puissent recevoir jusqu’à 181 canaux, ils peuvent uniquement transmettre le signal d’uncanal à votre téléviseur (veuillez également vous reporter au schéma de la page 11). Le syn-tonisateur PIP ne peut fonctionner correctement sans accès à l’ensemble des canauxdisponibles. Étant donné que le téléviseur reçoit le signal d’un seul canal depuis la boîte decâble, le PIP à deux syntonisateurs ne peut afficher un second canal différent.

Étant donné qu’il y a de nombreux modèles différents de boîtes de câble en usage aujourd’hui,si vous éprouvez de la difficulté à utiliser votre fonction PIP avec votre boîte de câble, nousvous recommandons de contacter votre compagnie locale de câblovision pour obtenir des con-seils sur le raccordement.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 44

Page 219: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Fonctions des Boutons - PIPFreeze

Swap

Channel +/– for PIP

Source

Utilisez le bouton Freeze pour bloquer une seule image fixe sur la fenêtre PIP.• Si la fonction PIP est inhibée lorsqu’on appuie sur Freeze, un instantané de l’écran principal

est pris et placé dans la fenêtre PIP.• Si la fonction PIP est activée lorsqu’on appuie sur Freeze, l’image qui était dans la fenêtre

lorsque le bouton a été enfoncé est maintenue.

Vous pouvez échanger le canal affiché à l’écran principal contre celui apparaissant dans lafenêtre PIP en appuyant sur SWAP.

Tout comme les boutons CHANNEL +/– principaux, CHANNEL +/– pour PIP vous permet de balay-er les canaux dans la fenêtre PIP.• La sélection directe des canaux à l’aide du pavé numérique à 10 touches pour la PIP n’est

pas possible.

Vous pouvez sélectionner la source de signal pour l’image de la fenêtre PIP.

• Si la PIP n’a pas de signal, la fenêtre sera bleue.• Si vous raccordez un DVD à Vidéo-2 ou Vidéo-4, la fenêtre PIP sera bleue.

• La fenêtre PIP est le neuvième de la dimension de l’écran complet.• La fonction PIP n’affichera pas les programmes ou les canaux bloqués. Un écran bleu appa-

raîtra en remplacement.

REMARQUE :

45

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 45

Page 220: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Guide de Dépanna ge

46

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 46

Page 221: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Garantie

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA garantit ce produit et toutes ses pièces, sauf comme indiqué ci-après, À L'ACHETEUR DÉ DÉTAIL INITIAL comme étant EXEMPTS DE VICES DEMATÉRIAUX ET D'EXÉCUTION depuis la date de l'achat initialpendant la période indiquée ci-après (la « période de garantie »). L'écran est couvert pendantdeux ans.

Cette garantie limitée n'est valable que dans les cinquante (50) états des États-Unis, le Districtde Columbia et le Commonwealth de Porto Rico.

ENGAGEMENT DE JVC :

Si ce produit est jugé défectueux, JVC réparera ou remplacera les pièces défectueuses sansqu'il n'en coûte rien à l'acheteur initial.Ces réparations seront effectuées durant les heuresd'affaires régulières seulement aux centres de service agréés JVC.Toutes les pièces réparéesou remplacées sont garanties uniquement pendant le temps à courir de cette période degarantie. L'ensemble du produit et des pièces doivent être livrés à un centre de service agréé,sauf les modèles dont l'écran dépasse 25 pouces, lesquels sont couverts avec service à domi-cile.

VOUS DEVEZ :

• rapporter vos produits à un centre de service agréé JVC, accompagnés d'une copie de votrefacture.Pour connaître le centre de service JVC agréé le plus proche de vous, appelez aunuméro sans frais (800) 252-5722 (É.U. SEULEMENT).

• S'il n'existe aucun centre de service disponible localement, emballez le produit soigneuse-ment, de préférence dans sa boîte d'origine, et expédiez-le, assuré, au centre de service agrééle plus proche, accompagné d'une copie de la facture et d'une lettre d'explication concernant leproblème. Appelez le numéro sans frais indiqué ci-dessus pour connaître l'adresse.

CE QUI N'EST PAS COUVERT :

1) Les produits qui ont fait l'objet d'usage abusif, accident, altération, modification, manipulation,négligence, utilisation erronée, installation erronée, absence de soins raisonnables, ou si leproduit a été réparé ou entretenu par une personne autre qu'un centre de service agréé parJVC pour effectuer ce service, ou si le produit est raccordé à un accessoire quelconque nonfourni avec les produits, ou si le modèle ou le numéro de série a été altéré, manipulé ouenlevé.

2) L'installation initiale, l'enlèvement pour réparation et la réinstallation après la réparation nesont pas couverts.

3) Les réglages opérationnels couverts dans le manuel, l'entretien normal, le nettoyage de latête vidéo et audio.

4) Les dommages qui surviennent en cours d'expédition ou qui sont attribuables à un cas fortu-it ou résultent de changements cosmétiques.

5) Les problèmes de réception de signal et les défaillances attri bu a bles à des surt e n s i o n s.

No. de modèle No. de série Pièces Main-d'oeuvre

Pour les télévisions de modèles canadiens, veuillez vous reporter aux feuilles distinctes con-cernant la garantie pour JVC au Canada

47

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 47

Page 222: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Garantie

48

6) Les tubes de prise de vue/le capteur d'images CCD, la cartouche et l'aiguille sont couvertspendant une période de 90 jours depuis la date d'achat.

7) Les accessoires, et

8) Les piles (à l'exception des piles rechargeables qui sont couvertes pendant 90 jours depuisla date d'achat).

Il n'existe aucune garantie explicite, sauf celles mentionnées ci-dessus.

LA DURÉE DE TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE IMPLICITE DECOMMERCIALISATION, EST LIMITÉE À LA DURÉE DE LA GARANTIE EXPLICITE DONNÉEAUX PRÉSENTES.

JVC NE SERA PAS RESPONSABLE DE LA PERTE D'UTILISATION DE CE PRODUIT, DESENNUIS, DE LA PERTE OU DE TOUS AUTRES DOMMAGES, QU'ILS SOIENT DIRECTS,INDIRECTS OU ACCESSOIRES (Y COMPRIS, DE MANIÈRE NON LIMITATIVE, LES DOM-MAGES AUX BANDES, ENREGISTREMENTS OU DISQUES) RÉSULTANT DE L'UTILISA-TION DE CE PRODUIT, OU DÉCOULANT DE TOUTE RUPTURE DE CETTE GARANTIE.TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPLICITES ET IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE DECOMMERCIALISATION ET D'APTITUDE À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, SONT LIMITÉES À LAPÉRIODE DE GARANTIE INDIQUÉE CI-DESSUS.

Certains états n'autorisent pas l'exclusion des dommages indirects ou accessoires ni les limita-tions à la durée de la garantie ;il se peut donc qu'elles ne s'appliquent pas à vous. Cettegarantie vous donne des droits précis et vous pouvez également avoir d'autres droits qui var i-ent d'un état à l'autre .

Si vous avez des questions concernant votre produit JVC, veuillez vous mettre en contact avecnotre Service clientèle :

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA 1700 Valley RoadDIVISION DE JVC AMERICAS CORP. Wayne, New Jersey, 07470

Les produits remis à neuf ont une garantie distincte. Cette garantie ne s'applique pas auxdétails de la garantie du produit remis à neuf.Veuillez vous reporter aux informations sur lagarantie du produit remis à neuf contenues dans l'emballage de chaque produit remis à neuf.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 48

Page 223: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Centres de Réparations Agréés

49

SERVICE DE QUALITÉ SERVICE DE QUALITÉ

NUMÉRO SANS FRAIS : 1 (800) 537-5722http://www.jvc.com

COMMENT REPÉRER VOTRE CENTRE DE SERVICE JVC

Cher client,

Afin de recevoir des prestations optimales de l’appareil que vous avez acheté, veuillez lirele manuel d’instructions avant de mettre l’appareil en marche. Si des réparations s’avèrentnécessaires ou pour connaître l’adresse du centre de service le plus proche de vous sur leterritoire continental des États-Unis, veuillez composer le 1 (800) 537-5722 pour votre cen-tre de service agréé le plus proche ou visitez notre site Web à www.JVC.com

N’oubliez pas de conserver votre facture pour vous prévaloir du service sous couvert degarantie.

Mise en gardePour prévenir les secousses électriques, n’ouvrez pas le boîtier. Il n’existe, à l’intérieur, aucunepièce susceptible d’être entretenue par l’utilisateur.Veuillez confier les réparations à des techni-ciens de service compétents .

AccessoiresPour acheter des accessoires pour votre produit JVC, vous pouvez contacter votre revendeurJVC local.Dans les 48 états du territoire continental des États-Unis, appelez gratuitement au 1(800) 882-2345 ou sur le Web à www.JVC.com.

Ne réparez pas le téléviseur vous-même

Service au CanadaPour repérer votre vendeur ou centre de service JVC local au Canada, veuillez composerl e:

Ou visitez notre site Web à www.JVC.ca

Dans l’est du Canada:1 (416) 293-1311

Dans l’ouest du Canada:1 (604) 270-1311

En Français (Montréal):1 (514) 871-1311

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 49

Page 224: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

50

Codes de RechercheFonction des Codes de Recherche de Boîte de Câble oud’Antenne Parabolique :1) Faites glisser l’interrupteur sélecteur de mode à deux voies à la position CATV.2) Appuyez sur les boutons TV POWER et RETURN+ pendant au moins trois secondes, puis

relâchez.3) Appuyez sur TV POWER et vérifiez si la boîte de câble ou la boîte d’antenne parabolique

répond.4) S’il y a eu une réponse, appuyez sur RETURN+. Les codes de commande sont maintenant

définis. En l’absence de réponse, répétez l’étape 3. Si vous répétez l’étape 3 52 fois sansréponse, utilisez la télécommande fournie avec l’appareil.

5) Appuyez sur RETURN+ pour quitter cette fonction.

Fonction des Codes de Recherche de Magnétoscope :1) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre

interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « VCR ».2) A p p u yez sur les boutons VCR POW E R et RE T U R N+ pendant au moins trois secondes, puis

r e l â c h e z .3) Appuyez sur VCR POWER et vérifiez si le magnétoscope répond.4) S’il y a eu une réponse, appuyez sur RETURN+. Les codes de commande sont maintenant

définis. En l’absence de réponse, répétez l’étape 3. Si vous répétez l’étape 3 80 fois sansréponse, utilisez la télécommande fournie avec l’appareil.

5) Appuyez sur RETURN+ pour quitter cette fonction.

Fonction des Codes de Recherche de Lecteur DVD :1) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre

interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « DVD ».2) A p p u yez sur les boutons DVD POW E R et RE T U R N+pendant au moins trois secondes, puis

r e l â c h e z .3) Appuyez sur DVD POWER et vérifiez si le lecteur DVD répond.4) S’il y a eu une réponse, appuyez sur RETURN+. Les codes de commande sont maintenant

définis. En l’absence de réponse, répétez l’étape 3. Si vous répétez l’étape 3 30 fois sansréponse, utilisez la télécommande fournie avec l’appareil.

5) Appuyez sur RETURN+ pour quitter cette fonction.

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 50

Page 225: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Spécifications

Spécifications soumises à modification sans prévais.

51

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 51

Page 226: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICADivision of JVC Americas Corp.

1700 Valley RoadWayne, New Jersey, 07470

JVC CANADA, INC.21 Finchdene SquareScarborough, Ontario

Canada, M1X 1A7

802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 52

Page 227: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

SERVICE MANUAL

AV-36F702AV-36F802

AV-36F702 /Y

AV-36F802 /Y

COLOR TELEVISION

BASIC CHASSIS

AC

No. 51907BDec. 2001

COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.

TVTV

RM-C303G[AV-36F702]

RM-C301G[AV-36F802]

CONTENTSa SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................2

a SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................3

a FEATURES ..............................................................................................................................................4

a MAIN DIFFERENCE LIST........................................................................................................................5

a FUNCTIONS.............................................................................................................................................6

a SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................7

a SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................................................................13

¤ STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (APPENDIX) .................................................................................. 2-1

a PARTS LIST ...........................................................................................................................................37

Page 228: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

2 No. 51907B

SPECIFICATIONSItems Contents

Dimensions (W × H × D)

Mass

TV RF System

Color Sound System

TV Receiving Channels and Frequency

VL Band

VH Band

UHF Band

CATV Receiving Channels and Frequency

Low Band

High Band

Mid Band

Super Band

Hyper Band

Ultra Band

Sub Mid Band

TV/CATV Total Channel

Intermediate Frequency

Video IF Carrier

Sound IF Carrier

Color Sub Carrier

Power Input

Power Consumption

Picture Tube

High Voltage

Speaker

Audio Power Output

Video / Audio Input (1 / 2 / 3 / 4)

Audio Output

(Variable / Fix : Selectable)

AV Compu link EX Input

Antenna terminal

Remote Control Unit

37-7/8” × 30-1/2” × 24-1/2” / 96.2cm × 77.3cm × 62.1cm

149.6 lbs / 68.0 kg

CCIR(M)

NTSC, BTSC System (Multi Channel Sound)

(02~06) 54MHz~88MHz

(07~13) 174MHz~216MHz

(14~69) 470MHz~806MHz

(02~06, A-8) by (02~06&01) —

(07~13) by (07~13)

(A~1) by (14~22)

(J~W) by (23~36) (54MHz~804MHz)

(W+1~W+28) by (37~64)

(W+29~W+84) by (65~125)

(A8, A4~A1) by (01, 96~99) —180 Channels

45.75MHz

41.25MHz (4.5MHz)

3.58MHz

120V AC, 60Hz

160W

36” (90cm) Measured Diagonally

31.2kV±1.3kV (at cut-off in service mode)

2” × 4-3/4” / 5 × 12cm Oval type × 2

5W × 2

Video(1,2,3) : 1Vp-p, 75Ø (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F702]

(1,3,4) : 1Vp-p, 75Ø (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F802]

Audio(1,2,3) : 500mVrms ( -4dBs ), High Impedance (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F702]

(1,2,3,4) : 500mVrms ( -4dBs ), High Impedance (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F802]

S-Video ( Input 1 / 3 Over )

Y : 1Vp-p Positive (negative sync provided, when terminated with 75Ø)

C : 0.286Vp-p (burst signal, when terminated with 75Ø)

Component Input ( Input 2 ) [AV-36F702]

( Input 2 / 4 ) [AV-36F802]

Y : 1Vp-p positive (negative sync provided, when terminated with 75Ø)

PB/PR : 0.7Vp-p 75 Ø

Variable : More then 0~1550mVrms (+6dBs)

Low impedance (400Hz when modulated 100%) (RCA pin jack)

Fix : 500mVrms(-4dBs)

Low impedance (400Hz when modulated 100%) (RCA pin jack)

3.5mm mini jack

75Ø(VHF/UHF) Terminal, F-Type Connector

RM-C303G-1A [AV-36F702], RM-C301G-2A [AV-36F802]

(AA/R6/UM-3 battery × 2)

Design & specifications are subject to change without notice.

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

································································································································································································································································································································································································································

················································································································································································································

Page 229: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS1. The design of this product contains special hardware, many circuits

and components specially for safety purposes. For continued pro-tection, no changes should be made to the original design unlessauthorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts mustbe identical to those used in the original circuits. Service should beperformed by qualified personnel only.

2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the products should not bemade. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufactur-er's warranty and will further relieve the manufacturer of responsi-bility for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom.

3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have specialsafety-related characteristics. These characteristics are often notevident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded bythem necessarily be obtained by using replacement componentsrated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which havethese special safety characteristics are identified in the parts list ofService manual. Electrical components having such features areidentified by shading on the schematics and by ( ) on theparts list in Service manual. The use of a substitute replacementwhich does not have the same safety characteristics as the recom-mended replacement part shown in the parts list of Service manualmay cause shock, fire, or other hazards.

4. Use isolation transformer when hot chassis.The chassis and any sub-chassis contained in some products areconnected to one side of the AC power line. An isolation transformerof adequate capacity should be inserted between the product andthe AC power supply point while performing any service on someproducts when the HOT chassis is exposed.

5. Don't short between the LIVE side ground and ISOLATED (NEU-TRAL) side ground or EARTH side ground when repairing.Some model's power circuit is partly different in the GND. The dif-ference of the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND, theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND and EARTH : ( ) sideGND. Don't short between the LIVE side GND andISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND or EARTH side GND and nevermeasure the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GNDor EARTH side GND at the same time with a measuring apparatus(oscilloscope etc.).If above note will not be kept, a fuse or any parts will be broken.

6. If any repair has been made to the chassis, it is recommended thatthe B1 setting should be checked or adjusted (See ADJUSTMENTOF B1 POWER SUPPLY).

7. The high voltage applied to the picture tube must conform with thatspecified in Service manual. Excessive high voltage can cause anincrease in X-Ray emission, arcing and possible component dam-age, therefore operation under excessive high voltage conditionsshould be kept to a minimum, or should be prevented. If severearcing occurs, remove the AC power immediately and determinethe cause by visual inspection (incorrect installation, cracked ormelted high voltage harness, poor soldering, etc.). To maintain theproper minimum level of soft X-Ray emission, components in thehigh voltage circuitry including the picture tube must be the exactreplacements or alternatives approved by the manufacturer of thecomplete product.

8. Do not check high voltage by drawing an arc. Use a high voltagemeter or a high voltage probe with a VTVM. Discharge the picturetube before attempting meter connection, by connecting a clip leadto the ground frame and connecting the other end of the lead througha 10kØ 2W resistor to the anode button.

9. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extraprecaution should be given to assure correct lead dress in the highvoltage circuit area. Where a short circuit has occurred, those com-ponents that indicate evidence of overheating should be replaced.Always use the manufacturer's replacement components.

10. Isolation Check(Safety for Electrical Shock Hazard)After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation checkon the exposed metal parts of the cabinet (antenna terminals, video/audio input and output terminals, Control knobs, metal cabinet,screwheads, earphone jack, control shafts, etc.) to be sure the prod-uct is safe to operate without danger of electrical shock.

(1) Dielectric Strength TestThe isolation between the AC primary circuit and all metal partsexposed to the user, particularly any exposed metal part having areturn path to the chassis should withstand a voltage of 1100V AC(r.m.s.) for a period of one second.(. . . . Withstand a voltage of 1100V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance ratedup to 120V, and 3000V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance rated 200V ormore, for a period of one second.)This method of test requires a test equipment not generally found inthe service trade.

(2) Leakage Current CheckPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Using a “Leakage CurrentTester”, measure the leakage current from each exposed metal partof the cabinet, particularly any exposed metal part having a returnpath to the chassis, to a known good earth ground (water pipe, etc.).Any leakage current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).

• Alternate Check MethodPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Use an AC voltmeter hav-ing 1000 ohms per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner.Connect a 1500Ø 10W resistor paralleled by a 0.15µF AC-type ca-pacitor between an exposed metal part and a known good earthground (water pipe, etc.). Measure the AC voltage across the resis-tor with the AC voltmeter. Move the resistor connection to each ex-posed metal part, particularly any exposed metal part having a re-turn path to the chassis, and measure the AC voltage across theresistor. Now, reverse the plug in the AC outlet and repeat eachmeasurement. Any voltage measured must not exceed 0.75V AC(r.m.s.). This corresponds to 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.3V AC (r.m.s.).This corresponds to 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).

11. High voltage hold down circuit check.After repair of the high voltage hold down circuit, this circuit shall bechecked to operate correctly.See item “How to check the high voltage hold down circuit”.

GOODEARTHGROUND 0.15 µF AC-TYPE

AC VOLTMETER(HAVING 1000Ø/V,OR MORE SENSITIVITY)

PLACE THIS PROBEON EACH EXPOSEDMETAL PART1500Ø 10W

A V

This mark shows a fast POWER CORDREPLACEMENT WARNINGConnecting the white line side ofpower cord to “WHT” character side.

operating fuse, theletters indicated belowshow the rating.

PWB

WHT

PW

White line side

Page 230: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

4 No. 51907B

FEATURES• Full-flat CRT (cathode ray tube) reproduces fine textured picture in

every detail.

• I2C bus control utilizes single chip ICs.

• Built in Twin Tuner system. [Only for AV-36F802]

• Built-in V-CHIP system.

• Built-in HYPER-SURROUND system.

• Built-in BBE.

• Adoption of the Picture-In-Picture (PIP) function. [Only for AV-36F802]

• 3 LINE DIGITAL COMB FILTER circuit improved picture quality.[AV-36F702]

IC702E2PROM 4k bit

IC701MAIN MICON

IF2

(Only for AV-36F802)

(Only for AV-36F802)

SCL 1 SDA 1

SCL 0 SDA 0

AFC 2

AFC 1

Remotecontrol

unit

IC301PIP

CONTROL

IC001MTS, TONE

SURROUND CONTROL3-D Y/C

TU001TUNER 1

TU001TUNER 2

IC1011 CHIP

CONTROL

IC501AVSW

CONTROL

(Only for AV-36F802)

(Only for AV-36F802)

• 3 LINE Digital Y/C Separation circuit improved picture quality.[AV-36F802]

• Component input terminal for taking best advantage of ComponentVideo Signal.

• Audio Video input terminal. (S-input ×2, V-input ×3)

• Variable/Fix audio output terminal.

• Closed-caption broadcasts can be viewed.

• With AV COMPU LINK EX terminal.

a SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

Page 231: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 5

MAIN DIFFERENCE LISTModel

Part nameAV-36F702 AV-36F802

MAIN PWB SAC-1542A-M2 SAC-1547A-M2

PIP PWB — SAC0P501A-M2

AV SELECTOR PWB SAC0S511A-M2 SAC0S505A-M2

3D Y/C MODULE PWB — SAC-0Y501A

!

Page 232: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

6 No. 51907B

FUNCTIONS

a FRONT PANEL

a FRONT PANEL DOOR OPENED

a REAR PANEL

[AV-36F702]

a REMOTE CONTROL UNIT(RM-C303G-1A)[AV-36F702]

POWER

DISPLAY

SLEEP TIMER

LIGHT

BBE

VIDEO STATUS

INPUT

1

7

4

100+

3

9

6

RETURN+

MUTING

MENU

V CHIP

PIP OFF

EXIT

2

8

0

5

+CH

VOL VOL+

CH

REC STOP PAUSE

PLAY FFREW

TV CATV DVDVCR

VCR CHANNELTV/VCR

VCR/DVDPOWERPREV NEXT

OPEN/CLOSE STILL/PAUSE

RM-C301G

HYPER SURROUND

TV

POWER

DISPLAY

SLEEP TIMER

LIGHT

BBE

CHANNEL

VIDEO STATUS

SOURCE FREEZE

PIP

SWAP

ON/MOVE

INPUT

1

7

4

100+

3

9

6

RETURN+

MUTING

MENU

V CHIP

PIP OFF

EXIT

2

8

0

5

+CH

VOL VOL+

CH

REC STOP PAUSE

PLAY FFREW

TV CATV DVDVCR

VCR CHANNELTV/VCR

VCR/DVDPOWERPREV NEXT

OPEN/CLOSE STILL/PAUSE

RM-C301G

HYPER SURROUND

TV

(RM-C301G-2A)[AV-36F802]

[AV-36F802]

ON TIMERPOWER

Page 233: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 7

DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

REMOVING THE REAR COVER1. Unplug the power supply cord.2. Remove the 12 screws marked A as shown in Fig.1.3. Withdraw the REAR COVER toward you.

[CAUTION]

• When reinstalling the rear cover, carefully push it inward after in-serting the MAIN PWB into the rear cover groove.

REMOVING THE CHASSIS

• After removing the rear cover.1. Slightly raise the both sides of the chassis by hand and remove the

3 claws marked B under the chassis from the front cabinet asshown in Fig.1.

2. Withdraw the chassis backward along the rail in the arrow directionmarked C as shown in Fig.1.

(If necessary, take off the wire clamp, connector’s etc.)

*When conducting a check with power supplied, be sure to confirmthat the CRT earth wire is connected to the CRT SOCKET PWBand the MAIN PWB.

REMOVING THE TERMINAL BOARD

• After removing the rear cover.1. [AV-36F702]

Remove the 4 screws marked D as shown in Fig.1.[AV-36F802]Remove the 6 screws marked D as shown in Fig.1.

2. When you pull out the TERMINAL BOARD in the direction of arrowmarked E as shown in Fig.1, it can be removed.

REMOVING THE FRONT CONTROL AND POWER SWPW BOARDS

• After removing the rear cover and chassis.1. Remove the 4 screws marked F as shown in Fig.1.2. Then remove the FRONT CONTROL PWB and POWER SW PWB.

(If necessary, take off the wire, connector’s etc.)

REMOVING THE LF PW BOARD• After removing the rear cover and chassis.1. Lift the left side of the LF PWB while pressing the 2 PWB stoppers

marked G in the arrow direction marked H as shown in Fig.1.2. Then remove the LF PWB.

(If necessary, take off the wire, connector’s etc.)

SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

REMOVING THE DAF PW BOARD• After removing the rear cover and chassis.1. Lift the right side of the DAF PWB while pressing the PWB stopper

marked J and claw marked K in the arrow direction marked L asshown in Fig.1.

2. Then remove the DAF PWB.

(If necessary, take off the wire, connector’s etc.)

REMOVING THE SPEAKER

• After removing the rear cover.1. Remove the 2 screws marked M as shown in Fig.1.2. Withdraw the speaker backward.3. Follow the same steps when removing the other hand speaker.

CHECKING THE MAIN PW BOARD1. To check the back side of the MAIN PW Board.

1) Pull out the chassis. (Refer to REMOVING THE CHASSIS).2) Erect the chassis vertically so that you can easily check the back

side of the MAIN PW Board.

[CAUTION]

• When erecting the chassis, be careful so that there will be no con-tacting with other PW Board.

• Before turning on power, make sure that the CRT earth wire andother connectors are properly connected.

WIRE CLAMPING AND CABLE TYING1. Be sure clamp the wire.2. Never remove the cable tie used for tying the wires together.

Should it be inadvertently removed, be sure to tie the wires with anew cable tie.

Page 234: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

8 No. 51907B

Fig.1

F

M

A

A

DAF PWB

PWB STOPPER

PWBSTOPPER

PWBSTOPPER

CLAW

SPEAKER

CHASSIS BASE

MAIN PWB

LF PWB

POWER SW PWB

REAR COVER

FRONT CONTROL PWB

CRT SOCKET PWB

FRONT CABINET

(x3)

(x9)

D (x4) [AV-36F702](x6) [AV-36F802]

(x4)

E

L

HC

K

CLAW

CLAW

B

B

G

G

J

Page 235: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 9

REMOVING THE CRT

* Replacement of the CRT should be performed by 2 or more persons.

• After removing the rear cover, chassis etc.,1. Putting the CRT change table on soft cloth, the CRT change table

should also be covered with such soft cloth (shown in Fig. 2).2. While keeping the surface of CRT down, mount the TV set on the

CRT change table balanced will as shown in Fig. 3.3. Remove 4 screws marked by arrows with a box type screwdriver as

shown in Fig. 3.

• Since the cabinet will drop when screws have been removed, besure to support the cabinet with hands.

4. After 4 screws have been removed, put the cabinet slowly on cloth(At this time, be carefully so as not to damage the front surface of thecabinet) shown in Fig. 4.

• The CRT should be assembled according to the opposite sequenceof its dismounting steps.

* The CRT change table should preferably be smaller that the CRT sur-face, and its height be about 35cm.

COATING OF SILICON GREASE FOR ELECTRICAL IN-SULATION ON THE CRT ANODE CAP SECTION

• Subsequent to replacement of the CRT and HV transformer or repairof the anode cap, etc. by dismounting them, be sure to coat silicongrease for electrical insulation as shown in Fig. 5.Wipe around the anode button with clean and dry cloth. (Fig. 5)Coat silicon grease on the section around the anode button. At thistime, take care so that any silicon greases does not sticks to theanode button. (Fig. 6)

Silicon grease product No. KS - 650N

Fig. 2

CRT CHANGE TABLE

APPROX.35cm

CLOTH

Fig. 3

CRT

BOXTYPESCREWDRIVER

CRTCHANGETABLE

Fig. 4

CRTCHANGE TABLE

CRT

CABINET

Fig. 5

Anode buttonCRT

Silicon greasecoating

Fig. 6

Silicon grease should be coated by 5mm or more from the outside diameter of anode cap.

Approx.20mm (Do notcoat grease onthis section

Anode button(No sticking ofsilicon grease)

Anode cap

Coating positionof silicon grease

Page 236: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

10 No. 51907B

MEMORY IC REPLACEMENT1. Memory IC

This model use a memory IC.This memory IC stores data for proper operation of the video and deflection circuits.When replacing, be sure to use an IC containing this (initial value) data.

2. Memory IC replacement procedure

Procedure Screen display

(1) Power offSwitch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet.

(2) Replace the memory ICInitial value must be entered into the new IC.

(3) Power onConnect the power cord to the outlet and switch on the power.

(4) System constant check and setting1) Press SLEEP TIMER key and, while the indication of “SLEEP TIMER

0 MIN.” is being displayed, press DISPLAY key and VIDEO STATUSkey on the remote control unit simultaneously.

2) The SERVICE MENU screen of Fig.1 is displayed.3) While the SERVICE MENU is displayed, again simultaneously press

the DISPLAY and VIDEO STATUS keys to display the Fig.2 SYSTEMCONSTANT screen.

4) Refer to the SYSTEM CONSTANT table and check the setting items.Where these differ, select the setting item with the MENU UP/DOWNkey and adjust the setting with the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys. (Theletters of the selected item are displayed in yellow.)

5) After adjusting, release the MENU LEFT/RIGHT key to store thesetting value.

6) Press the EXIT key twice to return the normal screen.

(5) Receive channel settingRefer to the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS(USER'S GUIDE) and set thereceive channels (Channels Preset) as described.

(6) User settingsCheck the user setting items according to Table 2.Where these do not agree, refer to the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (US-ER'S GUIDE) and set the items as described.

(7) SERVICE MENU settingVerify what to set in the SERVICE MENU, and set whatever isnecessary.(Fig.1) Refer to the SERVICE ADJUSTMENT for setting.

Fig.1

Fig.2

SYSTEM CONSTANT

MODEL : 99–99999PURITY : YESCCD : YESV-CHIP : YESCAN V-CHIP : YES999999999 999

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

SERVICE MENU

PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERSPIP 3-D Y/CLOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

SERVICE MENU

PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERS

LOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

[AV-36F702]

[AV-36F802]

Page 237: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 11

1. Use remote controller keys

POWER OFFCHANNEL CH-02VOLUME 5INPUT TVHYPER SURROUND OFFBBE ONDISPLAY OFFSLEEP TIMER 0VIDEO STATUS CHOICEPIP SOURCE CH-04 —

PIP ON (PIP POSITION) LEFT LOWER SIDE—Only for AV-36F802

2. Setting of MENU

PICTURE ADJUSTTINT CENTERCOLOR CENTERPICTURE CENTERBRIGHT CENTERDETAIL CENTERNOISE MUTING ONSET VIDEO STATUS ALL CENTER

SOUND ADJUSTBASS CENTERTREBLE CENTERBALANCE CENTERMTS STEREO

CLOCK/TIMERSSET CLOCK Unnecessary to setON/OFF TIMER NO

INITIAL SETUPTV SPEAKER ONAUDIO OUT FIXCOMPONENT-IN NOLANGUAGE ENGCLOSED CAPTION OFFAUTO TUNER SETUP TUNER MODE: AIRCHANNEL SUMMARY Unnecessary to setV-CHIP OFFSET LOCK CODE Unnecessary to setPURITY CENTER

TABLE 1 (System Constant setting)

TABLE 2 (User setting value)

Setting item Setting value

YES NO

YES NO

MODEL

AV-27F802 AV-32F802 AV-36F802 AV-27F702 AV-32F702

AV-36D502 AV-32D502 AV-27D502 AV-36F702

AV-32D302 AV-36D302 AV-32D202 AV-36D202

AV-36230 AV-32230 AV-36260 AV-32260 AV-27260

CAN V-CHIP

V-CHIP

PURITY

CCD

YES NO

YES NO

Setting item Setting contentAV-36F702 AV-36F802

YES

YES

YES

YES

AV-36F702 AV-36F802

Setting value

Page 238: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

12 No. 51907B

a CAUTIONS1. Avoid heating for more than 3 seconds.2. Do not rub the electrodes and the resist parts of the pattern.3. When removing a chip part, melt the solder adequately.4. Do not reuse a chip part after removing it.

a SOLDERING IRON1. Use a high insulation soldering iron with a thin pointed end of it.2. A 30w soldering iron is recommended for easily removing parts.

a REPLACEMENT STEPS1. How to remove Chip parts

Resistors, capacitors, etc.(1) As shown in the figure, push the part with tweezers and alter-

nately melt the solder at each end.

(2) Shift with tweezers and remove the chip part.

Transistors, diodes, variable resistors, etc.(1) Apply extra solder to each lead.

(2) As shown in the figure, push the part with tweezers and alter-nately melt the solder at each lead. Shift and remove the chippart.

Note : After removing the part, remove remaining solder from thepattern.

REPLACEMENT OF CHIP COMPONENT

2. How to install Chip parts Resistors, capacitors, etc.

(1) Apply solder to the pattern as indicated in the figure.

(2) Grasp the chip part with tweezers and place it on the solder.Then heat and melt the solder at both ends of the chip part.

Transistors, diodes, variable resistors, etc.(1) Apply solder to the pattern as indicated in the figure.(2) Grasp the chip part with tweezers and place it on the solder.(3) First solder lead A as indicated in the figure.

(4) Then solder leads B and C.

SOLDER SOLDER

A

B

C

A

B

C

Page 239: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 13

SERVICE ADJUSTMENTSADJUSTMENT PREPARATION1. You can make the necessary adjustments for this unit with either the remote control unit or with the adjustment equipment and parts

as given below.2. Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values which set the

screen to its optimum condition may differ from the initial settings.3. Make sure that AC power is turned on correctly.4. Turn on the power for the set and test equipment before use, and start the adjustment procedures after waiting at least 30 minutes.5. Unless otherwise specified, prepare the most suitable reception or input signal for adjustment.6. Never touch any adjustment parts, which are not specified in the list for this adjustment-variable resistors, transformers, capacitors, etc.7. Presetting before adjustment.

Unless otherwise specified in the adjustment instructions, preset the following functions with the remote control unit.

VIDEO STATUS STANDARD

HYPER SURROUND OFF

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE CENTER

TINT, COLOR, PICTURE,CENTER

BRIGHT, DETAIL

MEASURING INSTRUMENT1. DC voltmeter(or digital voltmeter)2. Oscilloscope3. Signal generator ( Pattern generator ) [NTSC]4. Remote control unit5. TV audio multiplex signal generator6. Frequency counter7. Resistor (1MØ)

ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

• Check of B1 POWER SUPPLY

• RF AGC adjustment

• FOCUS adjustment

• WHITE BALANCE adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (Low Light) adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (High Light) adjustmentPIP HIGH LIGHT WHITE BALANCE adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]

• BRIGHT adjustmentSUB BRIGHT adjustment

• CONTRAST adjustmentSUB CONTRAST adjustment

• DEFLECTION adjustmentV CENTER and TRAPEZIUM adjustmentV-SIZE and V-LINEARITY adjustmentH SIZE and H POSITION adjustmentSIDE PIN and CORNER PIN adjustmentPIP DISPLAY POSITION adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]

• User mode setting position

• CHROMA adjustmentSUB COLOR adjustmentSUB TINT adjustment

• MTS circuit adjustmentINPUT LEVEL checkSTEREO VCO adjustmentSAP VCO adjustmentFILTER checkSEPARATION adjustment

• PURITY and CONVERGENCE adjustmentsPURITY adjustmentSTATIC CONVERGENCE adjustmentDYNAIC CONVERGENCE adjustment

Page 240: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

14 No. 51907B

ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

FRONT

S702 : MENUS703 : CHANNEL–S704 : CHANNEL+S705 : VOLUME–S706 : VOLUME+

LINE FILTER PWB

FRONT

3D Y/C MODULE PWB(Only for AV-36F802)

FRONT

FRONTTOP

FRONT

TOP

TOP

DAF PWB

CRT SOCKET PWB

(SOLDER SIDE)

PIP PWB

AV SELECTOR PWB

MAIN PWB

POWER SW PWB FRONT CONTROL PWB

CN006B

P

B CN007

DAFCP

TP-E1

TP-G

S702S704S705 S703

S706IC101

D101

S701

E3

F901125V 5A

CN005

CN002

CN001

PW

CN005CN004

CN004

S1 DAF

UPPER : HMIDDLE : FOCUSLOWER : SCREEN

S1

C

Q

E1HV

CP

E2

E1

K

P

CN

003

CN

002

CN

001

J501

SS

CN006 CN007

IC702

IC701 CPU

DEG

TU001

(Only for AV-36F802)

(Only for AV-36F802)

TU001

J601

R027

J602

K

Q

R507

Q511Heatsink

J502J504 J503

CN003

TU001

FRONT

Page 241: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 15

BASIC OPERATION OF SERVICE MENU1. TOOL OF SERVICE MENU OPERATION

Operate the SERVICE MENU with the REMOTE CONTROL UNIT.

2. SERVICE MENU ITEMSIn general, basic setting (adjustments) items or verifications are performed in the SERVICE MENU.

• PICTURE ............................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the VIDEO/CHROMA and DEFLECTION circuits.

• SOUND .................................. This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the AUDIO circuit.

• THEATER .............................. This is used when the THEATER MODE is adjusted.

• OTHERS ................................ This is used when the OTHERS MODE is adjusted.

• PIP ......................................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the PIP circuit. [Only for AV-36F802]

• LOW LIGHT ........................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.

• HIGH LIGHT .......................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.

• RF AFC1 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC1 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust]

• RF AFC2 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC2 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust]

• VCO (CW) .............................. This is not used for service.

• I2C BUS CTRL ...................... This is used when ON/OFF of the I2C BUS CTRL is set. [Fixed ON]

3. Basic Operations of the SERVICE MENU(1) How to enter the SERVICE MENU.

Press SLEEP TIMER key and, while the indication of “SLEEP TIMER 0 MIN.” is being displayed, press DISPLAY key and VIDEO STATUSkey on the remote control unit simultaneously to enter the SERVICE MENU screen 1 shown in the next figure page.

(2) SERVICE MENU screen selectionPress the UP / DOWN key of the MENU to select any of the following items.(The letters of the selected items are displayed in yellow.)

[AV-36F702]

• PICTURE • SOUND

• THEATER •OTHERS

• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT

• RF AFC1 • RF AFC2

• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL

(3) Enter the any setting ( adjustment ) mode[AV-36F702]

• PICTURE, SOUND and OTHERS mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the

screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 is

displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS setting can be performed.[AV-36F802]

• PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS and 3-D Y/C mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN

MENU ), the screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 or

the 3-D Y/C mode screen 6 is displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C setting can be performed.

• PIP mode [Only for AV-36F802]1) If select the PIP item, and the LEFT/RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU), the screen 7 will be displayed as shown

in figure page later.2) Then the UP/DOWN key is pressed, the PIP mode screen 8 is displayed, and the PIP setting can be performed.[AV-36F702, AV-36F802]

• THEATER, LOW LIGHT, HIGH LIGHT, RF AFC1, RF AFC2, VCO(CW) and I2C BUS CTRL mode1) If select any of THEATER / LOW LIGHT / HIGH LIGHT / RF AFC1 / RF AFC2 / VCO (CW) / I2C BUS CTRL items, and the LEFT / RIGHT

key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the screens 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 will be displayed as shown in figure pagelater.

2) Then the settings or verifications can be performed.

[AV-36F802]

• PICTURE • SOUND

• THEATER • OTHERS

• PIP • 3-D Y/C

• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT

• RF AFC1 • RF AFC2

• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL

Page 242: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

16 No. 51907B

SERVICE MENU

PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERSPIP 3D Y/CLOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

IT

SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU) SCREEN PICTURE MODE

EXIT BY

SELECT BYEXITEXIT BY

1. BRIGHTSTATUS

99999999999

1. NOISE DET.STATUS

99999999999

1. OSD POS. 999

SOUND MODE OTHERS MODE

1. PIP BRSTATUS

99999999999

HIGH LIGHT MODE

SCREEN PIP MODE (Only for AV-36F802)

EXITEXIT BY

SELECT BY

TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW

RF AFC1 ONFINE 999

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

IT

RF AFC1 MODE[DO NOT ADJUST]

RF AFC2 MODE[DO NOT ADJUST]

I2C BUS CTRL MODE[FIXED ON]

EXIT BY

TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW

RF AFC2 ONFINE 999

HIGH LEVELREFERENCE LEVELLOW LEVEL

SYNC : YES

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

I2C BUS ON

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

THEATER MODE (1/2) THEATER MODE (2/2)

TINT 999 B CUT. 999COLOR 999 R DRIVE 999PICTURE 999 B DRIVE 999BRIGHT 999 DC REST. 999DETAIL 999 BLK ST. 999R CUT. 999 GMM PNT 999G CUT. 999

PAGE 1/2

EXITEXIT BY

SELECT BYOPERATE BY

CD MAT. 99 CMP CD M 99RY GAIN 99 CMP RY G 99GY PHASE 99 CMP GY P 99CORING 99 CMP COR 99

PAGE 2/2

EXITEXIT BY

SELECT BYOPERATE BY

BRIGHT

LOW LIGHT MODE

999 999

999

999

HIGH LIGHT999 999

2 31

11

12

4 5

7 8

9

13

VCO (CW) MODE[DO NOT USE]

14

15

10

SERVICE MENU

PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERS

LOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL

SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX

ITEXIT BY

[AV-36F702]

[AV-36F802]

1. YC 001STATUS

99999999999

3-D Y/C MODE(Only for AV-36F802)

6

Page 243: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 17

(4) Setting method1) UP / DOWN key of the MENU

Select the SETTING ITEM.

2) LEFT / RIGHT key of the MENUSetting (adjust) the SETTING VALUE of the SETTING ITEM.When the key is released the SETTING VALUE will be stored (memorized).

3) EXIT keyReturns to the previous screen.

(5) Releasing SERVICE MENU1) After returning to the SERVICE MENU upon completion of the setting (ad-

justment) work, press the EXIT key again.

¤ The settings for LOW LIGHT and HIGH LIGHT are described in the WHITE BAL-ANCE page of ADJUSTMENT.

1. BRIGHTSTATUS

99999999999

SETTING ITEM

INITIALSETTING VALUE (Adjust)SETTING VALUE

PICTURE MODE

Page 244: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

18 No. 51907B

INITIAL SETTING VALUE OF SERVICE MENU1. Adjustment of the SERVICE MENU is made on the basis of the initial setting values; however, the new setting values which set the

screen in its optimum condition may differ from the initial setting.2. Do not change the initial setting values of the setting (Adjustment) items not listed in “ADJUSTMENT”.

• PICTURE MODEThe four setting items in the video mode No.6 EXT BRI., No.7 EXT PIC., No.8 EXT COL. and No.9 EXT TINT are linked to the items in the TVMODE No.1 BRIGHT, No.2 PICTURE, No.3 COLOR and No.4 TINT, respectively. When the setting items in the TV mode are adjusted, thevalues in the setting items in the video mode are revised automatically to the same values in the TV mode.(The initial setting values given in ( )are off-set values.)When the four items (No.6, 7, 8 and 9) are adjusted in the video mode, the setting values in each item are revised independently.

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 BRIGHT 000 — 127 063

2 PICTURE 000 — 127 070

3 COLOR 000 — 127 072

4 TINT 000 — 127 063

5 TV DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702

TV DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802

6 EXT BRIGHT ±025 ±000

7 EXT PICT. ±025 +002

8 EXT COLOR ±025 ±000

9 EXT TINT ±025 ±000

10 EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702

EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802

11 CMP BRIGHT ±025 ±000

12 CMP PICT. ±025 ±000

13 CMP COLOR 000 — 127 068

14 CMP TINT 000 — 127 068

15 CMP DETAIL 000 — 063 050

16 CMP R CUT ±025 –011

17 CMP G CUT ±025 ±000

18 CMP B CUT ±025 –001

19 CMP R DRV ±025 ±000

20 CMP B DRV ±025 ±000

21 WPL 000 / 001 001

22 B. B. SW 000 / 001 000

23 C TRAP 000 / 001 000

24 CORING 000 / 001 000 AV-36F702

CORING 000 / 001 001 AV-36F802

25 CMP CORING 000 / 001 001

26 TV SHARPF 000 / 001 001

27 EXT SHARPF 000 / 001 001

28 CMP SHARPF 000 / 001 001

29 RGB CONT 000 — 063 031

30 TV ID SENS 000 / 001 000

31 EXT ID SEN 000 / 001 001

32 F ID 000 / 001 000

33 Y MUTE 000 / 001 000

34 AUDIO ATT 000 — 127 127

35 SUB CONT 000 — 015 008

Page 245: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 19

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

36 R Y GAIN 000 / 001 001

37 CMP R Y GA 000 / 001 001

38 G Y PHASE 000 / 001 000

39 CMP G Y PH 000 / 001 000

40 CD MATRIX 000 — 003 003

41 CMP CD MAT 000 — 003 002

42 BLACK ST 000 — 003 001

43 DC REST 000 — 003 001

44 COLOR GMM 000 / 001 000

45 UV/CBCR 000 / 001 001

46 AT FLESH 000 / 001 000

47 ABL GAIN 000 — 003 000

48 ABL ST PNT 000 — 003 003

49 RGB ABCL 000 / 001 001

50 TV BPF TOF 000 / 001 000

51 EXT BPF TOF 000 / 001 000

52 GMM PNT 000 — 003 003

53 SVM GAIN 000 — 003 002

54 CMP SVM GA 000 — 003 002

55 SVM PHASE 000 / 001 000

56 AUDIO SW 000 / 001 000

57 BUZZ 000 / 001 000

58 IF FREQ 000 / 001 000

59 RF AGC 000 — 063 045

60 AFT MUTE 000 / 001 000

61 AFT SENS 000 / 001 001

62 R/G DRV SW 000 / 001 001

63 BLK SW 000 / 001 000

64 V S COR 000 — 015 010

65 V LIN 000 — 015 007

66 V SIZE 000 — 127 063

67 V AGC 000 / 001 000

68 V CENTER 000 — 063 052

69 TV AFC 000 — 003 000

70 EXT AFC 000 — 003 002

71 V POSI 000 — 007 000

72 H POSI 000 — 031 020

73 H SIZE 000 — 063 028

74 TV V FREQ 000 — 003 000

75 EXT V FREQ 000 — 003 003

76 SIDE PIN 000 — 063 025

77 STAND BY 000 / 001 000

78 TRAPEZ 000 — 063 035

79 V RAMP REF 000 / 001 001

80 V 48HZ 000 / 001 000

81 V EHT 000 — 007 000

82 TOP PIN 000 — 031 012

Page 246: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

20 No. 51907B

83 H EHT 000 — 007 000

84 BTM PIN 000 — 031 011

85 V BLK LOW 000 — 003 000

86 V BLK UP 000 — 003 000

87 CAPTION IN 000 / 001 000

88 H BLK 000 / 001 000

89 SCREEN 000 / 001 000

90 ACB SW 000 / 001 000

91 ACB PULSE 000 — 015 007

92 OVER MODU 000 / 001 001

93 APACON LIM 000 / 001 001

94 TEST 000 — 255 128

95 RF S/N TY 000 — 002 002 AV-36F702

RF S/N TY 000 — 002 001 AV-36F802

96 EXT S/N TY 000 — 002 002 AV-36F702

EXT S/N TY 000 — 002 001 AV-36F802

97 RF SN YC E 000 — 255 005

98 RF SN YC F 000 — 255 016

99 RF SN YC G 000 — 063 032

100 RF SN YC H 000 — 255 025

101 EX SN YC E 000 — 255 005

102 EX SN YC F 000 — 255 016

103 EX SN YC G 000 — 063 032

104 EX SN YC H 000 — 255 025

105 RF SN VC 1 000 — 063 000

106 RF SN VC 2 000 — 063 007

107 RF SN VC 3 000 — 063 014

108 RF SN VC 4 000 — 063 021

109 EX SN VC 1 000 — 063 000

110 EX SN VC 2 000 — 063 007

111 EX SN VC 3 000 — 063 014

112 EX SN VC 4 000 — 063 021

113 COR LEVEL 000 — 003 003

114 VNR CHK 000 — 255 003

115 YC SN TIME 000 — 255 005

116 VC SN TIME 000 — 255 005

117 VM DATA A ±127 +008

118 VM DATA B ±127 –004

119 VM DATA C ±127 –016

120 VM DATA D 000 / 001 001

121 VC SN STOP 000 — 255 010

122 CH MUTE 000/001 000

123 VM OFF TY 000/001 000

124 VC VM OFF 000/001 001

125 YC VM OFF 000 — 255 255

126 F LOCK 000 — 002 002

127 VF LOCK EX 000/001 000

128 PURI RGB 000 — 063 031

129 PURI BCK 000/001 000

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

Page 247: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 21

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 NOISE DET. 000 / 001 001

2 IN LEVEL 000 — 063 025

3 FH MONITOR 000 / 001 000

4 STEREO VCO 000 — 063 030

5 PILOT CAN. 000 / 001 000

6 FILTER 000 — 063 030

7 LOW SEP. 000 — 063 028

8 HI SEP. 000 — 063 025

9 5FH MON. 000 / 001 000

10 SAP VCO 000 — 063 003

11 IN GAIN 000 / 001 000

12 FIL. OFFSET ±010 ±000

13 BBE BASS ±010 +001

14 BBE TRE ±010 –001

• SOUND MODE

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

TINT ±20 –06

COLOR ±20 –03

PICTURE ±50 –15

BRIGHT ±20 ±00

DETAIL ±20 +03

R CUT. ±20 ±00

G CUT. ±20 ±00

B CUT. ±20 ±00

R DRIVE ±99 +07

B DRIVE ±99 –25

DC REST. 00 — 03 01

BLK ST. 00 — 03 00

GMM PNT 00 — 03 01

CD MATRIX 00 — 03 01

RY GAIN 00 / 01 01

GY PHASE 00 / 01 00

CORING 00 / 01 01

CMP CD M 00 — 03 01

CMP RY G 00 / 01 01

CMP GY P 00 / 01 00

CMP COR 00 / 01 01

• THEATER MODE

Page 248: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

22 No. 51907B

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 OSD POS. 000 — 007 002

2 CCD POS. 000 — 015 003

3 EOSEL 000 / 001 000

4 MENU COLOR 000 — –030 –010

5 MENU PICT. 000 — –030 –010

6 MENU BRI. 000 — –030 –010

• OTHERS MODE

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 PIP BR 000 — 015 005

2 PIP PICT 030 — 045 045

3 PIP TINT 000 — 063 036

4 PIP COL 000 — 015 010

5 P R CUT 000 — 015 003

6 P G CUT 000 — 015 000

7 P B CUT 000 — 015 002

8 P R DR 000 — 255 052

9 P G DR 000 — 255 055

10 P B DR 000 — 255 060

11 LEFT POS. 000 — 255 012

12 RIGHT POS. 000 — 255 026

13 UPPER POS. 000 — 127 012

14 LOWER POS. 000 — 127 011

15 PICT LOCK 000 / 001 001

16 SELDEL 000 — 015 000

17 AGCFIX 000 / 001 001

18 AGCADST 000 / 001 000

19 AGC 000 — 015 007

20 VSPDEL 000 — 031 000

21 VSPISQ 000 / 001 001

22 YCOR 000 / 001 001

23 XFREQF 000 / 001 001

24 WTCHDG 000 / 001 001

25 COLON 000 / 001 000

26 ACQNEW 000 / 001 000

27 DSTDET 000 / 001 001

28 CRIBEOK 000 / 001 000

29 FCBEOK 000 / 001 000

30 NOCRID 000 / 001 000

31 NONSED 000 / 001 000

• PIP MODE [Only for AV-36F802]

Page 249: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 23

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

1 YC 001 000 ~ 003 001

2 YC 002 000 ~ 003 001

3 YC 003 000 ~ 003 001

4 YC 004 000 ~ 003 000

5 YC 005 000 ~ 003 000

6 YC 006 000 ~ 003 000

7 YC 007 000 ~ 003 003

8 YC 008 000 ~ 003 000

9 YC 009 000 ~ 003 001

10 YC 010 000 ~ 003 000

11 YC 011 000 ~ 007 004

12 YC 012 000 ~ 007 002

13 YC 013 000 ~ 015 002

14 YC 014 000 ~ 015 010

15 YC 015 000 ~ 015 002

16 YC 016 000 ~ 015 004

17 YC 017 000 / 001 000

18 YC 018 000 / 001 000

19 YC 019 000 ~ 003 002

20 YC 020 000 / 001 000

21 YC 021 000 / 001 000

22 YC 022 000 ~ 003 002

23 YC 023 000 / 001 000

24 YC 024 000 / 001 000

25 YC 025 000 / 001 000

26 YC 026 000 ~ 003 000

27 YC 027 000 ~ 003 001

28 YC 028 000 ~ 003 001

29 YC 029 000 ~ 003 001

30 YC 030 000 ~ 003 001

31 YC 031 000 ~ 003 002

32 YC 032 000 / 001 000

33 YC 033 000 ~ 007 000

34 YC 034 000 ~ 015 000

35 YC 035 000 ~ 007 002

36 YC 036 000 ~ 031 015

37 YC 037 000 ~ 003 000

38 YC 038 000 ~ 015 009

39 YC 039 000 ~ 003 001

40 YC 040 000 ~ 003 001

41 YC 041 000 / 001 000

42 YC 042 000 / 001 000

43 YC 043 000 / 001 000

44 YC 044 000 / 001 001

45 YC 045 000 ~ 015 003

46 YC 046 000 ~ 015 012

47 YC 047 000 ~ 015 008

• 3-D Y/C MODE [Only for AV-36F802]

Page 250: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

24 No. 51907B

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

48 YC 048 000 ~ 015 004

49 YC 049 000 ~ 015 010

50 YC 050 000 / 001 001

51 YC 051 000 / 001 001

52 YC 052 000 ~ 003 000

53 YC 053 000 / 001 000

54 YC 054 000 / 001 001

55 YC 055 000 / 001 001

56 YC 056 000 / 001 001

57 YC 057 000 ~ 015 000

58 YC 058 000 / 001 000

59 YC 059 000 / 001 001

60 YC 060 000 ~ 003 000

61 YC 061 000 ~ 015 000

62 YC 062 DBL 000 ~ 007 002

63 YC 063 N/A 000 ~ 015 002

64 YC 064 N/A 000 ~ 015 004

65 YC 065 N/A 000 ~ 015 002

66 YC 066 N/A 000 ~ 015 004

67 YC 067 000 / 001 000

68 YC 068 000 / 001 000

69 YC 069 000 / 001 000

70 YC 070 FIX 000 ~ 003 000

71 YC 071 000 / 001 000

72 YC 072 000 / 001 000

73 YC 073 000 / 001 001

74 YC 074 FIX 000 / 001 000

75 YC 075 FIX 000 / 001 000

76 YC 076 000 / 001 001

77 YC 077 FIX 000 / 001 000

78 YC 078 FIX 000 / 001 000

79 YC 079 FIX 000 ~ 007 005

80 YC 080 FIX 000 ~ 015 000

81 YC 081 FIX 000 ~ 015 008

82 YC 082 FIX 000 ~ 015 004

83 YC 083 FIX 000 ~ 015 004

84 YC 084 DBL 000 ~ 255 112

85 YC 085 DBL 000 ~ 255 008

86 YC 086 000 / 001 001

87 YC 087 000 ~ 003 003

88 YC 088 000 / 001 001

89 YC 089 000 / 001 000

90 YC 090 000 / 001 000

91 YC 091 000 / 001 000

92 YC 092 N/A 000 / 001 000

93 YC 093 N/A 000 / 001 000

94 YC 094 DBL 000 ~ 003 001

Page 251: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 25

No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

95 YC 095 DBL 000 / 001 001

96 YC 096 DBL 000 / 001 001

97 YC 097 DBL 000 / 001 000

98 YC 098 DBL 000 / 001 000

99 YC 099 DBL 000 ~ 003 000

100 YC 100 DBL 000 ~ 003 000

101 YC 101 DBL 000 / 001 000

102 YC 102 DBL 000 / 001 000

103 YC 103 DBL 000 / 001 001

104 YC 104 DBL 000 / 001 000

105 YC 105 DBL 000 / 001 000

106 YC 106 DBL 000 / 001 000

107 YC 107 DBL 000 ~ 007 002

108 3-D Y/C 000 / 001 001

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

R CUTOFF 0 — 255 085

G CUTOFF 0 — 255 085

B CUTOFF 0 — 255 085

• LOW LIGHT MODE

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

R DRIVE 0 — 127 060

B DRIVE 0 — 127 060

• HIGH LIGHT MODE

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

RF AFC1 ON / OFF ON

FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×

• RF AFC1 MODE

DO NOTADJUST

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

RF AFC2 ON / OFF ON

FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×

• RF AFC2 MODE

DO NOTADJUST

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark

I2C BUS ON/OFF [FIXED ON]

• I2C BUS CTRL MODE

DO NOTADJUST

Page 252: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

26 No. 51907B

ADJUSTMENTS

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

Check ofB1 POWERSUPPLY

DC Voltmeter R507 C504side (B1)

Q511heatsink ( )

[Main PWB]

1. Receive a black-and-white signal.2. Connect the DC Voltmeter to R507 C504 side (B1) and Q511 heatsink

( ).3. Confirm that the voltage is DC134V .+2V

-2V

RF AGCadjustment

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.59 RF AGC of the PICTURE MODE.3. Press the MUTING key of the remote control unit to turn off color.4. With the LEFT key of the remote control unit, get noise in the screen

picture. (0 side of setting value)5. Press the RIGHT key of the remote control unit and stop when noise

disappears from the screen.6. Change to other channels and make sure that there Is no irregular-

ity.7. Press the MUTING key and get color out.

No.59 RF AGC

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF RF AGC

FOCUSadjustment

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of B1 POWER SUPPLY, SUB BRIGHT and PICTURE.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.• The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUS ad-justment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should be reconfirmingPURITY adjustment.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. While looking at the screen center, adjust the FOCUS VR so that

the horizontal lines will be clear and in fine detail.3. Adjust the H VR so that the vertical lines will be clear and in fine

detail.4. Make sure that the picture is in focus even when the screen gets

darkened.

FOCUS VR[In HVT]

H VR[In HVT]

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF FOCUS

B1 POWER SUPPLY

Remotecontrol unit

Page 253: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 27

Description

Note :Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a black-and-white signal.(Color off)2. Select the [LOW LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of BRIGHT is 063 with the LEFT / RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. Set the initial setting value of R CUTOFF, G CUTOFF and B CUT-

OFF is 085 with the 4 to 9 key of the remote control unit.5. Display a single horizontal line by pressing the 1 key of the remote

control unit.6. Turn the screen VR all the way to the left.7. Turn the screen VR gradually to the right from the left until either

one of the red, blue or green colors appears faintly.8. Adjust the two colors which did not appear until the single horizontal

line that is displayed becomes white using the 4 to 9 keys of theremote control unit.

9. Turn the screen VR to where the single horizontal line glows faintly.10.Press the 2 key to return to the regular screen.

9 The 3 EXIT key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the [HIGH LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of R DRIVE and B DRIVE is 060 with the

4 , 6 , 7 and 9 keys of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the screen until it becomes white using the 4 , 6 , 7 and 9

keys of the remote control unit.

9 The 3 (EXIT) key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part

WHITEBALANCE(Low Light)adjustment

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

No.1 BRIGHT

R CUTOFFG CUTOFFB CUTOFF

SCREEN VR[In HVT]

WHITEBALANCE(High Light)adjustment

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

R DRIVEB DRIVE

ADJUSTMENT OF WHITE BALANCE

BRIGHT999

999

999 999

R CUTOFF

B CUTOFFBRIGHT

G CUTOFF

H.LINE ON

[LOW LIGHT] MODE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

H.LINE OFF EXIT

R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF

R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

999 999

R DRIVE

B DRIVE

H.LINE ON

[HIGH LIGHT] MODE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

H.LINE OFF EXIT

R DRIVE B DRIVE

R DRIVE B DRIVE

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

HIGHT LIGHT

Page 254: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

28 No. 51907B

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

PIPHIGH LIGHTWHITEBALANCEadjustment[AV-36F802]

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE and HIGH LIGHTWHITE BALANCE for the main picture.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the white color of the PIP screen using the No. 8 P R

DR and the No. 10 P B DR of the PIP MODE so that it is the samebrightness as the main screen.

No.8 P R DRNo.10 P B DR

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

PIP screen

Main screen

SUB BRIGHTadjustment

No.1 BRIGHT Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE and HIGH LIGHTWHITE BALANCE.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.1 BRIGHT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.1 BRIGHT with the LEFT /

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the brightness is not best with the initial setting value, make fine

adjustment of the No.1 BRIGHT until you get the optimum bright-ness.

SUBCONTRASTadjustment

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB BRIGHT.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.2 PICTURE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.2 PICTURE with the LEFT /

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the contrast is not best with the initial setting value, make fine

adjustment of the No.2 PICTURE until you get the optimum con-trast.

No.2 PICTURE

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRAST

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

ADJUSTMENT OF BRIGHT

Remotecontrol unit

Remotecontrol unit

Page 255: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 29

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

V CENTER andTRAPEZIUMadjustment

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

No.68 V CENTERNo.78 TRAPEZ

Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of SUB BRIGHT and SUB CONTRAST.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust the No.68 V CENTER of the PICTURE MODE to be the same

between the CRT vertical center and crosshatch vertical center.3. Adjust the No.78 TRAPEZ of the PICTUER MODE to be the vertical

lines straight.4. Confirm the vertical lines to be straight. If it is not straight, adjust to

be straight at the No.78 TRAPEZ.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, SUB BRIGHT, SUB CONTRAST, V CENTER,TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE and V-LINEARITY.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.73 H SIZE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.73 H SIZE with the LEFT /

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the No.73 H SIZE until the horizontal screen size is 90%.5. Adjust the No.72 H POSI until the screen will be horizontally centered.

No.73 H SIZENo.72 H POSI

V-SIZE andV-LINEARITYadjustment

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of SUB BRIGHT and SUB CONTRAST.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.66 V SIZE of the PICTURE MODE to squeeze the

laster.3. Adjust the No.65 V LIN of the PICTURE MODE to be symmetrical.4. Adjust the No.66 V SIZE until the vertical screen size is 92%.

No.66 V SIZENo.65 V LIN

Screen size

Picture size 100%

Screen size 92%

Picture size 100%

H SIZE andH POSITIONadjustment

Screen size 90%

Picture size 100%

Screen size

Picture size 100%

ADJUSTMENT OF DEFLECTION

Page 256: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

30 No. 51907B

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

SIDE PIN andCORNER PINadjsutment

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

No.76 SIDE PINNo.82 TOP PINNo.84 BTM PIN

Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, SUB BRIGHT, SUB CONTRAST, V CENTER,TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE and V-LINEARITY.

1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust such that vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight at

the No.76 SIDE PIN of the PICTURE MODE.3. Adjust the end of vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight

at the No.82 TOP PIN and the No.84 BTM PIN of the PICTUREMODE.

PIP DISPLAYPOSITIONadjustment[AV-36F802]

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE, V-LINEARITY, HSIZE, H POSITION, SIDE PIN and CORNER PIN for the main pic-ture.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the PIP screen size so that it occupies 80% ± 2% of the

main screen area.

No.11 LEFT POS.No.12 RIGHT POS.No.13 UPPER POS.No.14 LOWER POS.

LEFT POS. RIGHT POS.

UPPER POS.

LOWER POS.

Mainscreensize

Main screen size

80%±2%

80% ±2%

Straight Straight

Remotecontrol unit

Page 257: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 31

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

SUB COLORadjustment

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3 COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. If the color is not the best with the Initial setting value, make fine

adjustment of the No.3 COLOR until you get the optimum color.

No.3 COLORSignalgenerator

Oscilloscope

Remotecontrol unit

TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]

YG

R

W Cy

(–)0V(+)

MgB

(A)

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3. COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust COLOR and bring the value of (A) in the illustration to the

voltage +26V (VW–B).

SUB TINTadjustment

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT

key of the remote control unit.4. If the tint is not the best with the initial setting value, make fine ad-

justment of the No.4 TINT until you get the optimum tint.

No.4 TINTSignalgenerator

Oscilloscope

Remotecontrol unit

TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]

YG

R

W Cy

(–)0V(+)

Mg B(B)

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.

• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.

[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT

key to the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust TINT and bring the value of (B) in the illustration to the

voltvoltage +14V (VW–Mg).

ADJUSTMENT OF CHROMA

Page 258: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

32 No. 51907B

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

MTS SAPVCOadjustment

Signalgenerator

Frequencycounter

Remotecontrol unit

Resister[1MØ]

No.9 5FH MON.No.10 SAP VCO

1. Receive a RF signal (non modulated sound signal) from the an-tenna terminal.

2. Connect between pin 4 of [MPX] connector and GND (Pin 3 of [MPX]connector) through 1MØ Resistor.

3. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset thesetting value from 0 to 1.

4. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector) .

5. Select the No.10 SAP VCO.6. Set the initial setting value of the No.10 SAP VCO with the LEFT/

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.7. Adjust the No.10 SAP VCO so that the frequency counter will dis-

play 78.67kHz±0.5kHz.8. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset the

setting value from 1 to 0.

MTS FILTERcheck

1. Select the No.6 FILTER of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.6 FILTER is set at its initial setting value.

No.6 FILTER

4 pin TP_952.53 pin GND2 pin AUDIO_R[MPX Connectorin MAIN PWB]

MTSSEPARATIONadjustment

Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”

1. Input a stereo L signal (300Hz) from the TV audio multiplex signalgenerator to the antenna terminal.

2. Connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of [MPX] connector, and displayone cycle portion of the 300Hz signal.

3. Change the connection of the oscilloscope to pin 2 of [MPX] con-nector, and enlarge the voltage axis.

4. Select the No.7 LOW SEP. of the SOUND MODE.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.7 LOW SEP. with the LEFT/

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.7 LOW SEP. so that the 300Hz signal level will be-

come minimum.7. Change the signal to 3kHz, and connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of

[MPX] connector.8. Adjust the No.8 HI SEP. so that the 3kHz signal level will become

minimum.

No.7 LOW SEP.No.8 HI SEP.

TV audiomultiplexsignalgenerator

Oscilloscope

Remotecontrol unit

1 pin AUDIO_L2 pin AUDIO_R3 pin GND[MPX Connectorin MAIN PWB]

L-Channel signal waveform

R-Channel crosstalk portion

Minimum

1 cycle

MTS INPUTLEVELcheck

1. Select the No.2 IN LEVEL of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.2 IN LEVEL is set at its initial setting value.

No.2 IN LEVEL

MTS STEREOVCOadjustment

Signalgenerator

Frequencycounter

Remotecontrol unit

Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”

1. Receive a RF signal (nonmodulated sound signal) from the antennaterminal.

2. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of SOUND MODE, and change thesetting value from 0 to 1.

3. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector).

4. Select the No.4 STEREO VCO.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 STEREO VCO with the LEFT/

RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.4 STEREO VCO so that the frequency counter will

display 15.73kHz±0.1kHz.7. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of the SOUND MODE, and reset the

setting value from 1 to 0.

No.3 FH MONITORNo.4 STEREO VCO

2 pin AUDIO R3 pin GND[MPX Connectorin MAIN PWB]

ADJUSTMENT OF MTS CIRCUIT

Remotecontrol unit

Remotecontrol unit

Page 259: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 33

ADJUSTMENTS OF PURITY AND CONVERGENCE

Note: The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUSadjustment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should bereconfirming PURITY adjustment.

PURITY ADJUSTMENT

1. Demagnetize CRT with the demagnetizer.

2. Loosen the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.

3. Remove the wedges.

4. Input a green raster signal from the signal generator, and turn thescreen to green raster.

5. Move the deflection yoke backward.

6. Bring the long lug of the purity magnets on the short lug and positionthem horizontally. (Fig.2)

7. Adjust the gap between two lugs so that the GREEN RASTER willcome into the center of the screen. (Fig.3)

8. Move the deflection yoke forward, and fix the position of the deflec-tion yoke so that the whole screen will become green.

9. Insert the wedge to the top side of the deflection yoke so that it willnot move.

10. Input a crosshatch signal.

11. Verify that the screen is horizontal.

12. Input red and blue raster signals, and make sure that purity is prop-erly adjusted.

Fig. 1

• P/C MAGNETS

P : PURITY MAGNET4 : 4 POLES (convergence magnets)6 : 6 POLES (convergence magnets)

CRT

WEDGE

P

P / CMAGNETS

4 6

DEFLECTION YOKE

Fig. 2

Long lug

Short lug

PURITY MAGNETS

Bring the long lug over the short lugand position them horizontally.

Fig. 3

(FRONT VIEW) GREEN RASTER

CENTER

Page 260: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

34 No. 51907B

STATIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Input a crosshatch signal.

2. Using 4-pole convergence magnets, overlap the red and blue linesin the center of the screen (Fig. 4) and turn them to magenta (red/blue).

3. Using 6-pole convergence magnets, overlap the magenta(red/blue)and green lines in the center of the screen and turn them to white.

4. Repeat 2 and 3 above, and make best convergence.

DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Move the deflection yoke up and down and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 5)

2. Move the deflection yoke left to right and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 6)

3. Repeat 1 and 2 above, and make best convergence.

• After adjustment, fix the wedge at the original position.Fasten the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.Fix the P/C magnets with glue.

(FRONT VIEW)

RED

REDRED

RED

BLUE

(FRONT VIEW)

BLUEBLUE

BLUE GREEN

GREENGREEN

GREEN

(FRONT VIEW)

GREEN GREEN

GREEN

GREEN

RED REDRED

RED

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Page 261: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

No. 51907B 35

HOW TO CHECK THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT1. HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT

After repairing the high voltage hold down circuit shown in Fig. 1.This circuit shall be checked to operate correctly.

2. CHECKING OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT(1) Turn the POWER SW ON.(2) As shown in Fig. 1, set the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(3) Make sure that the screen picture disappears.(4) Temporarily unplug the power cord.(5) Remove the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(6) Again plug the power cord, make sure that the normal picture is displayed on the screen.

Fig. 1

2 3 S1 CONNECTOR

HEATER

RESISTOR23.0 kΩ ± 115 Ω 1/4 W

++

POWERON OFF

RY951

R952

D535

R532

R951

Q951

Q532

Q531

R533

R534

R535R538C533

D534 D531

D532BW

C525

R537 FR525

D525

T502

4

Page 262: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

AV-36F702AV-36F802

36 No. 51907B

SELF CHECK FUNCTIONS1. Outline

This model has self check functions given below. When a malfunction has been detected, the POWER is turned off and the LED flashes to informof the failure . The malfunction is detected by the signal input state of the control line connected to the microcomputer.

2. Self check items

Check item Details of detection Method of detection State of malfunction

3. Self check indicating function

The self-check function begins detection about 5 seconds after poweris supplied.In the event a malfunction is detected, the power is cut off immedi-ately.At this time, the ON-TIMER LED flashes to inform of the malfunc-tion.

[ON-TIMER LED indication]The ON-TIMER LED flashes at 0.5 seconds intervals.

POWERSupplied

After about5 seconds

Start ofdetection

Malfunctionis detected

POWER OFF

FlashingON-TIMER LED

Over-current protector Operation of B1 protector circuit. The microcomputer detects at 1second intervals.If NG is detected for more than200 ms, a malfunction is inter-preted.

When a malfunction has beendetected, the POWER is turnedoff. While the POWER is beingturned off , the power key of theremote controller is not opera-tional until the power code istaken out and put in again.

Page 263: PRELIMINARY SERVICE MANUAL - ePanorama AV...Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values whi ch set the

Printed in JapanVP0112SW

36F702Y-UCM #436F802Y-UCM #4

JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA

Head office : 1700 Valley Road, Wayne, New Jersey 07470 (973)317-5000East Coast : 10 New Maple Avenue, Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058 (973)396-1000Midwest : 705 Enterprise St. Aurora, Illinois 60504 (630)851-7855West Coast : 5665 Corporate Avenue, Cypress, California 90630 (714)229-8011Southwest : 10700 Hammerly, Suite 105, Houston, Texas 77043 (713)935-9331Hawaii : 2969 Mapunapuna Place, Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 (808)833-5828Southeast : 1500 Lakes Parkway, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30243 (770)339-2582

JVC CANADA INC.Head office : 21 Finchdene Square Scarborough, Ontario M1X 1A7 (416)293-1311Vancouver : 13040 Worster Court Richmond B.C. V6V 2B3 (604)270-1311

DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.

®